diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-8.txt | 3978 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 63372 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1307862 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/29383-h.htm | 5737 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/church.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41251 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/college.jpg | bin | 0 -> 41130 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 70694 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/dole.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18260 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/ewa.jpg | bin | 0 -> 29367 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/executive.jpg | bin | 0 -> 47981 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/hamakua.jpg | bin | 0 -> 65790 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/home.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35866 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/house.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40526 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/judiciary.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53290 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/kawaiahao.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43498 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/map.jpg | bin | 0 -> 196195 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/map_sm.jpg | bin | 0 -> 18268 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/masonic.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35873 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/museum.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37305 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/nuuanu.jpg | bin | 0 -> 38088 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/pauahi.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40858 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/pauoa.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33878 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/pineapple.jpg | bin | 0 -> 56604 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/puna.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53423 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/railroad.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43434 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/rice.jpg | bin | 0 -> 39078 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/school.jpg | bin | 0 -> 37802 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/steamship.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50550 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/valley.jpg | bin | 0 -> 33007 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383-h/images/waikiki.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35048 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383.txt | 3978 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 29383.zip | bin | 0 -> 63362 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
35 files changed, 13709 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/29383-8.txt b/29383-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7bd985e --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3978 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Hawaiian Islands + +Author: The Department of Foreign Affairs + +Release Date: July 12, 2009 [EBook #29383] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + + + + + + + + +THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS + +THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, +COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL. + + +[Illustration (Cover image).] + + +[Illustration: MAP of the HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.] + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER I. 3 +CHAPTER II. 12 +CHAPTER III. 16 +CHAPTER IV. 20 +CHAPTER V. 37 +CHAPTER VI. 43 +CHAPTER VII. 52 +CHAPTER VIII. 58 +OFFICIAL DIRECTORY. 85 + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + +MAP OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. +SANFORD B. DOLE, President of the Republic of Hawaii. +EXECUTIVE BUILDING. / JUDICIARY BUILDING. +EWA MILL. / VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII. +PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS. / PINEAPPLE PLANTATION. +COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA. / COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA. +OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA. / VOLCANO HOUSE. +KOHALA RAILROAD. / RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY. +NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU. / WAIKIKI BEACH. +LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS. / KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL. +OAHU COLLEGE. / PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE. +MASONIC TEMPLE. / KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM. +KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian). / CENTRAL UNION CHURCH. + + +[Illustration: SANFORD B. DOLE. President of the Republic of Hawaii.] + + + + +THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS + +THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL. + + +Coffee, +_THE COMING STAPLE PRODUCT._ + + +ISSUED UNDER THE AUSPICES +OF THE +DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS, +1896. + + +HONOLULU: +PRINTED BY THE HAWAIIAN GAZETTE COMPANY. + + + + +The following pamphlet has been compiled for the purpose of giving +information to those intending to invest in the industries of the +Hawaiian Islands. The information can be vouched for as correct. The +portion dealing with agriculture is from the pen of Joseph Marsden, +Esq., Commissioner of Agriculture. The digest of the land law has been +prepared by J. F. Brown, Esq., Commissioner of Public Lands. The +historical portion has been written by Prof. Alexander, Chief of the +Government Survey and author of a "Short History of the Hawaiian People" +and other works. The pamphlet has been planned, edited and in part +written by Alatau T. Atkinson, Esq., ex-Inspector General of Schools, +and now General Superintendent of Census. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +GENERAL INFORMATION. + +The Hawaiian Islands are situated in the North Pacific Ocean and lie +between longitudes 154° 40' and 160° 30' West, and latitudes 22° 16' and +18° 55' North. They are thus on the very edge of the tropics, but their +position in mid-ocean and the prevalence of the northeast trade wind +gives them a climate unequalled by any other portion of the globe--a +perpetual summer without an enervating heat. In the Hawaiian Islands +Americans and Europeans can and do work in the open air, at all seasons +of the year, as they cannot in countries lying in the same latitudes +elsewhere. To note an instance, Calcutta lies a little to the north of +the latitude of Kauai, our most northerly Island, and in Calcutta the +American and European can only work with his brain; hard physical labor +he cannot do and live. On the Hawaiian Islands he can work and thrive. + + +RAINFALL AND TEMPERATURE. + +The rainfall varies, being greater on the windward side of the Islands, +and increasing up to a certain elevation. Thus, at Olaa, on the Island +of Hawaii, windward side and elevation of about 2,000 feet, the rainfall +from July 1st, 1894, to June 30, 1895, was 176.82 inches, while at +Kailua, on the leeward side, at a low level, it was only 51.21 inches +during the same period. + +The temperature also varies according to elevation and position. On the +Island of Hawaii you can get any climate from the heat of summer to actual +winter at the summits of the two great mountains. A meteorological record, +kept carefully for a period of twelve years, gives 89° as the highest and +54° as the lowest temperature recorded, or a mean temperature of 71° 30' +for the year. A case of sunstroke has never been known. People make no +special precautions against the sun, wearing straw and soft felt hats +similar to those worn in the States during the summer months. + + +WINDS. + +The prevailing winds, as mentioned above, are the northeast trades. +These blow for about nine months of the year. The remainder of the +period the winds are variable and chiefly from the south. The Islands +are outside the cyclone belt, and severe storms accompanied by thunder +and lightning are of rare occurrence. + + +HEALTH. + +The Islands possess a healthy climate. There are no virulent fevers such +as are encountered on the coast of Africa or in the West India Islands. +Epidemics seldom visit the Islands, and when they do they are generally +light. A careful system of quarantine guards the Islands now from +epidemics from abroad. Such grave diseases as pneumonia and diphtheria +are almost unknown. Children thrive wonderfully. + + +AREA. + +For practical purposes--and these lines are written for practical +men--there are eight Islands in the Hawaiian group. The others are mere +rocks, of no value to mankind at present. These eight Islands, beginning +from the northwest, are named Niihau, Kauai, Oahu, Molokai, Lanai, +Kahoolawe, Maui and Hawaii. The areas of these Islands are as follows: + + =Square Miles.= + + Niihau 97 + Kauai 590 + Oahu 600 + Molokai 270 + Maui 760 + Lanai 150 + Kahoolawe 63 + Hawaii 4210 + ---- + Total 6740 + +The Islands that interest an intending immigrant are Hawaii, Maui, Oahu +and Kauai. It is on these Islands that coffee, fruits, potatoes, corn +and vegetables can be raised by the small investor, and where land can +be obtained on reasonable terms. + + +HAWAII. + +The Island of Hawaii is the largest in the group, and presents great +varieties of soil and climate. The windward side, which includes the +districts of North Kohala, Hamakua, Hilo and Puna, is copiously watered +by rains and, in the Hilo district, the streams rush impetuously down +every gulch or ravine. The leeward side of the Island, including South +Kohala, North and South Kona, and Kau, is not exposed to such strong +rains, but an ample supply of water falls in the rain belt. The Kona +district has given the coffee product a name in the markets of the world. + +On this Island are now situated numerous sugar plantations. Coffee +employs the industry of several hundred owners, ranging from the man +with 200,000 trees to him who has only an acre or so. There are +thousands upon thousands of acres at present uncultivated and only +awaiting the sturdy arms and enterprising brains of the men of the +temperate zone to develop them. + + +MAUI. + +Maui is also a very fine Island. Besides its sugar plantations, it has +numerous coffee lands, especially in the eastern part, which are just +now being opened up. The western slopes of Haleakala, the main mountain +of Maui, are covered with small farms where are raised potatoes, corn, +beans and pigs. Again, here, thousands of acres are lying fallow. + + +HONOLULU. + +On Oahu is the capital, Honolulu. It is a city numbering thirty thousand +inhabitants and is pleasantly situated on the south side of the Island. +The city extends a considerable distance up Nuuanu Valley and has wings +extending northwest and southeast. It is a city of foliage. Except in +the business blocks, every house stands in its own garden, and some of +the houses are wonderfully beautiful. + +The city is lighted with electric light; there is a very complete +telephone system, and tram cars run at short intervals along the +principal streets and continue out to a sea-bathing resort and public +park, four miles from the city. There are numerous stores where all +kinds of goods can be obtained. In this particular Honolulu occupies +a position ahead of any city of similar size. The public buildings +are handsome and commodious. There are numerous churches, schools, a +public library of over 10,000 volumes, Y. M. C. A. Hall, Masonic Temple, +Odd Fellows' Hall and Theater. There is frequent steam communication +with San Francisco, once a month with Victoria (British Columbia), and +twice a month with New Zealand and the Australian Colonies. Steamers +also connect Honolulu with China and Japan. There are three evening +daily papers published in English, one daily morning paper, and two +weeklies. Besides these there are papers published in the Hawaiian, +Portuguese, Japanese and Chinese languages, and also monthly magazines +in various tongues. + + +OAHU'S OPPORTUNITIES. + +The Island of Oahu presents excellent opportunities for the investor. +Acres upon acres of land remain undeveloped among its teeming valleys, +the energies and wealth of the population having been devoted to the +development of the sugar lands on the larger Islands. + +A line of railroad has been constructed which at present runs along the +coast to a distance of thirty miles from the city. It is proposed to +continue this line completely around the Island. This railroad opens up +rich coffee and farming lands and affords ready means of transport for +the produce, and an expeditious method for obtaining the necessary +supplies, etc., from the capital. The management of the railroad offers +special inducements for would-be investors to see the country, and +special rates should they conclude to settle. + + +KAUAI. + +Kauai is called the "Garden Island," it is so well watered and so +luxuriant in vegetation. The Island is at present largely devoted to the +cultivation of sugar. Rice also cuts a considerable figure in the +agricultural production of Kauai. That it can produce coffee is +undoubted, but there is a timidity about embarking in the industry, +because some forty years ago the experiment of a coffee plantation was +tried, and owing to misjudgment of location and soil, failed. Since then +the cultivation of coffee has come to be more thoroughly understood, and +there is no doubt that quantities of land suitable for such cultivation +are now lying, like the sleeping beauty, waiting for the kiss of +enterprise to make them awake into usefulness and profit for mankind. + +There is room on the Hawaiian Islands for at least ten times the present +population. The climate, soil and social conditions all tend to make +them a desirable home for those who are willing to work, and have a +moderate capital to begin with. + + +GOVERNMENT. + +The Government of the Hawaiian Islands is a Republic. Up to the year +1893 it had been a limited monarchy, but at that date it was felt, by +the progressive party in the state, that monarchy had had its day, and +that the friends of such a form of government should give way to more +liberal institutions, assimilating to the institutions of the United +States, and to become a part of which Great Republic is the earnest +desire of all those who have the interests of the Islands at heart. The +monarchy, in a bloodless revolution, disappeared and the Republic took +its place. + +The Republic is a republic of progress, and under the Government thus +established every facility has been given for developing and improving +the country. The President is elected for six years. The Legislature +consists of a Senate and House of Representatives, all members being +elected by popular vote. The Senators are elected for a term of six +years, and voters for Senators must have real property worth $1,500, or +personal property worth $3,000, or an income of not less than $600 per +annum. The vote for Representatives is based on manhood suffrage. + + +TAXATION. + +All males between the ages of 20 and 60 pay a personal tax of $5, viz: +Poll tax, $1; road tax, $2; school tax, $2. Land pays a tax of one per +cent. on the cash value, and personal property a similar rate. Carts pay +$2, brakes $3, carriages $5, dogs $1, female dogs $3. From the above it +will be seen that the taxes are not heavy as compared with other +countries; moreover, there are no local taxes of any kind. + + +METHOD OF ACQUIRING LAND. + +Land can be obtained from the Government by two methods, viz.; The cash +freehold system, and the right of purchase leases. Under the first +system the land is sold at auction. The purchaser pays one-quarter in +cash and the rest in equal installments of one, two and three years, +interest being charged at the rate of six per cent. upon the unpaid +balance. Under this system the purchaser is bound to maintain a home on +the land from the commencement of the second year to the end of the +third. The right of purchase leases are drawn for twenty-one years at a +rental of eight per cent. on the appraised value of the land. The lessee +has the privilege of purchasing the land, after the third year, _at the +original appraised value_, provided 25 per cent. of the land is reduced +to cultivation, and other conditions of the lease filled. In this case a +home must be maintained from the end of the first year to the end of the +fifth year. The limit of first-class agricultural land obtainable is 100 +acres. This amount is increased on lands of inferior quality. Under the +above conditions the applicant must be 18 years of age and obtain +special letters of denization. Land can also be obtained from the +various land and investment companies, and from private parties. The +full land law will be treated of in Chapter VI. of this pamphlet. + +[Illustration: EXECUTIVE BUILDING.] + +[Illustration: JUDICIARY BUILDING.] + + +JUDICIARY, POLICE, ETC. + +There is a thoroughly efficient judiciary consisting of a Supreme Court, +five Circuit Courts in which trials by jury are conducted, and District +Courts in every district. The higher courts are presided over by well +trained, educated men. There is an efficient police force in every part +of the group. The inhabitants are law-abiding and crimes of violence are +very rare. There is very little petty theft, and even in Honolulu, the +greatest center of population and a seaport town, many of the houses are +left with doors unlocked at night. + + +SCHOOLS. + +There is an excellent system of free public schools taught in the +English language, the teachers in many cases being imported from the +United States. The main plan of the system is modelled upon the public +school system of the United States, modified to meet the wants of a +heterogeneous population. The children are instructed in writing, +reading, composition, arithmetic, geography, both local and general. The +books are uniform and obtainable at the same price as in the United +States. The schools are strictly non-sectarian. There is no district, +however remote, in which there is no school. The only people who cannot +read and write are those who come from abroad. Those born in the Islands +are compelled by law to take advantage of the education offered. Besides +the common school education, opportunities are given at various centers +for a higher education equivalent to the grammar grade of the United +States, and in Honolulu a high school and collegiate course can be +obtained at a small cost. + + +CHURCHES. + +The various Christian denominations are represented and all forms are +tolerated. The country churches of the Protestant denominations are +chiefly conducted by Hawaiian pastors, the Roman Catholic by French and +German priests, who are mostly good linguists and speak Hawaiian, +English and Portuguese, besides their mother tongue. Wherever there is a +large collection of English speaking people a Protestant church is +usually supported by them. In Honolulu there is a large number of +churches, Congregational, Roman Catholic, Episcopalian, Methodist and +Mormon. There is a Sunday law, and all work which is not absolutely +necessary is prohibited on that day. Rational outdoor amusement is not +prohibited, such as riding, boating, shooting, etc., and the Government +Band plays at the public park at Waikiki every Sunday afternoon. + + +PHYSICIANS. + +In every district of the Islands the Government supports a doctor, who +gives his services to indigent Hawaiians free of charge--others have to +pay. In many places there are physicians settled who carry on a private +practice. + + +TELEPHONES. + +The Islands of Oahu, Kauai and Hawaii have telephones to every +accessible point. The rent of the instrument is moderate, and a small +charge is made for those who do not care or cannot afford to possess an +instrument of their own. On Maui the telephone is at present established +only in part. + + +COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ISLANDS. + +Communication between the Islands is by steamer; of these some seventeen +are constantly plying from port to port, affording weekly communication +with the capital. The regular passenger steamers are well fitted with +cabins, have electric bells and electric lights and all modern +accommodations. + + +POSTAL MATTERS. + +There is a regular postal system, and on the arrival of a steamer at +any main point, mail carriers at once start out to distribute the +mail through the district. The Hawaiian Islands belong to the Postal +Union, and money orders can be obtained to the United States, Canada, +Great Britain, Germany, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, the Netherlands, +Portugal, Hong Kong and Colony of Victoria, as well as local orders +between the Islands. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +AGRICULTURAL INDUSTRIES. + +The mainstay of the Hawaiian Islands has, for the last thirty-five +years, been the sugar industry. From this source a large amount of +wealth has been accumulated. But the sugar industry requires large +capital for expensive machinery, and has never proved remunerative to +small investors. An attempt has been made at profit-sharing and has met +with some success, the small farmer cultivating and the capitalist +grinding at a central mill. Of late years, moreover, the small farmer +has been steadily developing in the Hawaiian Islands and attention has +been given to other products than sugar. + +Rice, neither the European nor the American can cultivate as laborers. +It requires working in marshy land, and though on the Islands it yields +two crops a year, none but the Chinaman can raise it successfully. A +dry-land or mountain rice has been introduced, which will be treated +under the head of Agricultural possibilities. + +The main staple after sugar and rice is coffee. Of this hundreds of +thousands of trees have been planted out within the last five years. +This is essentially the crop of the future and bids fair to become as +important a staple as sugar. Coffee does not require the amount of +capital that sugar does, and it can be worked remuneratively upon a +small area. It is estimated that at the end of the fourth year the +return from a 75-acre coffee plantation will much more than pay the +running expenses, while from that time on a return of from eight to ten +thousand dollars per annum may be realized. + +On page 32 will be found an estimate of the cost of establishing a +75-acre coffee plantation from the first to the seventh year. + +Fruits can also be cultivated to advantage. At present the banana trade +of the Islands amounts to over 100,000 bunches per annum, valued at over +$100,000, and the quantity might be very easily quadrupled. The banana +industry may be regarded as in its infancy. The export of the fruit is +only from the Island of Oahu, but there are thousands of acres on the +other Islands of the group which could be profitably used for this +cultivation and for nothing else. The whole question of the banana +industry hinges on the market. At present the market is limited. + +Limes and oranges can be cultivated and the fruit can be easily packed +for export; at present the production does not meet the local market. +The fruits can be raised to perfection. The Hawaiian orange has a fine +flavor and the Hawaiian lime has an aroma and flavor far superior to +that cultivated in Mexico and Central America. In the uplands of Hawaii +and Maui potatoes can be and are raised. Their quality is good. Corn is +also raised. In these industries many Portuguese, Norwegians and others +have embarked. Both these products find an ample local market. The corn +is used largely for feed on the plantations. The corn is ground with the +cob and makes an excellent feed for working cattle, horses and mules. + +In the uplands, where the climate is temperate, as at Waimea, Hawaii, +vegetables of all kinds can be raised; excellent cauliflowers, cabbages +and every product of the temperate zone can be grown to perfection. + +Cattle raising in so small a place as the Hawaiian Islands does not +present great opportunities except for local consumption. Pigs are +profitable to the small farmer. In the Kula district of Maui pigs are +fattened upon the corn and potatoes raised in the district. The price of +pork, dressed, is 25 cents per pound in Honolulu and about 15 cents per +pound in the outside districts. The Chinese, of whom there are some +15,000 resident on the various Islands, are extremely fond of pork, so +that there is a large local market, which has to be supplemented by +importations from California. + +Attention has lately been given to fiber plants, for which there are +many suitable locations. Ramie grows luxuriantly, but the lack of proper +decorticating and cleaning machinery has prevented any advance in this +cultivation. + +Sisal hemp and Sansevieria have been experimented with, but without any +distinct influence upon the trade output. + +The cultivation of pineapples is a very growing industry. In 1895 pines +were exported from the Islands to San Francisco to the value of nearly +$9,000. This has grown up in the last half dozen years. There is every +reason to think that canning pineapples for the Coast and other markets +can be made profitable. + +The guava, which grows wild, can also be put up to profit, for the +manufacture of guava jelly. It has never been entered upon on a large +scale, but to the thrifty farmer it would add a convenient slice to his +income, just as the juice of the maple adds an increase to the farmer of +the Eastern States. Well made guava jelly will find a market anywhere. +In England it is regarded as a great delicacy, being imported from the +West India Islands. Besides the guava there are other fruits which can +be put up to commercial profit, notably the poha or Cape gooseberry +(Physalis Edulis). This has been successfully made into jams and jelly, +which command an extensive local sale and should find their way into +larger markets. + +In point of fact, outside the great industries of sugar, coffee and +rice, there is a good field for many minor industries which can be +carried on with profit by those who know what work is, and are willing +to put their shoulders to the wheel. + +In the Hawaiian Islands a simple life can be lived, and entering +gradually upon the coffee industry, a good competence can be obtained +long before such could be realized by the agriculturalist elsewhere. +However, it is useless to come to the Islands without the necessary +capital to develop the land that can be obtained. + +Between arriving and the time that the crops begin to give returns there +is a period where the living must be close, and cash must be paid out +for the necessary improvements. The land is here, the climate is here; +it only requires brains, a small capital and energy to realize such +comfort and independence as can not be realized in old countries, in +one-fourth of the time. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +COFFEE. + +The most promising of all the Island products, outside of sugar, is +coffee. No finer coffee in the world is produced than that of the +Hawaiian Islands. It requires care and does not produce a crop until the +third year, but it remains till the fifth year to make a proper +realization upon the investment. It is evidently necessary to give a +very full description of the coffee plant and its method of culture to +assure intending immigrants of what is before them. + +Coffee is a shrub belonging to the family of the Rubiaceae. Botanists +divide it into many species, but it can be practically divided into two +sections, Arabian coffee and Liberian coffee, or in point of fact, +Asiatic and African. In the Hawaiian Islands coffee grows best between +500 and 2,000 feet above the sea level, though there are cases in which +it has done well close to the sea. It requires a loose porous soil and +does not thrive well in heavy clayey ground which holds much water. Of +such heavy land there is very little in the Hawaiian Islands. The soil +is generally very porous. + +It is very evident that coffee will thrive and give good results in +varying conditions of soil and degrees of heat. In these Islands it grows +and produces from very nearly at the sea level to the elevation of 2,600 +feet. The highest elevation of bearing coffee, known here, is twenty-five +miles from the town of Hilo and in the celebrated Olaa district. + +[Illustration: EWA MILL.] + +[Illustration: VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII.] + +With such a range it is evident that, in a tropical climate, the +cultivation of coffee presents greater opportunities for an investor +than other tropical products. + +For years it was thought that coffee would only grow to advantage in the +Kona district of Hawaii. Practical experiment has shown that it can be +grown with success in almost any part of the Islands. + +The opening up of the Olaa portion of the Puna district, by a well +macadamized road leading from Hilo to the Volcano, may be regarded as +the commencement of the coffee industry on a large scale on the Hawaiian +Islands. There are now over fifty plantations where six years ago there +was nothing but tangled and dense forest. The Olaa land is Government +property and can be acquired under the land law. There are still 10,000 +acres not taken up. The location is very desirable as there is direct +communication with Hilo by an excellent road and the crop can be readily +taken to the shipping point. Indeed it can not be long before a railroad +will be built; when this takes place a far larger extent of land will be +available for coffee growing in this section of the country. The soil in +the Olaa district is deep and wonderfully prolific. + +Other portions of Puna also present many fertile lands, and coffee +plantations in those parts are coming to the front showing excellent +results. A considerable number of investors have opened up coffee +plantations in them, all of which are doing excellently. These +plantations, to the knowledge of the writer are, many of them, carried +on out of the savings made by workers in Honolulu, who are thus +preparing for themselves a provision for their early middle age. On the +Island of Hawaii are the great coffee districts of Olaa, Puna, Kona and +Hamakua, in each of which thriving coffee plantations are established, +while tens of thousands of acres of the very finest lands are yet +undisturbed. Government lands in these districts are being opened up for +settlement as fast as circumstances will permit. + +On the Island of Maui there is a large area of splendid coffee lands. +The extensive land of Keanae belonging to the Government will be opened +for settlement as soon as the preliminary work of surveying is completed. + +On the Island of Molokai the industry is making progress and there are +several plantations along the leeward valleys. + +So also on the Island of Oahu there is much good coffee land, which is +being experimented upon, and considerable capital invested in the +undertaking. + +As the case now stands for the investor, land can be obtained for coffee +growing in:-- + + ISLAND OF HAWAII. + North and South Kona, + Hilo, + Puna, including Olaa, + Hamakua. + + ISLAND OF MAUI. + Keanae, + Nahiku, + Lahaina, + Kaupo. + + ISLAND OF MOLOKAI. + + ISLAND OF OAHU. + + ISLAND OF KAUAI. + +In addition to the large tracts of Government lands on Hawaii and Maui, +there are many fine tracts of first-class coffee lands owned or +controlled by private parties. It is the policy of the Government to +encourage the settlement of its lands by small farmers. Hence the amount +of land, granted to one party or that one party can take up, while amply +sufficient to enable one person or family, with honest endeavor, to +acquire an independence, is not large enough to offer inducements for +the employment of large amounts of capital. + +That areas of land, for the establishment of large coffee plantations, +can be acquired is reasonably certain as large owners are evincing a +disposition to sell and lease their lands. + +There is no agricultural investment that offers better opportunities for +the profitable employment of capital, than a well managed coffee estate. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +CULTIVATION OF THE COFFEE TREE IN THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. + +In order to obtain the best results the coffee tree requires to be +properly planted, and during its life time needs frequent and +intelligent cultivation. + +The various operations incidental to the opening and carrying on of a +coffee plantation will be taken up in their proper order and described +in as plain language as possible, and as briefly as is consistent with a +clear explanation of the subject. + +The very first thing the planter should do after obtaining possession of +his land is to plant a nursery, so that he may have, as soon as +possible, an abundant supply of strong healthy plants. Many planters +have planted their fields with wild stumps, these are young coffee +plants that are found under wild growths of coffee trees. The young +trees are cut off about six inches above the ground, they are then taken +up and the lateral roots trimmed close to the tap root. The thready end +of the tap root is cut off and the stump is ready to plant. In some +cases the young plants are taken up, from under the wild trees, and +planted just as they are. This method can be dismissed at once as the +worst possible method of planting the coffee tree. The very best plants +are strong healthy nursery plants, that is, plants that have been grown +from the best seed in a properly prepared nursery. The next best plants +to use are nursery stumps. These are nursery trees that have grown too +large to safely transplant. By cutting them down and trimming the roots +they can be safely transplanted to the field, where they will grow into +good healthy trees. Stumps soon after planting send up several shoots, +these, with the exception of the strongest one, are taken off. This +latter shoot is to grow and make the coffee trees. + + +MAKING THE NURSERY. + +The size of the nursery will depend on how large the plantation is to +be. For a 75-acre plantation, one acre of ground will more than supply +all the plants required. It is always desirable to have a greater number +of plants than is needed to just plant the acreage the plantation is to +be, for after the fields are planted some of the plants may get injured +from dry weather and require replacing with plants from the nursery. Any +surplus left, after the trees in the fields are well established, can be +sold to some later planter, who will find it to his advantage to +purchase good nursery plants for his first planting and thereby save one +year of time. It is advisable for all planters to buy plants for their +first planting, but for the second year's planting they should have a +nursery of their own from which they can select the strongest and most +forward plants. + +The land for the nursery should be selected as close as possible to +where the plantation is to be. It should be on a slight slope to insure +drainage, and free from rocks and stones. The soil should be ploughed or +dug over to the depth of one foot and made as fine as possible. Beds +should be thrown up six inches high and three feet wide. The surface of +the beds should be made quite smooth and level; the seeds should be +planted six inches apart and three quarters of an inch deep. A good way +to ensure even and regular planting is to make a frame three feet wide +each way. Pegs, three quarters of an inch long and five eighths of an +inch diameter, should be fastened to one side of the frame, placing +them exactly six inches apart. The frame, thus prepared, is placed, pegs +down, on the bed. A slight pressure will sink the pegs into the soil. +The frame is now lifted and you have the holes for the seeds all of one +depth and equi-distant from each other. The seeds can now be dropped one +in each hole. The seeds should be placed flat side down, and covered by +brushing over the surface of the bed. If the weather is at all dry it is +a good plan to mulch the surface of the bed with dry grass or fern +leaves. The soil should be kept moist, and if there is not sufficient +rain the beds must be watered. In six or seven weeks the seeds should +sprout and show above ground. The mulching should now be moved from over +the plants and arranged in the rows. It has been the practice of some +planters to plant the seed much closer than six inches apart, but it +will be found that plants at six inches apart can be more easily and +safely transplanted than from close planted beds. It will be advisable +in taking up plants from the beds, to take only every other one, this +will give the remaining plants more room to develop and grow more stocky +than would be the case if all the plants were taken up from each bed as +they were required. + + +CLEARING THE LAND. + +The next thing for the planter to do is to get his land cleared. This +can be done more satisfactorily and cheaply by contract than can be done +by days' work. Gangs of Chinese and Japanese undertake the clearing of +land and will make a contract to clear the land as per specification. In +the Olaa District land costs from $20 to $50 per acre to clear, +according to the kind of clearing done. The land is forest land and some +planters have the trees cut down and everything burned making the land +quite clear, while others just have the vines and ferns cut and the +trees felled, leaving everything on the land to rot. This method while +costing much less than burning up everything, makes it more expensive to +lay out and plant the land. The planter must decide for himself which of +the two methods he will pursue. However, it can be said in the case of +those who only cut and fell, in a few years everything, trees, vines and +ferns rot down and greatly increase the fertility of the soil. The next +thing is to lay out the land for the digging of the holes where it is +intended to set out the young trees. There is a wide diversity of +opinion as to the proper distance apart to plant coffee trees. From +10x12 feet down to 5x6 and all intermediate distances are practiced. It +is a significant fact that planters who formerly planted their trees at +the wider distances are now setting out trees as close as 6x5. Trees +planted 6x6 will probably yield better results per acre than trees +planted at a wider or closer distance. Having fixed upon the distance +apart the trees are to be planted, the planter proceeds to mark with +pegs the places where he wants the holes dug. This is usually done with +a line or rope that has pieces of red rag fastened in the strands, at +the distance apart at which it is intended to dig the holes. The line is +drawn tightly across one end of the clearing and a peg driven into the +soil at every place that is marked on the line. The men, holding the two +ends of the line, are each provided with a stick the exact length that +the rows are to be apart. After one row is pegged, the line is advanced +one length of the stick and the operation repeated until the whole +clearing is pegged. After the first line is pegged a line should be laid +at exactly right angles to the first line so that the rows will be +straight both ways. The pegging being completed, the holes should be dug +not less than 18 inches wide and 18 inches deep. The top soil should be +carefully placed on one side of the hole and the subsoil on the other, +the holes should remain open as long as possible and should only be +filled in a week or so before planting the trees. The bottoms of the +holes should be explored with a light crowbar and, if any rocks or +stones are found, they should be removed. In filling the holes the top +soil (that has been placed on one side) should be placed in the bottom +of the hole and other top soil should be taken from between the rows +until the hole is full, the subsoil can now be disposed of by scattering +it between the rows. The holes after filling should have the marking +pegs replaced in the center of the filling, this will serve as a guide +for planting the trees. + + +PLANTING. + +There is no operation in all the work of establishing a coffee +plantation that requires such careful supervision as that of planting +out the young trees. If the work is carelessly done and the slender tap +root is doubled up or, if it is shortened too much, the tree will never +thrive. It may grow fairly well for a time, perhaps until the time for +the first crop, then the foliage will turn yellow and the tree show +every sign of decay. The effort to produce a crop is too much for the +tree and the sooner it is pulled up and replaced by a properly planted +tree the better. + +The closest supervision is necessary in order that the planter may be +certain that the tap roots are placed perfectly straight in the ground; +and the lateral roots placed in a natural position. In order to effect +this, with the least amount of trouble, transplanters have been used. A +transplanter that has been used with success is made as follows: two +pieces of sheet iron (galvanized) are bent into two half circles, which, +when placed together, form a cylinder 3 inches in diameter and seven +inches long. A piece of hoop iron is bent to a ring, that will fit over +the cylinder, and riveted. The mode of using is as follows: The two +halves of the cylinder are pressed into the ground, one on each side of +the young coffee tree. They are pressed down until the upper ends are +level with the surface of the soil. The hoop iron ring is then +pressed over the ends of the two halves of the cylinder, binding them +firmly together. The cylinder can now be lifted from the ground bringing +with it the young tree with all its roots in the position in which they +grew. In this condition the young trees are carried to the field and, +the holes being opened, the cylinder, holding the tree, is placed in the +ground and the soil packed firmly around it. The hoop iron ring is then +removed and the two halves of the cylinder withdrawn. The soil is again +compacted around the roots and the tree is planted. There is another +transplanter, invented in America, that would probably be better and +more economical in working than the one described above. This +transplanter consists of a cylinder of thin sheet steel. These are made +in America of various sizes to suit different kinds of trees. For a +coffee tree a good size would be 7 inches long and 5 inches in diameter. +The cylinder has an opening, five-eighths of an inch wide, running the +whole length of the cylinder and exactly opposite this opening a handle +is riveted. This handle is of half inch round iron, 18 inches long with +a cross bar on top. The rod is bent outward in the form of a bow, so +that in working, the branches of the young tree may not be injured. The +mode of working the transplanter is as follows: the cylinder is placed +on the ground with the tree in the center of the cylinder. This can be +done by allowing the stem of the young tree to pass through the slot in +the cylinder. Then, by means of the cross handle, the cylinder is turned +and pressed into the soil until the upper end is level with the surface +of the ground. Then, by lifting on the stem of the tree and the handle +of the transplanter at the same time, the tree is taken from the ground +with its roots undisturbed. Should the end of the tap root project below +the end of the cylinder, the thready end should be pinched off with the +thumb nail. By placing the lower end of the cylinder on the bottom of a +box and inserting a wedge-shaped piece of wood in the slot, the cylinder +is sprung open and can be withdrawn, leaving the young tree, with a +cylinder of earth around its roots, standing on the bottom of the box. +This operation can be repeated until the box is full of the young trees, +when it is carried to the field and the trees placed one at each hole. +By using a duplicate transplanter a cylinder of earth is removed from +the spot where the tree is to be placed, and the tree with its cylinder +of earth is placed in the round hole, which it exactly fits, the earth +being slightly compacted around the roots. The tree is thus planted with +the absolute certainty that the roots are in their natural position. + +[Illustration: PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS.] + +[Illustration: PINEAPPLE PLANTATION.] + + +WEEDING. + +The old adage, "a stitch in time saves nine," will bear its fullest +application in the care and weeding of a coffee estate. From the time +the land is first cleared, weeding should commence, and it is +astonishing how little it will cost if care is taken that no weed be +allowed to run to seed. The bulk of Hawaiian coffee lands is situated in +the forests where the land is covered with a dense undergrowth of ferns +and vines and there are no pernicious weeds to bother. But soon after +clearing, the seeds of weeds are dropped by the birds and are carried in +on the feet and clothing of the laborers and visitors. We have no weeds +that run to seed in less than thirty days, and if the fields are gone +over, once a month, and any weed that can be found pulled up and buried, +the work of weeding will be reduced to a minimum. But if the weeds, that +are bound to spring up, are allowed to run to seed, the work of weeding +will be greatly increased and will require the labor of a large gang to +keep the fields in order. If taken in time, the labor of one man will +keep from 15 to 25 acres quite clean. During the first year after +setting out the fields, all that is required is to keep the fields clear +of weeds and the replacing, with a healthy tree from the nursery, any +tree that from any cause looks sickly and does not come along well. + +It will be found that in parts of the field some trees, while looking +healthy, do not grow as fast as the average of the trees, this is often +due to the soil not being of as good a quality. Knolls and side hills +are not generally so rich as the hollows and valleys, and the coffee +trees, planted in the poorest parts of the field, should be fertilized +until they are as vigorous as the trees in the best parts. + + +HANDLING. + +During the second year the young trees will have begun to make a good +growth and will require handling. In order to make clear the description +of the operations of handling and pruning, it may be well to describe +here the component parts of the coffee tree. + +The underground portion consists of a tap root and numerous lateral or +side roots. The parts above ground consist of: + +1st. The stem or trunk. + +2d. The primaries or first branches; these grow from the trunk in pairs +at intervals of from two to four inches, the two primaries, making a +pair, grow one opposite to the other, the pair above radiating out at a +different angle and so on to the top of the tree. + +3rd. The secondaries; these are the branches that grow in pairs from the +primaries. + +4th. The tertiaries; these are the third branches that grow in pairs +from the secondaries in the same manner as the secondaries grow on the +primaries. + +5th. The leaves that grow on all the branches. + +During the whole of the second year, the field should be gone over at +least every two months and all the secondaries that make their +appearance should be rubbed off; this can be done by a touch of the +fingers, if the secondaries are not more than two or three inches long. +If allowed to grow longer, the knife must be used, or there is danger +of tearing out the eye or bud, which we depend upon for growing new +secondaries at the proper time. During the second year, the secondaries +will make their appearance only on the lower sets of primaries, the +upper sets as they grow being too young to grow secondaries. At the +beginning of the third year all the secondaries should be allowed to +grow till they attain a length of six inches; then the trees should be +carefully gone over and all but five of the secondaries on each primary +cut off with a sharp pruning knife. No pairs should be left, and only +the strongest and most vigorous should be retained. They should be +disposed on alternate sides of the primary and none left in a space of +six inches from the stem of the tree. The object of this is to allow the +light to penetrate to the center of the tree, for the coffee tree bears +fruit in greater profusion on branches that are exposed to the light +than on those that are shaded. + +During this third year the tree will blossom and bear the first or +maiden crop. In some cases the tree will blossom in the second year, but +it is a wise plan to rub all the blossoms off, as it only weakens the +tree to bear a crop at such an early age. It is of the utmost importance +that in the first crop, as well as in all future crops, the tree should +not be overburdened with a superabundance of growing wood. If left to +itself, the lower primaries will grow a mass of secondaries, so much so +that no blossom will set on them, and the first crop will come only on +the upper primaries, and be only a third or fourth of the crop that +would be produced if the trees were properly handled. By handling, as +described above, the tree is relieved of all superfluous wood and only +such secondaries are left as are needed to bear the fourth year's crop, +and the maiden crop will grow on the primaries. It may be well to +mention here, that coffee only grows on wood of the second year's +growth, and does not grow on the same wood twice. + +During the third year, the secondaries will come on the upper primaries. +When they are well set, they should be reduced in number and in no case +should more than five be left to grow. In some cases four or even three +will be sufficient. Whatever the number that may be left, it must be +understood that these are the branches that will bear the crop for the +fourth year. During the third year new secondaries will grow from the +places where the former secondaries grew. Sometimes two will grow from +one bud, they should all be removed, the trees being gone over two +months, but at the last handling before blossoming time, which varies +greatly with the elevation above sea level, enough of these new +secondaries should be left to make wood for the fifth year's crop. From +this time on the coffee planter should be able to point out the wood on +which the present and the next year's crop will be borne, and it is this +wood and that only, that should be allowed to grow. All other shoots, +suckers, etc., should be rubbed off each time the tree is handled, +provision being made each year for the wood for the crop two years hence. + +During the third year, the trees will require topping. As to the height +at which a coffee tree should be topped, there is a great diversity of +opinion. Some planters advocate topping as low as four and a half feet, +others at six or seven feet; as a matter of fact the coffee tree will +bear fruit if topped as low as one and one half feet or if not topped at +all. The only valid reason for topping as low as four and a half feet is +for the convenience of picking the crop. Five and a half or six feet is +a good height to top a coffee tree on the rich lands of the Hawaiian +Islands. In fact the planters should not be guided by the number of +feet, but by the number of primaries he desires the tree to carry. +Eighteen to twenty pairs are a reasonable number for a coffee tree to +carry in this country, and it will be found that by not counting those +primaries that grow on the stem within fifteen inches from the ground, +eighteen or twenty pairs of primaries will come on the stem within six +feet from the ground. Before topping the tree, it should be allowed to +grow somewhat higher that it is intended to top, so that the wood may be +hardened and not decay as it sometimes does if topped when the wood is +too young. Topping is performed by cutting off the top of the tree at a +point an inch above a pair of primaries. Both primaries should also be +cut off an inch from the stem. This will leave the top in the form of a +cross; a knot will form at this point from which the tree will +constantly send up shoots striving to make a new top. These should be +torn off every time the tree is handled. + +We have now arrived at the time when the tree is bearing the first or +maiden crop. Through careful handling the tree has been divested of all +superfluous shoots, branches, etc., and the crop is maturing on the +primaries. If the trees are situated on good rich soil, and the trees +are well grown, there should be at least thirteen pairs of primaries +bearing crop. At an average of fifty berries to each primary there will +be a yield of over one and a quarter pounds of clean coffee to the tree. +This yield for the first crop has been much exceeded in this country, +but it can only be assured by careful cultivation and handling as +described in this paper. + +We will now take a look at the condition of our three years old trees. +They have all been topped and are carrying from thirty-six to forty +primaries, of which all except the upper six or eight are carrying four +or five secondaries that are well advanced and which will bear the crop +for the fourth year. There will also be four or five secondaries, that +are one or two months old, which are intended to bear the fifth year's +crop. All other growth should be removed as before up to the time of +blossoming for the fourth year's crop. This may be estimated as follows: +There should be at least twenty-four primaries that have on each of them +say, four bearing secondaries. At thirty berries to each secondary, the +yield would be close to three pounds of clean coffee to each tree. This +again has been exceeded in this country for four year old trees, but it +must be borne in mind, that in order to obtain these results, proper +cultivation, handling and pruning must be done. Without proper care such +results would be impossible, the coffee cannot grow an abundance of wood +and coffee at the same time. As soon as the crop of the fourth year is +gathered the work of pruning must commence without delay. This consists +of cutting off with a sharp knife the secondaries that have borne the +crop. They must not be cut so close as to injure the eye or bud. About +three-sixteenths of an inch from the stem of the primary will be quite +safe, and the secondaries for the fifth year's crop will soon make their +appearance. Care should be taken to leave the stem of the tree clear of +shoots and foliage for a space of six inches from the stem; the tree +will want all the light it can get. The coffee tree can be said to be in +full bearing when all the primaries are carrying bearing secondaries. +During the life of the coffee tree, the planter must keep a close watch +on his trees and restrict their wood-bearing propensities to the wood +that is to bear his crops; nothing else should be allowed to grow. If +the work is commenced rightly and carried on systematically, the work +will not be difficult and no crops will be lost. But on the other hand, +if the work is neglected, the trees will become matted and all the lower +primaries die off. These, if once lost, will not grow again. The tree +under these conditions will only bear a tithe of the crop it would bear +with proper attention, and furthermore it is a most difficult matter to +bring a neglected tree into proper shape and it can only be done at a +loss of one and perhaps two years' time. There are many minor details +connected with the care of the coffee tree which would occupy too much +space to describe here, and which the coffee planter can easily learn as +he carries on the work of coffee planting. Without doubt coffee planting +in this country is destined to become a great industry. We have large +tracts of the finest coffee lands in the world, only waiting to be +cultivated to make prosperous and happy homes. One parting word to the +intending coffee planter, take Davie Crockett's motto, "Be sure you're +right and then go ahead." + + +ESTIMATE OF COST OF ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A COFFEE PLANTATION OF +75 ACRES, FROM THE FIRST TO THE SEVENTH YEAR. + +FIRST YEAR. + + Purchase of 100 acres of Government land + at $10.00 per acre $1,000 00 + + Manager's house and water tank 600 00 + + Laborers' quarters and water tank 350 00 + + Clearing 50 acres of land, at $20 per acre 1,000 00 + + Fencing 300 00 + + Purchase of 65,000, 1-year old coffee + plants at $5.00 per M 325 00 + + Lining, holing and planting 50 acres 600 00 + + Manager's salary, 1 year 1,200 00 + + Labor of 6 Japanese, 1 year at $15 per + month 1,080 00 + + Purchase of tools and starting nursery 500 00 + --------- + $6,955 00 $6,955 00 + +SECOND YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 6 Japanese 1,080 00 + + Extra labor lining, holing and planting + 25 acres 300 00 + + Sundries 500 00 + --------- + $3,080 00 $10,035 00 + +THIRD YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Pulping shed and drying house 500 00 + + Pulper, with engine and boiler 500 00 + + Extra help for picking, pulping and drying + 20,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres + (at 4 cents per lb.) 800 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 20,000 lbs. + of coffee at 1 cent 200 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 250 00 + --------- + $5,070 00 5,070 00 + + $15,105 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 20,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 3,600 00 + --------- + $11,505 00 + +FOURTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Extra labor picking, pulping and drying + 50,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres + (at 4 cents per lb.) 2,000 00 + + 10,000 lbs. from 25 acres (3-year-old trees) 400 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 60,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 600 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 400 00 + --------- + $6,220 00 6,220 00 + --------- + $17,725 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 60,000 lbs. of coffee at 18c 10,800 00 + --------- + $ 6,925 00 + +FIFTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 60,000 lbs. + coffee from 50 acres and 25,000 lbs. + from 25 acres, at 4 cents 3,400 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 85,000 lbs. + at 1 cent per lb. 850 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 500 00 + --------- + $7,570 00 7,570 00 + --------- + $14,495 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 85,000 lbs. coffee at 18 cents 15,300 00 + --------- + Balance on hand $ 905 00 + +SIXTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 75,000 lbs. of + coffee from 50 acres, and 25,000 lbs. from + 25 acres, 100,000 lbs. at 4 cents 4,000 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 100,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 1,000 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 1,000 00 + --------- + $8,820 00 $ 8,820 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 100,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 18,000 00 + --------- + Balance on hand $10,085 00 + +SEVENTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 12 Japanese 2,160 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 125,000 lbs. + of coffee at 4 cents 5,500 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 125,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 1,250 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 1,200 00 + --------- + $11,310 00 $11,310 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 125,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 22,500 00 + --------- + Balance to credit of Plantation at + end of seventh year $21,275 00 + +The yields as given in the above estimate are far below what may be +attained by thorough cultivation and fertilizing. The coffee tree +responds readily to good treatment, but will disappoint its owner if +neglected. + +[Illustration: COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA.] + +[Illustration: COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA.] + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +AGRICULTURAL POSSIBILITIES. + +While the coffee trees are growing and during the time that will elapse +before the planter receives returns from his investment, it would be a +wise thing for him to plant such things, as will not only provide the +greater part of the food for himself and family, but may also yield a +moderate return in money. The soil and climate of the Hawaiian Islands +will grow almost anything that grows in any other country. All Northern +fruits can be grown if one will only go high enough on the mountain +slopes of Maui and Hawaii. But the coffee planter must confine himself +to such things as will thrive in the vicinity in which his coffee trees +are planted, and it is for the information of intending planters that +this chapter is written. + +In the first place, almost all kinds of vegetables will grow in such +profusion as will astonish those who have lived only in Northern climes. +Green and sweet corn, potatoes, Irish and sweet, cabbages, tomatoes, +beans, lettuce, radishes and many other kinds of vegetables, all of the +finest quality and in the greatest profusion, can be had every day in +the year. Strawberries and raspberries can also be had all the year +round. In addition to oranges and limes, which grow to perfection in +this country, many fruits peculiar to tropical and semi-tropical +climates grow well and flourish in these Islands. Among the more +important is the Avocado Pear (Persea Gratissima), commonly called the +Alligator Pear. This tree grows well and bears fruit, of splendid +quality, in from 3 to 5 years from seed. The fruit is much esteemed by +all classes. A small quantity of the fruit is shipped to California; +what reaches there in good condition is quickly bought at high prices. +It can only be carried safely in cold storage, and this is very +expensive freight. A native peach does well, and will bear fruit in two +years from seed. The fruit is much smaller than the American peach, +which by the way does not do well on elevations below 4000 feet, but +very sweet and juicy and makes excellent preserves and pies. Without +doubt this peach could in a few years be improved so as to rival peaches +of any other country. The Mango (Mangifera Indica) is a tropical fruit +tree that grows in the greatest profusion and bears enormous crops of +delicious fruit. It comes into bearing in 5 or 6 years from seed and +does well from sea level to an elevation of 2000 feet. The fruit is much +liked by every one; the green fruit is made into a sauce resembling, but +much superior to, apple butter. + +The Guava (Psidium Guayava) grows wild in all parts of the Islands +below 3000 feet. The fruit, of which there is a great abundance, is +made into jam and the very finest jelly in the world. In the fruiting +season large quantities of the jelly can be made, and without doubt, +exported at a profit. + +The Poha (Physalis edulis) is a quick growing shrub bearing a berry that +makes excellent jelly and jam. The shrub grows wild on elevations +between 1000 and 4000 feet. A patch of pohas planted in a corner of a +garden, will grow and yield a bountiful supply of fruit almost without +cultivation. + +Pineapples are at home on these Islands; a small plot planted with the +best varieties of this king of fruits will keep the table supplied the +year round. + +Another valuable fruit indigenous to this country is the Papaia (Carica +papaya). This fine fruit can be raised in enormous quantities and is a +most fattening food for pigs and chickens. The tree fruits in eight or +nine months from the seed, and thence forward for years it yields ripe +fruit every month in the year. The fruit is of the size of a small +melon and is very rich in sugar. The unripe fruit contains a milky juice +that, even when diluted with water, renders any tough meat, that is +washed in it, quite tender. A small piece of the unripe fruit placed in +the water in which meat or tough chicken is boiled makes it tender and +easily digestible. + +A very valuable food plant, indigenous to these Islands, is the taro +(Colocasia esculenta). The variety known as dry land taro will grow on +land that is moist enough for the coffee trees. The taro is a grand food +plant, the tubers containing more nutriment for a given weight than any +other vegetable food. The young tops when cooked are hard to distinguish +from spinach. The tubers must be cooked before they can be used for +food, in order to dissipate a very acrid principle that exists in both +leaves and root. + +Another important food plant that has been introduced and yields +abundantly is the Cassava (Manihot utilissima). This plant furnishes the +staple food for the population of Brazil. It is easily propagated by the +planting pieces of the woody portions of the stems and branches. The +tubers are available in nine or ten months after planting. There are two +kinds, the sweet and the bitter; the latter being the more prolific. The +sweet kind can be fed to pigs without cooking. The bitter kind contains +a poisonous substance which is entirely destroyed by cooking. There is +no danger of animals eating the bitter kind in a raw state, for no stock +will touch it, while the sweet kind is eagerly eaten in the raw state by +pigs, horses, cows, etc. The tubers are prepared for human food by +grating them. The juice is then expelled by pressure, and the residue +pounded into a coarse meal, which is made into thin cakes. It is an +excellent food, and said to be much more digestible than bread and other +foods made from wheat. Pigs can be very cheaply raised on the sweet +variety of this plant. A field of the plant being ready to gather, a +portion is fenced off, and the pigs turned into it. They will continue +to feed until every vestige of the tubers is eaten, leaving the ground +in a fine condition for replanting. The tubers never spoil in the +ground, in fact the soil is the very best storehouse for them. However +if left for two or three years the tubers grow very large and tough. + +Bananas, in great variety, are grown in all parts of the Islands where +there is sufficient moisture. Any land that will grow coffee will grow +bananas. The yield of fruit from this remarkable plant is something +astonishing. It commences to bear fruit in a little over one year from +the time of planting. The stem decays after the formation of a bunch +of fruit; this will weigh from 50 to 100 pounds and upwards. Numerous +suckers spring up from around the decaying stem and bear fruit in +their turn. One-half an acre planted with bananas would not only +furnish a large family with an abundance of delicious and nutritious +fruit, but would also yield a large supply of feed for pigs, chickens +and other stock. + +The tea plant (Camellia Thea) grows well in this country and yields +a tea of good quality. It is hardly likely that it will become an +article of export from this country, as we cannot compete with the +very low prices paid for labor in the great tea countries, India, +Ceylon, and China. But it can be grown for home consumption, and +there is no reason why every coffee planter should not have a patch +of tea growing on his land. An eighth of an acre, planted out in tea +plants, would yield more tea than could be consumed by a large family; +the work of cultivation and preparation is light and easy and could be +done by women and children. + +The coffee lands are situated in forested tracts in which there is +little or no pasturage for animals. Every coffee planter should keep one +or more cows to obtain the milk and butter which will furnish a large +addition to the food supply for himself and family. In order to do this, +it will be necessary to plant such things as will furnish food for +the animals. We have several fodder plants that will yield a large +quantity of feed and which will only grow in tropical and semi-tropical +countries. + +[Illustration: OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA.] + +[Illustration: VOLCANO HOUSE.] + +First among these is the Teosinte Reana (Euchlacna luxurians). This +plant is a native of Guatamala, and grows splendidly in this country; +each plant requires sixteen feet of ground for its full development. It +is an annual if allowed to run to seed; but its growth can be continued +by cutting when four or five feet high, and green feed obtained all the +year round. + +Guinea grass (Panicum Maximum), one of the grandest of fodder plants, +has been introduced and finds a congenial home in this country. It is +purely a tropical grass, it grows to a height of eight feet forming +large bunches which, when cut young, furnish an abundance of sweet and +tender feed. In districts when there is sufficient moisture, it can be +cut every two months. Caffir corn, Egyptian millet and Sorghum grow +well, and should be planted in order to have a change of feed. + +Pumpkins and squash grow to an enormous size and yield an immense +quantity of feed, much relished by cows and pigs. + +A dry land rice is being tried in the coffee districts of Olaa and Kona, +on the Island of Hawaii, and there is every reason to believe that it +will be successful. Nearly all the laborers on the coffee plantations +use rice as their staple food and it has to be brought from the Island +of Oahu to the Islands of Hawaii and Maui. There is no doubt but that +the rice used by the labor on the coffee plantations, can be raised on +the spot, reducing the cost of living to the laborers, and making them +more contented. + +It will be seen from the foregoing that many things can be grown that +will enable the coffee planter to not only reduce the outlay for living +expenses for himself and family but will also allow them to enjoy many +of the comforts and luxuries of life. + +While our main industries, sugar, coffee and rice, are being vigorously +carried on, new products are not lost sight of. Experiments are in +progress that promise to greatly diversify our industries and increase +the number of our exports. + +Several fiber plants are receiving attention, particularly the Sisal +Hemp (Agave Sisalana) and Sansevieria or bow string Hemp. The Sisal +plant will grow and flourish on lands that are too dry for any other +cultivation. Many thousands of the plants have been introduced and at +least one plantation is being set out. + +The bow string Hemp requires a wet, rich land in order to do well. It +probably yields the best fiber of all the leaf fiber plants. + +Ramie (Boehmeria nivea) grows splendidly in this country and after being +well established will yield 4 to 6 crops per annum. Whenever a machine +is invented that will economically decorticate the Ramie fiber, its +cultivation will become an important industry in this country. Ramie +will grow and do well wherever the coffee tree will grow, and whenever +the machine is available, the coffee planter will have a profitable +industry, to go hand in hand with coffee and employ the slack time +between the coffee picking seasons. + +Cocoa (Theobroma Cacao) is the tree that produces the fruit from which +chocolate is made. It grows and bears well in moist humid districts, and +many of the coffee planters are setting out numbers of the trees. + +There are many other economic plants that are well suited for culture in +this country. The country is entering on a new era, and as the lands +become settled and population increases, many small cultures will become +possible, which will afford many persons the opportunity of making an +easy living in a land of eternal summer. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +DIGEST OF THE LAND ACT OF 1895. + +(With reference to unoccupied lands.) + +The Land Act of 1895, having for its special object the settlement and +cultivation of the Government agricultural and pastoral land, vested the +control and management of Public Lands in a Board of Three +Commissioners, composed of the Minister of the Interior and two persons +appointed and removable by the President, one of whom is designated the +Agent of Public Lands; but excepting from the control of the +Commissioners, town lots, landings, tracts reserved for Public purposes, +etc., which remain under the control of the Minister of the Interior. + +For the purposes of the Act, the Republic of Hawaii is divided into Six +Land Districts, as follows: + + 1st. Hilo and Puna on the Island of Hawaii. + 2d. Hamakua and Kohala on the Island of Hawaii. + 3rd. Kona and Kau on the Island of Hawaii. + 4th. The Islands of Maui, Molokai, Lanai and Kahoolawe. + 5th. The Island of Oahu. + 6th. The Island of Kauai. + +The Commissioners are represented by a Sub-Agent in each District. + +Public Lands for the purposes of this Act are classified as follows: + +I. Agricultural Lands. First Class: Land suitable for the cultivation of +Fruit, Coffee, Sugar or other perennial crops with or without irrigation. + +Second Class: Land suitable for the cultivation of annual crops only. + +Third Class: Wet lands such as kalo and rice lands. + +II. Pastoral Land. First Class: Land not in the description of +Agricultural land but capable of carrying livestock the year through. + +Second Class: Land capable of carrying livestock only part of the year, +or otherwise inferior to First Class Pastoral land. + +III. Pastoral Agricultural Land: Land adapted in part for pasturage and +in part for cultivation. + +IV. Forest Land: Land producing forest trees but unsuitable for +cultivation. + +V. Waste Land. Land not included in the other classes. + +The Act provides three principal methods for the acquirement of Public +Lands, under systems known as + +I. Homestead Lease. + +II. Right of Purchase Lease. + +III. Cash Freehold. + + +GENERAL QUALIFICATION OF APPLICANTS. + +Applicants for land under systems named above, must be over eighteen +years of age, must be citizens by birth or naturalization or have +received letters of denization or special rights of citizenship, be +under no civil disability for any offense, nor delinquent in the payment +of taxes. Special qualifications are named under the respective systems. + + +HOMESTEAD LEASE SYSTEM. + +The Homestead Lease system permits the acquirement of Public Land by +qualified persons without other payments than a fee of two dollars upon +application and a fee of five dollars upon issuance of Homestead Lease. + +The limit of area in the different classes of land which may be acquired +under Homestead Lease is: + + 8 acres first-class agricultural land; + 16 acres second-class agricultural land; + 1 acre wet (rice or taro) land; + 30 acres first-class pastoral land; + 60 acres second-class pastoral land; + 45 acres pastoral-agricultural land. + + +SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS FOR HOMESTEAD LEASE. + +Any person having the general qualifications (as to citizenship, etc.) +who is not the owner in his own right of any land in the Hawaiian +Islands, other than "wet land" (rice, taro, etc.) and who is not an +applicant for other land under the Act may apply under this part of +the Act, and such application may cover one lot of wet land in addition +to other land, if reasonably near. Husband and wife may not both be +applicants. + +Applications must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of the +District, accompanied by sworn declaration of qualifications, and a fee +of $2. + + +CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPATION. + +The successful applicant receives a certificate of occupation which +entitles him to occupy the described premises and to receive a homestead +lease for Nine Hundred and Ninety-Nine Years, if conditions of +certificate of occupation have been fulfilled, the conditions being: + +That the occupier shall, before the end of two years, build a dwelling +house and reside on the premises. He shall maintain his home on the +premises from and after the end of two years from date of certificate. +He shall before the end of six years from date of certificate have in +cultivation not less than 10 per cent. of the land, or have in +cultivation 5 per cent. of the land and, in good growing condition, not +less than ten timber, shade or fruit trees per acre on agricultural +land, or if pastoral land, fence the same within six years. + +He shall pay the taxes assessed upon the premises within sixty days +after the same are delinquent. + +He shall perform any conditions of the certificates for the planting or +protection of trees, or prevention or destruction of vegetable pests +that may be on the premises. + + +CONDITIONS OF HOMESTEAD LEASE. + +The Lessee or his successors must maintain his home on the leased +premises, must pay the taxes assessed upon the premises, within sixty +days after the same are delinquent, and perform any conditions of the +lease relating to protection or planting of trees, or destruction and +prevention of vegetable pests. + +Lands held under a certificate of occupation or homestead lease are +liable to taxation as estates in fee. + +In case of the death of an occupier or lessee his interests, +notwithstanding any devise or bequest shall vest in his relations, in +the order prescribed in the Act, the widow or widower being first in +order, then the children, etc. + +Certificates of occupation or homestead lease, or any interest +thereunder, is not assignable by way of mortgage nor is the same subject +to attachment, levy or sale on any process issuing from the Courts of +the country. Neither the whole nor any portion of the premises may be +sub-let. + +Surrender may be made to the Government by an occupier or lessee having +the whole interest if all conditions to date of surrender have been +fulfilled, and the person so surrendering is entitled to receive from +the Government the value of permanent improvement, whenever the same is +received by the Government from a new tenant. + + +RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASES. + +Right of Purchase Leases, for the term of twenty-one years, may be +issued to qualified applicants, with the privilege to the Lessee of +purchasing at the end of three years and upon fulfillment of special +conditions. + + +QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS. + +Any person who is over eighteen years of age, who is a citizen by birth +or naturalization of the Republic of Hawaii or who has received letters +of denization of special rights of citizenship, who is under no civil +disability for any offense, who is not delinquent in the payment of +taxes, and who does not own any agricultural or pastoral land in the +Hawaiian Islands, may apply for Right of Purchase Lease, the limit of +areas which may be acquired being: + + 100 acres first-class agricultural land; + 200 acres second-class agricultural land; + 2 acres wet (rice or taro) land; + 600 acres first-class pastoral land; + 1200 acres second-class pastoral land; + 400 acres mixed agricultural and pastoral land. + +Any qualified person, owning less than the respective amounts stated in +foregoing list, and which is not subject to residence condition, may +acquire additional land of the classes already held by him but so that +his aggregate holding shall not be in excess of the limit named; or if +desiring additional land of another class may acquire the same according +to ratio established between the various classes. + +Husband and wife may not both be applicants for Right of Purchase Leases. + +Application must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of the +District, and must be accompanied by a fee equal to six months rent of +premises, fee to be credited on account of rent, if application is +successful, and to be returned is application is unsuccessful. In case +of more than one application for same lot the first application takes +precedence. + + +CONDITIONS OF RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASE. + +Term: twenty-one years. + +Rental: Eight per cent. on the appraised value given in lease, payable +semi-annually. + +The Lessee must from the end of the first to the end of the fifth year +continuously maintain his home on the leased premises. + +The Lessee must have in cultivation at the end of three years five per +cent. and at the end of five years ten per cent. of his holding, and +maintain on agricultural land an average of ten trees to the acre. + +Pastoral land must be fenced. + +Interest in Right of Purchase Lease is not assignable without written +consent of the Commissioners of Public Lands, but the lease may be +surrendered to the Government. + +In case of forfeiture or surrender of right of purchase lease, +reappraisement is made of the land and of permanent improvements +thereon, and if the land is again disposed of, the incoming tenant shall +pay for such permanent improvements and the amount when so received by +the Government shall be paid to the surrendering Lessee. + + +CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH PURCHASE MAY BE MADE. + +At any time after third year of leasehold term, the Lessee is entitled +to a Land Patent giving fee simple title, upon his payment of the +appraised value set forth in lease, if he has reduced to cultivation +twenty-five per cent. of his leased premises, and has substantially +performed all other conditions of his lease. + +[Illustration: KOHALA RAILROAD.] + +[Illustration: RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY.] + + +CASH FREEHOLDS. + +Cash Freehold Lots are sold at auction to the highest qualified bidder, +at appraised value as upset price. + +The qualification of applicants for Cash Freeholds and the areas of land +which may be acquired are the same as those under Right of Purchase +lease system. + + +APPLICATIONS. + +Applications must be made to Sub-Agent of District in writing with sworn +declaration as to qualifications, and a fee of ten per cent. of +appraised value of lot, which fee is forfeited if applicant declines to +take the premises at the appraised value, and is credited to him if he +becomes the purchaser of the lot. If such applicant, however, is outbid, +his fee is returned to him. + +If two or more applications are made and there is no bid above the upset +price, the first application takes precedence. + +The purchaser at auction sale must pay immediately thereafter one-fourth +of purchase price and thereupon receive a "Freehold Agreement." + + +CONDITIONS OF FREEHOLD AGREEMENT. + +The freeholder shall pay the balance of purchase price in equal +installments in one, two and three years, with interest at 6 per cent., +but may pay any installment before it is due and stop corresponding +interest. + +Twenty-five per cent. of agricultural land must be cultivated, and +pastoral land fenced before the end of third year. + +Freeholder must maintain his home on the premises, from end of first to +end of third year. + +He may not assign or sub-let without consent of Agent of Public Lands. + +He must allow Agents of the Government to enter and examine the premises. + +He must pay all taxes that may be due upon the premises. + +If all conditions are fulfilled he is entitled at end of three years to +Patent giving fee simple title. + +In case of forfeiture or surrender the land and permanent improvements +are reappraised separately, and the value of such improvements when +received by Government from new tenant or freeholder, will be paid to +surrendering freeholder. + + +SETTLEMENT ASSOCIATIONS. + +Six or more qualified persons may form a "Settlement Association" and +apply for holdings in one block. + +The provisions for cash freehold apply to the settlement of such blocks, +but first auction sale is confined to members of such Settlement +Association. + +Any lot in such block which may be forfeited or surrendered, or which is +not taken up by any member of the Settlement Association, within three +months, shall be open to any qualified applicants. + +Disputes, disagreements or misunderstandings, between the parties to +certificate of occupation, homestead lease, right of purchase lease, or +cash freehold and relating thereto, which can not be amicably settled, +shall be submitted to the Circuit Judge in whose jurisdiction the +premises are situated and his decision shall be final subject only to +appeal to Supreme Court. + + +CASH SALES AND SPECIAL AGREEMENTS. + +With consent of Executive Council, public lands not under lease may be +sold in parcels of not over one thousand acres, at public auction for +cash, and upon such sale and payment of full consideration, a land +patent will issue. + +Parcels of land of not over six hundred acres, may with consent of +Executive Council, be sold at public auction upon part credit and part +cash, and upon such terms and conditions of improvement, residence, +etc., as may be imposed. + +Upon fulfillment of all conditions a Land Patent will issue. + + +GENERAL LEASES. + +General leases of public lands may be made for a term not exceeding +twenty-one years. + +Such leases are sold at public auction, and require rent in advance +quarterly, semi-annually or annually. + +The conditions of general leases are made at discretion of the +Commissioners, and may be made for any class of public lands. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +MISCELLANEOUS. + + +POPULATION. + +The population of the Islands according to the census of 1890 was +89,991, or in round numbers 90,000. A census of the population has just +been taken, but the results cannot be exactly known for some months. An +estimate recently made based upon the knowledge of general increase from +various sources gives the population as follows: + + Hawaiians 35,000 + Part Hawaiians 10,000 + Chinese 15,000 + Japanese 24,000 + Portuguese 9,000 + American and European 14,000 + ------- + Total 107,000 + +Since the census returns began to come in, it is very evident that this +estimate will be exceeded by some 2,000, making the total population +109,000. The increase will probably be found among Japanese and +Portuguese. The population of Honolulu is 29,920, or practically 30,000. + + +SHIPPING. + +The vessels flying the Hawaiian flag number 52, aggregating 21,678 tons. +They are divided as follows: + + 23 steamers, aggregating 9,575 tons + 5 barks, " 4,198 " + 3 ships, " 6,272 " + 21 schooners and sloops, aggregating 1,623 " + +Of these vessels 13 are employed in foreign trade and 39 in trade +between the Islands. + + +FINANCES. + +Mention has been made of the taxes of this country. A few words will be +to the point upon the financial condition of the government. + +The direct taxes yielded, in 1895, $592,691.92. The Customs revenue was +$547,149.04 and licenses, &c., produced $600,224.23, in all +$1,740,065.19. + +The current expenditures are kept within the current income. Great +public improvements are provided for by loan. This is what every growing +country has to do. The public debt of the country on January 1, 1896, +was $3,764,335. With a population of 109,000, this gives about $34 per +head of the population. The Hawaiian Government finds no difficulty in +obtaining means for internal improvements, and a scheme is now on foot +to reduce the interest and consolidate the public debt. + +The exports in 1895 amounted to $8,474,138.15 and the imports to +$5,339,785.04. This certainly shows well for a country whose total +population is exceeded by dozens of cities. Of the exports $7,975,590.41 +were accredited to sugar, $22,823.68 to coffee, $102,599.25 to bananas +and $8,783.84 to pineapples. These three latter items are elastic and +the showing of 1896 will give a very large increase in their yields. + +Of the imports $4,121,920.22 came from the Pacific ports of the United +States and $394,399.16 from the Atlantic ports; a total of +$4,516,319.38, leaving but $1,197,698.16 for every other nation that the +country has commercial relations with. + +In point of fact, taking exports and imports, the business in 1895 done +by the Hawaiian Islands with all its commercial relations amounted to +$14,188,155.69; of this sum $12,908,508.92 was done with the United +States, which amounts to 91 per cent. of the whole business of the +Islands. From these figures it can be judged how prosperous a little +community that of the Hawaiian Islands is, and further how close are its +relations with the Great Republic. What country in the world has 91 per +cent. of its commercial relations with its neighbor? + +The financial condition of Hawaii is on a sound basis. The men in charge +of its government are frugal and careful of the public expenditure, the +whole tendency of the Republic is to foster industry and thrift. The +institutions are liberal and nothing is more desirable for such a +country than the immigration of colonists, with capital to develop the +industries and determination to work honestly and well. + + +FOR TOURISTS. + +It was not the intention when planning this pamphlet to speak of the +opportunities for tourists visiting the Islands, but a few words are +appended. The object of the pamphlet has been to show the agricultural +resources and general conditions. + +The great attraction of the Islands is undoubtedly the Volcano of +Kilauea, the greatest and most striking volcano in the world. Though +quiescent for a time during part of 1895 and 1896, it has now burst +forth with renewed splendor and promises to exceed many of its former +efforts. Moreover, from the rising of the lakes of fire, and the floor +of the crater generally, it has evidently come to stay. + +But it is not only this one great natural wonder that is attractive to +the tourist. The crater of Haleakala, the largest extinct crater in the +world, is almost, in its silent magnificence, equal to the wonder of the +boiling and seething Kilauea. Then the delightful climate, the balmy +breezes, the brilliant coloring of sky, sea and land, the luxuriant +tropical vegetation, and the peculiar "Dolce far niente" life, all lend +a charm to which no one who visits the place has ever failed to respond. +In fact a visit to the Hawaiian Islands is one of the pleasantest +experiences of a life-time. + +For people suffering from pulmonary troubles the climate is unrivalled +and there are now several sanitariums where such patients can be +attended to. + +San Francisco and Victoria are the two points of deportation for the +Hawaiian Islands. The Oceanic Steamship Line has vessels sailing twice a +month. One steamer sails for Honolulu, stays a few days, and returns to +San Francisco. The other steamers touch at Honolulu and go on to the +Australian colonies. Round trip tickets can be obtained and also lay +over tickets, at the Company's offices on Montgomery street, San +Francisco. The Pacific Mail and O. & O. S. S. lines, running from China +and Japan to San Francisco, also touch at Honolulu regularly. +Arrangements can be made to lay over in Honolulu, visit the Volcano and +proceed on the voyage by the next vessel. + +From Victoria the C. & A. S. S. sail once a month. They give the tourist +a chance of seeing the Canadian Pacific Railroad before coming here, but +a round trip ticket would have to be for a full month. By the O. S. S. +lines less time need be spent on the Islands. + +The cost of round trip passage is $125. + +The cost of trip to the Volcano, including all expenses is $50. + +Hotel expenses in Honolulu from $2 a day, according to accommodation. + +Particulars on these subjects can always be learned by writing to Wilder +S. S. Co., Fort street, Honolulu; or the Inter-Island Steamship Co., +Queen street, Honolulu. + + +PRICE LIST OF PROVISIONS ON THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. + +Fresh Hawaiian butter, from 25 to 50c. per lb. + +Hams, from 16-1/2 to 30c. per lb. + +Bacon, from 16-1/2 to 20c. per lb. + +Cheese, from 20 to 35c. per lb. + +Family pork, from 15 to 18c. per lb. + +Corned beef, 7c. per lb. + +Fresh meat, from 6 to 15c. per lb. + +Loin of Porterhouse steaks, from 6 to 15c. per lb. + +Tinned fruits per doz., from $1.75 to $2.25. + +Golden Gate Flour, per 100-lb., $2.50. + +Lower grades, $2.20. + +Hawaiian rice, $3.25 to $5.00 per 100 lbs. + +Hawaiian bananas, per bunch, 25 to 55c. + +Potatoes, from 1 to 2c. per lb. + +Eggs per dozen, 25 to 50c. + +Rolled oats per case, $5.50. + +Ice, in small quantities, 1-1/2c.; 50 lbs. and over, 1c. per lb. + + +WAGES. + +The following is an approximation of the wages paid to different classes +of labor on the Hawaiian Islands: + +Engineers on plantations, from $125 to $175 per month, house and +firewood furnished. + +Sugar boilers, $125 to $175 per month, house and firewood furnished. + +Blacksmiths, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house and firewood +furnished. + +Carpenters, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house and firewood +furnished. + +Locomotive drivers, $40 to $75 per month, room and board furnished. + +Head overseers, or head lunas, $100 to $150. + +Under overseers, or lunas, $30 to $50 with room and board. + +Bookkeepers, plantation, $100 to $175, house and firewood furnished. + +Teamsters, white, $30 to $40 with room and board. + +Hawaiians, $25 to $30 with room; no board. + +Field labor, Portuguese and Hawaiian $16 to $18 per month; no board. + +Field labor, Chinese and Japanese, $12.50 to $15 per month; no board. + +In Honolulu bricklayers and masons receive from $5 to $6 per day; +carpenters, $2.50 to $5; machinists, $3 to $5; painters, $2 to $5, per +day of nine hours. + + +DOMESTIC LABOR. + +The domestic labor in Honolulu and in all parts of the Islands, has +for many years been performed by Chinese males, who undoubtedly make +excellent house servants. During the last four or five years the +Japanese have entered the field; the Japanese women are especially in +demand as nurses for children. + +The following are the prevailing rates of wages: + +Cooks, Chinese and Japanese, $3 to $6 per week, with board and room. + +Nurses and house servants, $8 to $12 per month, with board and room. + +Gardeners or yard men, $8 to $12 per month, with board and room. + +Sewing women, $1 per day and one meal. + +Good substantial meals can be obtained at respectable Chinese restaurants +and at the Sailors' Home for 25 cents or Board for $4.50 per week. + +The market for all kinds of labor is overstocked and it would be very +unwise for any one to come to these Islands with no capital on the mere +chance of obtaining employment. The many steamships arriving at this +port bring numbers of people seeking employment who are obliged to +return disappointed. + +[Illustration: NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU.] + +[Illustration: WAIKIKI BEACH.] + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +HISTORICAL SKETCH. + +Although the written history of the Hawaiian Islands begins with their +discovery by Captain Cook in 1778, yet the aboriginal inhabitants had at +that time an oral traditional history which extended back for several +centuries. + + +ORIGIN. + +As to their origin, these people formed but one branch of the Polynesian +race, which at a remote period settled all the groups of islands in the +central and Eastern Pacific, as far as New Zealand in the South and +Easter Island in the East. This is shown by the close physical and moral +resemblance between their inhabitants, as well as by the facts that they +all speak dialects of the same language, and have the same manners and +customs, the same general system of tabus, and similar traditions and +religious rites. + +The evidence of both language and physical traits tends to show that +their remote ancestors came from the East Indian Archipelago, and that +they were still more distantly related to the pre-Arian races of +Hindostan. + +It is also proved by concurrent traditions of the different groups that +there was a general movement of population throughout central Polynesia +during the twelfth and thirteenth centuries of the Christian Era, during +which the Harvey Islands and afterwards New Zealand were colonized, and +many voyages were made between the Hawaiian Islands and the Samoan and +Society groups. This intercourse, however, seems to have ceased for four +or five hundred years before the arrival of Captain Cook. + + +ARTS AND MANUFACTURES. + +The ancient Hawaiians were not savages, in the proper sense of the term, +but barbarians of a promising type. When we consider that they occupied +the most isolated position in the world, and that they were destitute of +metals and of beasts of burden, as well as of the cereal grains, cotton, +flax and wool, we must admit that they had made a creditable degree of +progress towards civilization. Like the other Polynesians, they had not +invented the art of making pottery, or the use of the loom for weaving. + +Their cutting tools were made of stone, sharks' teeth or bamboo. Their +axes were made of hard, fine grained lava, chiefly found on the mountain +summits. Their principal implement for cultivating the soil was simply a +stick of hard wood, either pointed or shaped into a flat blade at the +end. With these rude tools they cut and framed the timbers for their +houses, which were oblong with long sides and steep roofs, and were +thatched with _pili_ grass, ferns or _hala_ leaves. In the building as +well as in the management of canoes they were unsurpassed. For +containers they used a large gourd (_cucurbita maxima_, which was not +found elsewhere in the Pacific), and also cut out circular dishes of +wood as truly as if they had been turned in a lathe. + +For clothing they beat out the inner bark of the paper mulberry and of +some other trees, until it resembled thick flexible paper, when it was +called _kapa_ or _tapa_. For insignia of rank, they made splendid +feather cloaks, and feather helmets, which were worn only by chiefs. + +For lights they used the oily nuts of the _kukui_ or candle-nut tree. + +For food they chiefly depended upon the tuberous roots of the _taro_ +plant (_Colocasia antiquorum_), but sweet potatoes were cultivated in +the dry districts, and yams in Kauai and Niihau. They also cultivated +bananas and sugar cane and the _awa_ or _kava_ plant for its narcotic +properties. + +Fishing was carried on with great ingenuity and skill. Extensive fish +ponds were built along the coasts, which must have cost immense labor. + +Their food was cooked then, as now, by steaming it in an _imu_ or +underground oven with heated stones. Fire was produced by friction, +viz., by rubbing a hard, pointed stick in a groove made in a piece of +softer wood, until the little heap of fine powder collected at the end +of the groove took fire. + +There was no circulating medium which served the purpose of money, and +all trade was conducted by barter. + + +CIVIL POLITY. + +The civil polity of the ancient Hawaiians was far more despotic than +that of any other Polynesian tribe. The community was divided into three +classes, namely: + +1. The nobility or _Alii_ (N. Z. _Ariki_), comprising the kings and +chiefs of various grades of rank. + +2. The priests, _Kahuna_ (N. Z. _Tahunga_), including priests, sorcerers +and doctors. + +3. The common people, _Makaainana_, or laboring class. + +There was a wide and impassable gulch between the chiefs and common +people. In fact, the distinction between them was primarily of a sacred +and religious character. The chief was believed to be descended from the +gods, and to be allied to the invisible powers. + +The contrast in stature and appearance as well as in bearing between the +chiefs and common people was very striking. Only a chief had the right +to wear the feather cloak and helmet, or the ivory clasp, _Niho Palaoa_; +his canoe and his sails were painted red, and on state occasions he was +attended by men carrying _kahilis_ or plumed staffs of various colors. +When the highest chiefs appeared abroad, all the common people +prostrated themselves with their faces upon the ground. It was death for +a common man to remain standing at the mention of the king's name in +song, or when the king's food, water or clothing was carried past; to +put on any article of dress belonging to him, to enter his enclosure +without permission, or to cross his shadow or that of his house. If a +common man entered the dread presence of the sovereign, he must crawl +prone on the ground, _kolokolo_, and leave in the same manner. + +The head chief of an island was styled the _Moi_, and his dignity was +generally hereditary. There were usually at least four independent +kinglets in the group, and sometimes the single Island of Hawaii was +divided between several independent chiefs. + + +LAND TENURE. + +As a rule, the chiefs were the only proprietors of the soil. They were +supposed to own not only the soil and all that grew upon it, not only +the fish of the sea, but also the time and labor of their people. + +The accepted theory was that all the lands belonged to the king, of whom +they were held by the high chiefs in fief; _i. e._, on condition of +rendering him tribute and military service. Each of these district +chieftains divided up his territory among an inferior order of petty +chiefs, who owed to him the same service and obedience that he owed to +the king. + +In this way the land was subdivided again and again, while at the bottom +of the scale were the miserable serfs who tilled the soil. These last +were simply tenants at will, liable to be dispossessed of their little +holdings at any time, or to be stripped of their personal property at +the requisition of the chief. + + +WAR. + +Wars were frequent and cruel. There were numerous wars to settle the +succession to the sovereignty of an Island, as well as contests between +the head chiefs of the principal Islands. For example, the chiefs of +Oahu often contended with those of Maui for the possession of Molokai, +and there were frequent wars between the chiefs of Hawaii and those of +Maui for the district of Hana. + +Their weapons consisted of long spears, _pololu_; javelins, _ihe_; +daggers, _pahoa_, and clubs made of hard wood. They never used the bow +in war, but slings made of cocoanut fiber or human hair were extensively +employed. They used no shields, but became wonderfully expert in +catching or parrying spears thrown at them. + +Sometimes they engaged in sea fights, with large fleets of canoes +on each side. In general no quarter was given to the vanquished, but +there were certain sanctuaries called _puuhonuas_, which afforded an +inviolable refuge in time of war. Cannibalism was regarded by them with +horror and detestation. + + +RELIGION. + +The religious system of the ancient Hawaiians was very similar to that +of other Polynesians. It consisted in a great measure of nature worship. +To their minds all the powers of nature, especially those that are +mysterious and terrible, were conceived of as living and spiritual +beings. Thus the volcano, the thunder, the whirlwind, the meteor and the +shark were feared as being either the embodiment or the work of +malevolent spirits (_akuas_). + +The four great gods, Kane, Kanaloa, Ku and Lono, who were worshiped +throughout Polynesia, originally belonged to this class, as is shown by +the cosmogony of the New Zealand Maoris. Among these four Kane held the +primacy. The souls of great chiefs went to his abode after death. + +Pele, the dread goddess of volcanoes, and her numerous family, dwelt in +the crater of Kilauea, but also caused the eruptions of Mauna Loa and +Hualalai. In Hawaii she was feared more than any other deity. + +One large class of _akuas_ were supposed to be incarnated in certain +species of animals, which were feared or believed to have a supernatural +character, as the shark. + +Another class of deities, which included most of the professional gods, +consisted of deified spirits of the dead. The _Aumakuas_ were tutelar +deities, attached to particular families, who were often deified +ancestors. Sickness and disease were generally caused by their +displeasure. + + +CEREMONIAL SYSTEM. + +There were two hereditary orders of priests, endowed with lands, who +kept up the elaborate liturgy and ritual of the temples, and also +preserved whatever knowledge of astronomy, history, medicine, etc., had +been handed down to them. + +The tabu system covered the entire daily life of the people with a vast +network of minute regulations and penalties. Thus, it was tabu for men +and women to eat together, or even to have their food cooked in the same +oven. Women were forbidden to eat pork, bananas, cocoanuts, or turtle +and certain kinds of fish, on pain of death. There were certain tabu +days when no canoe could be launched, no fire lighted, and when no sound +could be made, on pain of death. Even dogs had to be muzzled and fowls +shut up in calabashes for twenty-four hours at a time. + +The human sacrifice was the crowning act of the ancient worship, offered +only on certain solemn occasions, and at the temples (_Heiaus_) of the +highest class. + +Whenever a temple was to be dedicated, a new house to be built for the +chief, or a new war canoe to be launched, many of the people fled to the +mountains and lay hidden till the danger was past. + +Besides the regular priesthood, there were many kinds of medicine men, +necromancers or mediums, sorcerers and diviners, who preyed upon the +superstition and credulity of their countrymen. The belief that all +forms of disease were caused by evil spirits, and their fear of being +"prayed to death" (_anaana_), kept the people in a state of abject fear. + +There is too much reason to believe that during several centuries +preceding the discovery of the Islands they had been deteriorating in +many respects. As the historian Fornander has stated: + +"It was an era of strife, dynastic ambitions, internal and external wars +on each Island, with all their deteriorating consequences of anarchy, +depopulation, social and intellectual degradation, loss of liberty, loss +of knowledge, loss of arts." + + +DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS. + +It seems to be almost certain that one Juan Gaetano, a Spanish +navigator, saw Hawaii in 1555 A. D. A group of islands, the largest of +which was called La Mesa, was laid down in the old Spanish charts in the +same latitude as the Hawaiian Islands, but 10 degrees too far east. + +On the eighteenth of January, 1778, Captain Cook, the great navigator, +while sailing due north from the Society Islands, discovered the Islands +of Oahu and Kauai. The next day he landed at Waimea, Kauai, where he +held friendly intercourse with the natives, and afterwards laid in +supplies at Niihau. He finally sailed for Alaska, Feb. 2d. The Hawaiians +looked upon him as an incarnation of the god Lono, and upon his crew as +supernatural beings. Returning from the Arctic the following winter, he +anchored in Kealakekua bay, January 17th, 1779. Here he received +divine honors and was loaded with munificent presents of the best that +the islands could produce. By his rash and arbitrary conduct, however, +he involved himself in an affray with the natives, in which he was +killed on February 14th, 1779. + +The spot where he fell is now marked by an appropriate monument. + +[Illustration: LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS.] + +[Illustration: KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL.] + + +EARLY TRADERS. + +For seven years after the death of Captain Cook no foreign vessel +ventured to touch at the Islands. After that time many of the vessels +engaged in the fur trade on the northwest coast of America called at the +Islands for supplies on their way to Canton or ran down here to spend +the winter. Waimea, Kauai, and Kealakekua bay were the two harbors most +frequented by them. Fire arms, powder and shot were the articles most in +demand among the natives. + + +THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA. + +At the death of Kalaniopuu, _Moi_, of Hawaii, in 1782, a civil war broke +out, which rent the Island into three petty sovereignties, which were +presently reduced to two. + +The districts of Kohala and Kona were held by Kamehameha, a nephew of +the late king, while the other districts were loyal to his son, Keoua. +After a sanguinary war lasting nine years (during which Kamehameha had +ravaged West Maui and conquered the district of Hamakua), he became +master of the whole of the Island of Hawaii by the assassination of his +rival, Keoua, at Kawaihae, in 1791. + + +VISITS OF VANCOUVER. + +The name of Capt. George Vancouver is still cherished as that of a wise +and generous benefactor to these Islands. During his survey of the +northwest coast of America in 1792-1794, he made three visits to the +Islands. He uniformly refused to sell fire arms or ammunition to the +chiefs, but gave them useful plants and seeds, and presented Kamehameha +with the first cattle and sheep ever landed in the Islands. On the 25th +of February, 1794, Kamehameha and his chiefs voluntarily placed Hawaii +under the protection of Great Britain, in token of which the British +flag was hoisted on shore at Kealakekua. + + +CONQUEST OF OAHU. + +After the death of Kahekili, the sovereign of the leeward Islands, in +1794, a civil war broke out between his brother Kaeo and his son +Kalanikupule, in which the former was killed. Soon after Kalanikupule +treacherously massacred Captains Brown and Gordon, who had assisted him +in the late war, and seized their vessels in the harbor of Honolulu. + +Having put his guns and ammunition on board, he proposed to sail +immediately for Hawaii, in company with a fleet of war canoes, to attack +Kamehameha. But the English sailors who had been reserved to navigate +the two vessels, suddenly rose at midnight, recaptured them, and sailed +for Hawaii, where they informed Kamehameha of all that had occurred. + +Kamehameha saw that his opportunity had now come, and lost no time in +mustering all the war canoes and fighting men of Hawaii. + +After overrunning West Maui and touching at Molokai, he landed in +Waialea bay, Oahu, in the latter part of April, 1795. There he spent a +few days in organizing his army before marching up the valley of Nuuanu, +where Kalanikupule had prepared to make his last stand. The Oahu +warriors were soon routed and pursued up the valley. Some of the +fugitives were hemmed in and driven over the "_Pali_," or precipice, at +the head of Nuuanu, a little north of the present road. + +This victory made Kamehameha master of all the Islands except Kauai and +Niihau. With the exception of a short insurrection in Hawaii, there was +peace during the rest of his reign. + + +DECREASE OF POPULATION. + +The decrease of the population during this period must have been very +rapid. Vancouver in 1792, Broughton in 1796, and Trumbull in 1801, were +strongly impressed with the misery of the common people and their rapid +decrease in numbers. This was partly the result of wars, but was still +more due to the diseases and vices introduced by foreigners. In the +summer of 1804 a pestilence, supposed to have been the cholera, carried +off half of the population of Oahu. Botany Bay convicts had introduced +the art of distilling liquor before the year 1800, and drunkenness had +become very prevalent. + + +THE SANDAL-WOOD TRADE. + +During the first quarter of the present century the sandal-wood trade +was at its height. This wood was in great request at Canton, where it +was sold for incense and the manufacture of fancy articles. It was +purchased by the picul of 133-1/2 pounds, the price varying from eight +to ten dollars for the picul. This wood, while it lasted, was a mine of +wealth for the chiefs, by means of which they were enabled to buy fire +arms, liquor, boats and schooners, as well as silks and other Chinese +goods, for which they paid exorbitant prices. + + +THE CESSION OF KAUAI. + +In March, 1810, Kaumualii, the last King of Kauai, visited Honolulu in +the ship Albatross, Capt. Nathan Winship, in order to have an interview +with Kamehameha. It was then arranged between the two chiefs that +Kaumualii should continue to hold his Island in fief of Kamehameha +during his life-time, on condition of paying tribute. + + +RUSSIAN AGGRESSIONS. + +During the year 1815 a Dr. Scheffer was sent to the Islands by Baranoff, +the Russian Governor of Alaska. He built a fort at Waimea, for +Kaumualii, on which the Russian colors were displayed, and urged him to +place himself under the protection of Russia. On hearing of this, +Kamehameha sent a large force to Honolulu, where a substantial fort was +built during the year 1816. He also sent orders to Kaumualii to expel +Dr. Scheffer, which was done. + + +DEATH OF KAMEHAMEHA. + +Kamehameha I. died on May 8th, 1819, at Kailua, Hawaii. His work was +done. He had consolidated the group under a strong government, put an +end to feudal anarchy and petty wars, and thus prepared the way for +civilization and Christianity. + + +ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY. + +In accordance with his will, his eldest son, Liholiho, was installed as +king, with the title of Kamehameha II., and Kaahumanu, his favorite +queen, as premier, to exercise equal powers with the young prince, whose +dissolute and reckless character is well known. + +Their first important act was the abolition of the tabu system, which +took place at a great feast held at Kailua in October, 1819, at which men +and women ate together in public for the first time. This was followed by +the general burning of idols and temples throughout the group. + +Kekuaokalani, a cousin of Liholiho, put himself at the head of the +adherents of the ancient faith, but was defeated and slain in the battle +of Kuamoo, fought about December 20th, 1819. + + +THE ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN MISSIONARIES. + +The pioneer company of American missionaries to these Islands arrived at +Kailua, April 4th, 1820. They soon reduced the language to writing and +commenced printing the first book in January, 1822. They found in the +Hawaiians an amiable and highly receptive race, eager for knowledge and +easily influenced for good or evil. The principal opposition to reform +was made by foreigners. + + +THE WHALING FLEET. + +The first whale ship called at Honolulu in 1820, and was soon followed +by many others. Their number soon increased to 100 every year, and the +furnishing of supplies for them became the chief resource of the +Islands, as the sandal-wood became exhausted. + + +DEATH OF LIHOLIHO. + +The young king, accompanied by his wife and six chiefs, embarked for +England, November 27, 1823, on an English whale ship. On their arrival +in London they received the utmost hospitality and courtesy, but in a +few weeks the whole party was attacked by the measles, of which the king +and queen both died. + + +REBELLION ON KAUAI. + +Meanwhile, on the death of Kaumualii, a rebellion broke out in Kauai, +led by his son, Humehume. A desperate assault was made on the fort at +Waimea, which was repulsed with loss. Over 1,000 warriors were sent down +from Oahu and Maui, and a battle was fought near Hanapepe, August 18th, +1824, in which the rebels were routed. + + +VISIT OF LORD BYRON. + +The frigate "Blonde," commanded by Lord Byron, cousin of the poet of +that name, was commissioned to convey the remains of the late king and +queen, together with their retinue, back to their native land. It +arrived at Honolulu, May 6th, 1825, when the royal remains were +deposited in a mausoleum with impressive funeral ceremonies. + +Kauikeaouli, the younger brother of Liholiho, was proclaimed king with +the title of Kamehameha III., and Kaahumanu as regent during his +minority. Her administration was signalized by a series of outrages at +Lahaina and Honolulu, committed by a depraved class of foreigners who +resented certain regulations made to restrict public prostitution. + +Com. Jones visited the Islands in the "Peacock" in 1826, and concluded +the first treaty between the Hawaiian Islands and the United States. The +next year the first written laws were published against murder, theft, +adultery and gambling. + + +THE ROMAN CATHOLIC MISSION. + +The first Roman Catholic missionaries arrived at Honolulu, July 7th, +1827, on the ship "Comet," from Bordeaux, and soon gathered a +congregation. They were members of the so-called "Picpusian Order," or +"Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary." Unfortunately, +misunderstandings arose, and from a mistaken belief that they were +fomenting discord and sedition, the chiefs caused them to be deported to +San Pedro, California, in January, 1832. + + +ACCESSION OF KAMEHAMEHA III. + +Kaahumanu died June 5th, 1832, and was succeeded by Kinau, half-sister +of the king. The king's minority was declared to be at an end in March, +1833. A tract of land was leased to Ladd & Co. in 1835, and about the +same time a silk plantation was commenced by Peck & Titcomb. Cotton was +raised and manufactured on a small scale at Kailua, Hawaii. + + +PERSECUTIONS. + +During the next few years the chiefs persisted in a harsh and +unjustifiable policy, which imperiled the independence of the country. + +On the return of the two banished priests from California, in April, +1837, they were ordered to return in the same vessel in which they had +come, and were obliged to go on board of it. Meanwhile the British sloop +of war "Sulphur," Captain Belcher, and the French frigate "Venus," +Captain Du Petit Thouars, arrived and interposed in behalf of the +priests. As a compromise, they were landed again on condition that they +should leave by the first favorable opportunity. Again on the 3d of +November, another priest, Rev. L. Maigret, and a lay brother arrived +from Valparaiso, but were not allowed to land. Finally Revs. Maigret and +Bachelot left in a schooner for Bonabe, Micronesia. From 1835 to 1839 +the persecution of native converts was resumed, but was at last put an +end to by the declaration of rights promulgated June 4th, 1839, and the +king's edict of toleration, issued June 17th. + + +VISIT OF THE "ARTEMISE." + +In consequence of these proceedings the French frigate "Artemise," +Captain Laplace, was ordered to Honolulu, where it arrived July 9th, 1839. + +Captain Laplace immediately sent the Government a peremptory letter +demanding that full religious liberty be proclaimed, and that the sum of +$20,000 be brought on board by noon of the 12th, or hostilities would +commence. The required treaty was signed and the money promptly paid, +and on the 16th, a commercial convention was also signed. + + +FIRST CONSTITUTION. + +The declaration of rights, mentioned above, which guaranteed religious +liberty, produced a feeling of security unknown before, and formed the +first step towards establishing individual property in land. The first +constitution was proclaimed October 8th, 1840. It constituted a +Legislature, consisting of a House of Hereditary Nobles, and +Representatives to be chosen by the people, who voted as a separate +house. It also defined the duties of the Governors and provided for a +Supreme Court. + + +THE FIRST EMBASSY. + +During the next two years the French and English consuls seemed to vie +with each other in the manufacture of petty grievances. Aware of the +dangers impending over it, the Hawaiian Government sent an embassy to +the United States, Great Britain and France, in July, 1842, which +consisted of Messrs. Haalilio, William Richards and Sir George Simpson, +one of the governors of the Hudson Bay Company. + + +VISIT OF CAPTAIN MALLET. + +On the 24th of August, 1842, the French corvette "Embuscade," Captain +Mallet, arrived at Honolulu, having been sent to investigate complaints +of the violation of the Laplace Convention, chiefly relating to local +school matters. Having received an able and courteous reply to his +demands, he informed the king that Admiral Du Petit Thouars might be +expected the next spring to settle these matters. + + +THE CESSION TO LORD PAULET. + +The dispatch of the embassy to Europe and the visit of Captain Mallet +both served to bring to a head the designs of Mr. Charlton, the British +consul. He suddenly left for London, leaving Alexander Simpson as +acting consul, in order to defeat the objects of the embassy. In +consequence of their representations, H. B. M. frigate "Carysford," +commanded by George Paulet, was ordered to Honolulu, arriving there +February 10, 1843. On the arrival of the king from Lahaina, Lord Paulet +sent him six demands, threatening war if they were not acceded to by 4 +p. m. of the next day. These demands chiefly related to a fraudulent +land claim of Charlton's, and to decisions of the courts in certain +civil suits between foreigners. Before the hour set for hostilities had +arrived, the king acceded to the demands under protest, and appealed to +the British Government for damages. But a fresh series of demands having +been made, and claims for damages having been trumped up amounting to +$80,000, the king decided, by Dr. Judd's advice, to forestall the +intended seizure of the Islands by a provisional cession, pending an +appeal to the justice of the home government. + +The act of cession was carried into effect February 25th, 1843. The +British flag took the place of the Hawaiian for five months, and a body +of native troops was organized and drilled by British officers. + +The country was meanwhile governed by a mixed commission consisting of +Lord Paulet, Lieutenant Frere, a Mr. Mackay and Dr. Judd. + +[Illustration: OAHU COLLEGE.] + +[Illustration: PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE.] + + +THE RESTORATION. + +On being informed of these events, Admiral Thomas, Commander-in-Chief of +H. B. M.'s naval forces in the Pacific ocean, immediately sailed from +Valparaiso for the Islands, arriving at Honolulu July 25th, 1843. He +immediately issued a proclamation, declaring in the name of his +government that he did not accept of the provisional cession of the +Hawaiian Islands, and on the 31st restored the national flag with +impressive ceremonies. His course was fully approved of by the home +government, and certainly tended to exalt the reputation of his country +for justice and magnanimity in dealing with inferior races. + + +THE RECOGNITION OF HAWAIIAN INDEPENDENCE. + +Meanwhile the Hawaiian embassadors, who had been joined by Mr. Marshall, +the king's envoy, had done effective work in London and Paris. At their +request the matters in dispute had been referred to the law advisers of +the crown, who decided in favor of the Hawaiian Government on every +point except the Charlton land claim. At length, on the 28th of +November, 1843, the two governments of France and England issued a joint +declaration in which they recognized the independence of the Islands, +and reciprocally engaged "never to take possession, either directly or +under the title of a protectorate, or under any other form, of any part +of the territory of which they are composed." + + +ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT. + +Both the king and his advisers saw that in order to maintain a permanent +government it was necessary to combine both the native and foreign +elements together in one common organization, and to make the king the +sovereign not merely of one race or class, but of all. During the next +few years the executive departments of the Government and the judiciary +were organized by a group of men of remarkably high character and +ability. + + +LAND TITLES. + +During the period of 1846-1855 the ancient tenure of land was abolished, +and the foundation laid of individual property in land. In the first +place, the king as feudal suzerain divided the lands of the kingdom +between himself and each one of the chiefs, his feudatories, this +partition being recorded in a book called the _Mahele_ Book, or Book of +Division. After this first partition was closed, out of four million +acres there remained in the king's hands about two and a half millions. +The king then redivided the lands which had been surrendered to him, +setting apart about a million and a half acres for the Government, and +reserving for himself as his private domain, about a million acres, +including the best of the lands. The common people were granted fee +simple titles for their house lots and the lands which they actually +cultivated for themselves, called _Kuleanas_ or homesteads. + + +THE "REPRISALS" OF 1849. + +From 1843 till 1848 the most amicable relations continued to exist +between France and the Hawaiian Government. But this state of things was +then reversed by M. Dillon, the new French consul, who endeavored to +reopen all old disputes and to create new grievances in every possible +way. His principal grounds of complaint were the high duty on brandy and +the alleged partiality shown to the English language. On the 12th of +August, 1849, the French frigate "Poursuivante," Admiral De Tromelin, +arrived at Honolulu, and was joined the next day by the corvette +"Gassendi." + +On the 22d the admiral sent to the king ten demands, drawn up by M. +Dillon, allowing the Hawaiian Government three days in which to comply +with them. + +As these demands were firmly but courteously refused, an armed force was +landed on the 25th, which took possession of the deserted fort, the +custom house and other buildings, and the harbor was blockaded for ten +days. The fort was dismantled and the king's private yacht confiscated +by way of "reprisal," after which the "Poursuivante" sailed for San +Francisco, taking M. Dillon as a passenger. + + +THE SECOND EMBASSY TO FRANCE. + +The king immediately sent Dr. Judd as special commissioner to France, +accompanied by the two nephews of the king, Alexander, the +heir-apparent, and Lot Kamehameha. + +But on arriving in Paris they found that M. Dillon had preceded them, +and still retained the confidence of the Minister of Foreign Affairs. + +The embassy, however, agreed with Lord Palmerston upon the basis of a +new treaty with Great Britain. + + +THE U. S. PROTECTORATE. + +The French corvette "Serieuse" arrived at Honolulu, December 13, 1850, +bringing M. Perrin, Commissioner of France, and remained in port three +months. + +To the surprise of all, he presented again the identical ten demands of +his predecessor, and resumed his policy of petty annoyance and +interference with internal affairs of the kingdom. At length his +attitude became so menacing that the king and privy council passed a +proclamation placing the Islands provisionally under the protectorate of +the United States. This action was ratified by the next Legislature. +Although it was finally declined by the United States, it had the +desired effect, and the obnoxious demands were dropped. + + +THE CONSTITUTION OF 1852. + +Was a very liberal one for the times, and has formed the basis of all +succeeding constitutions. The nobles were to be appointed by the kings +for life. The representatives, who were to be not less than twenty-four +in number, were to be elected by universal suffrage. + + +INDUSTRIAL PROGRESS. + +Between the years 1850 and 1860 a large part of the government land was +sold to the common people in small tracts at nominal prices. + +The rapid settlement of California opened a new market for the +productions of the Islands, and gave a great stimulus to agriculture. +For a time large profits were made by raising potatoes for the +California market. Wheat was cultivated in the Makawao district, and a +steam flouring mill was erected in Honolulu in 1854. The next year 463 +barrels of Hawaiian flour were exported. A coffee plantation was started +at Hanalei, Kauai, in 1842, and promised well, but was attacked by +blight after the severe drought of 1851-2. The export of coffee rose to +208,000 pounds in 1850, but then fell off. The export of sugar only +reached 500 tons in 1853. The sugar mills were generally worked by oxen +or mules, and the molasses drained in the old fashioned way. + + +THE UNFINISHED ANNEXATION TREATY. + +The year 1853 was rendered memorable by a terrible epidemic of +small-pox, which carried off several thousand people on the Island of +Oahu. During that and the following year there was an active agitation +in Honolulu in favor of annexation to the United States. The king +favored it as a refuge from impending dangers. The missionaries +generally opposed it, fearing that its effects would be injurious to the +native race. The negotiations were carried on between Mr. Gregg, the +American Minister, and Mr. Wyllie, the Minister of Foreign Affairs, and +a draft of the treaty was completed in June, 1854. + +The representatives of France and Great Britain remonstrated with the +king against it, while the heir-apparent was also opposed to it. The +negotiation was still pending when the king suddenly died on the 15th of +December, 1854. + +His adopted son and heir, Alexander Liholiho, was immediately proclaimed +king, under the title of Kamehameha IV. + + +THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. + +Was uneventful. He was married to Emma Rooke, a chiefess partly of English +descent, who both by her character and her talents was worthy of the +position. By their personal exertions the king and queen succeeded in +raising the funds with which to found the "Queen's Hospital" at +Honolulu. Their little son, the "Prince of Hawaii," died in 1862, at +four years of age, and with him expired the hope of the Kamehameha +dynasty. During the same year Bishop Staley, accompanied by a staff of +clergymen, arrived at Honolulu and commenced the Anglican Mission. + +During the following year the king was rapidly failing in health, and on +the 30th of November, 1863, he died, at the early age of twenty-nine, +and was succeeded by his elder brother, Prince Lot Kamehameha. + +The development of the country during his reign was nearly at a +stand-still. The cultivation of wheat as well as that of coffee was +given up, but the culture of rice was commenced in 1860, and proved to +be a great success. + + +THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. + +The reign of Kamehameha V. was memorable for the change of the +constitution which he made on his own authority, soon after coming to +the throne. The right of suffrage was made to depend on a small property +qualification and on ability to read and write. The Nobles and +representatives were henceforth to sit and vote in one chamber. During +his reign the Board of Education was constituted, the Bureau of +Immigration formed, and the Act passed in 1865 to segregate the lepers. + +A treaty of reciprocity with the United States was negotiated, but +failed of ratification by the Senate. + +A destructive eruption from Mauna Loa took place in 1868, in the +District of Kau. The almost total destruction of the whaling fleet in +the Arctic Sea in 1871 was a serious blow to the prosperity of the +Islands. + +The King died suddenly December 11th, 1872, and with him ended the line +of the Kamehamehas. + + +THE REIGN OF LUNALILO. + +As Kamehameha V. died without appointing any successor, the choice +devolved upon the Legislature, which met on the 8th of January, 1873, +and elected William Lunalilo, cousin of the late king, by a large +majority, amid general rejoicing. During that year, the proposal to cede +or lease Pearl Harbor to the United States in consideration of a treaty +of commercial reciprocity gave rise to an extensive agitation, which +intensified the suspicion and race prejudice that already existed. + +The execution of the law for the segregation of lepers helped to widen +the breach, and the effects were seen in the mutiny of the household +troops in September, 1873, which had the sympathy of the populace. + +The King's health was already failing, and on the 3d of February, 1874, +he died of pulmonary consumption. By his will he left the bulk of his +real estate to found a home for aged and indigent Hawaiians. + + +ACCESSION OF KALAKAUA. + +Again the Legislature was called together to elect his successor on the +12th of February, 1874. The two rival candidates were the Queen-Dowager +Emma and David Kalakaua, the latter of whom was elected by thirty-nine +votes to six. A large mob, composed of Queen Emma's partisans, +surrounded the court house during the election, after which they broke +into the building and assaulted the members of the Legislature. + +At the request of the Cabinet, a body of marines was landed from the U. +S. ships "Tuscarora" and "Portsmouth," and another from H. B. M.'s ship +"Tenedos," which dispersed the rioters and guarded the public buildings +for a week. Kalakaua was sworn in at noon the next day, and duly +proclaimed King. + + +THE RECIPROCITY TREATY. + +During the next year negotiations were opened with the United States for +a treaty of commercial reciprocity, which was ratified in June, 1875, +and finally went into operation in September, 1876, in spite of bitter +opposition in both countries. The development of the resources of the +Islands, which has resulted from this treaty, has surpassed all +expectation. In connection with it there has also been a large increase +of the foreign elements in the population. + + +THE KING'S TOUR AROUND THE WORLD. + +On the 20th of January, 1881, King Kalakaua set out on a tour around the +world, accompanied by the late Col. C. H. Judd, and Mr. W. N. Armstrong. +He was received with royal honors in Japan, and afterwards visited +China, Siam, Johore and British India. After visiting the Khedive of +Egypt, the party made the tour of Europe, and returned home by way of +the United States, arriving in Honolulu Oct. 29, 1881. + + +REACTIONARY POLICY OF KALAKAUA. + +Unlike his predecessors, Kalakaua seemed to regard himself as merely a +king of the native Hawaiians, and foreign residents as alien invaders. +It also seemed to be his chief aim to change the system of government +into a personal despotism, in which he should have unchecked control of +the Government Treasury. Thus he took it upon himself in July, 1878, and +again in August, 1880, to dismiss a Ministry, without assigning any +reason, immediately after it had been triumphantly sustained by a vote +of the Legislature. On the latter occasion, his appointment of Celso +Caesar Moreno as premier called forth the protest of the representatives +of three great Powers, and such an uprising of the people that he had to +give way. Adroit politicians were not wanting to flatter his vanity, +defend his follies, and show him how to violate the spirit and intent +of the Constitution, while keeping within the letter of the law. The +Legislatures were packed with subservient office-holders, while every +artifice was used to debauch the native electorate and to foment race +prejudice. The national debt grew up from $389,000 in 1880 to $1,936,000 +in 1887. At the same time, under the existing law, no foreigner could be +naturalized without the King's approval. + +[Illustration: MASONIC TEMPLE.] + +[Illustration: KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM.] + + +THE REVOLUTION OF 1887. + +After the legislative session of 1886, the King was virtually his own +prime minister, and went from one folly to another, until his acceptance +of two bribes, one of $75,000 and another of $80,000 in connection with +the assignment of an opium license, precipitated the revolution of +1887. Overawed by the unanimity of the movement, and deserted by his +followers, the King yielded without a struggle. The Constitution +which he was pleased to sign on the 7th of July, 1887, was a revision +of that of 1864, intended to put an end to mere personal government, +and to make the executive responsible to the representatives of the +people. Office-holders were made ineligible to seats in the Legislature. +The Ministers were henceforth to be removable only upon a vote of want +of confidence passed by a majority of all the elective members of +the Legislature. The Nobles, instead of being appointed by the King, +were to be elected for terms of six years, by electors who should +be possessed of taxable property worth $3,000, or in receipt of an +annual income of $600. + + +THE INSURRECTION OF 1889. + +The opposition of the Court and of other adherents of the old regime, to +the reforms of 1887, led to an insurrection headed by R. W. Wilcox, on +the 30th of July, 1889 which was promptly put down, but not without +bloodshed. Seven of the rioters were killed and a large number wounded. + +There can be little doubt that the late King and his sister were +accessory to this ill-advised outbreak. + + +ACCESSION OF LILIUOKALANI. + +In order to recruit his health, the King visited California in November, +1890. In spite of the best medical attendance, he continued to fail, and +breathed his last on the 20th of January, 1891, in San Francisco. His +remains were brought to Honolulu in the U. S. S. "Charleston," arriving +there January 29th, 1891. On the same day, his sister took the oath to +maintain the Constitution, and was proclaimed Queen, under the title of +Liliuokalani. + + +THE REVOLUTION OF 1893. + +The ex-Queen in a published statement has since declared that she signed +the Constitution unwillingly. The history of her short reign shows that +it was her unaltered purpose to restore autocratic government. In short, +she was determined to govern as well as to reign. + +The decision of the Supreme Court that the term of the last Cabinet +expired with the King, gave her an opportunity (which she improved), to +dictate terms in advance to the incoming Cabinet, and to secure control +of all appointments. The legislative session of 1892 was protracted to +eight months chiefly by her determination to retain her control of the +Executive, as well as to carry through the opium and lottery bills. +Meanwhile she had caused a Constitution to be drawn up, which would +practically, have transformed the government from a limited to an +absolute monarchy, besides disfranchising a class of citizens who paid +two-thirds of the taxes. This Constitution she undertook to spring upon +the country by a _coup d'etat_, on the day of the prorogation of the +Legislature, January 14th, 1893. + +Fortunately, at the critical moment, when her preparations were +complete, her Ministers shrank from sharing the responsibility of +such a revolutionary act, and induced her to postpone it. In such +an undertaking to hesitate is fatal. + +Again there was a general uprising of the conservative part of the +community similar to that of 1887. But this time public opinion +condemned all half way measures, and declared the monarchy to be +forfeited by its own act. + +The Reform leaders reorganized their forces, and formed a Provisional +Government, which was proclaimed January 17th, 1893 from the Government +Building. The U. S. S. "Boston," which had unexpectedly arrived from +Hilo on the day of the prorogation, landed a force on the 16th, to +protect the lives and property of American citizens, in case of disorder +or incendiarism. The Queen's ministers availed themselves of the +presence of these troops on shore as an excuse for their inaction, and +persuaded the Queen to resign under protest, and to appeal to the +government of the United States. + +A treaty of annexation was soon after negotiated with the United States +during President Harrison's administration, which was withdrawn by +President Cleveland immediately after his accession. The failure of his +attempt to restore the monarchy by diplomacy is well known. + + +THE REPUBLIC OF HAWAII. + +During the next year a convention was elected, which sat in Honolulu +during the month of June, 1894, and framed a new Constitution for the +country, and the Republic of Hawaii was formally proclaimed July 4, 1894. + +Another royalist conspiracy was formed during the fall of that year, +which resulted in the insurrection of January 6th, 1895, which was +promptly crushed by the patriotic citizens of the Republic. + +A dangerous epidemic of Asiatic cholera in the following September, was +stamped out by the united efforts of the public spirited citizens of +Honolulu. + +For four years, in spite of hostile influences from without and enemies +at home, the Republic has maintained peace and order, administered +justice, carried on extensive internal improvements, advanced education, +and kept the financial credit of the nation above par in the markets of +the world. + + +OFFICIAL DIRECTORY, REPUBLIC OF HAWAII. + +EXECUTIVE COUNCIL. + +Sanford B. Dole, President of the Republic of Hawaii. + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Foreign Affairs. + +James A. King, Minister of the Interior. + +Samuel M. Damon, Minister of Finance. + +William O. Smith, Attorney-General. + + +COUNCIL OF STATE. + +William C. Wilder, + +Cecil Brown, + +P. C. Jones, + +J. A. Kennedy, + +C. Bolte, + +George W. Smith, + +John Phillips, + +D. L. Naone, + +A. G. M. Robertson, + +E. C. Winston, + +Mark P. Robinson, + +John Ena, + +Samuel M. Ka-ne, + +John Nott, + +J. P. Mendonca. + + +SUPREME COURT. + +Hon. A. F. Judd, Chief Justice. + +Hon. W. F. Frear, First Associate Justice. + +Hon. W. Austin Whiting, Second Associate Justice. + +Henry Smith, Chief Clerk. + +Geo. Lucas, Deputy Clerk. + +James Thompson, Second Deputy Clerk. + +J. Walter Jones, Stenographer. + + +CIRCUIT JUDGES. + +First Circuit--Alfred W. Carter, Antonio Perry, Oahu. + +Second Circuit--J. W. Kalua. + +Third and Fourth Circuits--S. L. Austin. + +Fifth Circuit--J. Hardy. + +Offices and Court-room in Court House, King street. Sitting in Honolulu: +First Monday in February, May, August and November. + + +DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister Foreign Affairs. + +George C. Potter, Secretary. + +Alexander St. M. Mackintosh, Clerk. + +Miss Kate Kelley, Stenographer. + +B. L. Marx, Clerk Executive Council. + +James W. Girvin, Secretary Chinese Bureau. + + +DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +James A. King, Minister of the Interior. + +Chief Clerk, John A. Hassinger. + +Assistant Clerks, James H. Boyd, H. C. Meyers, Stephen Mahaulu, + George C. Ross, Edward S. Boyd. + + +CHIEFS OF BUREAUS, INTERIOR DEPARTMENT. + +Surveyor-General, W. D. Alexander. + +Superintendent Public Works, W. E. Rowell. + +Superintendent Water Works, Andrew Brown. + +Inspector Electric Lights, John Cassidy. + +Registrar of Conveyances, T. G. Thrum. + +Road Supervisor, Honolulu, W. H. Cummings. + +Insane Asylum, Dr. Geo. H. Herbert. + + +BOARD OF FIRE COMMISSIONERS. + +Andrew Brown, Charles Crozier and J. H. Fisher. + +James H. Hunt, Chief Engineer, H. F. D. + +William R. Sims, Secretary. + + +BUREAU OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY. + +President, the Minister of the Interior. Allan Herbert, Thomas King, + Wray Taylor, E. W. Jordan. Joseph Marsden, Commissioner and Secretary. + + +DEPARTMENT OF FINANCE. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Minister of Finance, Samuel M. Damon. + +Auditor-General, H. Laws. + +Registrar of Accounts, W. G. Ashley. + +Clerk of Finance Office, E. R. Stackable. + +Collector-General of Customs, James B. Castle. + +Tax Assessor, Oahu, Jonathan Shaw. + +Postmaster-General, J. M. Oat. + + +CUSTOMS BUREAU. + +Office in Custom House, Esplanade, Fort street. + +Collector-General, James B. Castle. + +Deputy Collector, Frank B. McStocker. + +Harbor Master, Captain A. Fuller. + +Port Surveyor, George C. Stratemeyer. + +Storekeeper, ......... + + +DEPARTMENT OF ATTORNEY-GENERAL. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Attorney-General, William O. Smith. + +Deputy Attorney-General, E. P. Dole. + +Clerk, J. M. Kea. + +Marshal, A. M. Brown. + +Deputy Marshal, H. R. Hitchcock. + +Jailor Oahu Prison, J. A. Low. + +Prison Physician, C. B. Cooper, M. D. + + +DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Public Instruction. + +Commissioners, Professor William Dewitt Alexander, Mrs. Emma Louisa + Dillingham, Mr. William A. Bowen, Mrs. Alice Clark Jordan, + Mr. H. M. von Holt. + +H. S. Townsend, Inspector-General of Schools. + +J. F. Scott, Deputy Inspector-General of Schools. + +C. T. Rodgers, Secretary of Department. + + +BOARD OF IMMIGRATION. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + +President, James A. King. + +Members of Board of Immigration, J. B. Atherton, Joseph Marsden, + D. B. Smith, James G. Spencer, J. Carden. Secretary, Wray Taylor. + + +BOARD OF HEALTH. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + +President, William O. Smith. + +Secretary, Charles Wilcox. + +Members, D. Keliipio, C. A. Brown, N. B. Emerson, M. D.; + F. R. Day, M. D.; C. B. Wood, M. D., and T. F. Lansing. + +Port Physician, Dr. Francis Day. + +Dispensary, Dr. H. W. Howard. + +Leper Settlement, Dr. R. K. Oliver. + + +POLICE COURT. + +Police Station Building, Merchant street. + +George H. de la Vergne, Magistrate. + +William Cuelho, Clerk. + +[Illustration: KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian).] + +[Illustration: CENTRAL UNION CHURCH.] + + * * * * * + + +FOREIGN REPRESENTATIVES IN HONOLULU. + +_Diplomatic._ + +United States--Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, + Albert S. Willis, Esq.; residence, King St. Ellis Mills, Esq., + Secretary of Legation. + +Portugal--Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General, Senhor A. de Souza + Canavarro; residence, Beretania St. + +Great Britain--Commissioner and Consul-General, Captain A. G. S. Hawes. + +Japan--Diplomatic Agent and Consul-General, Mr. H. Shimamura; + residence, Nuuanu Ave. H. I. J. M. Eleve Consul, Mr. K. Mimashi, + Secretary H. I. J. M. Consulate-General. + +France--Consul and Commissioner, Mons. Louis Voisson; Chancellor + of Legation, Mons. A. Vizzavona. + + +_Consular._ + +United States--Consul-General, Ellis Mills. W. Porter Boyd, United + States Vice and Deputy Consul-General. + +Italy--F. A. Schaefer, Consul. (Dean of the Consular Corps.) + +Netherlands--J. H. Paty, Consul. + +Denmark--H. R. Macfarlane, Consul. + +Mexico, H. Renjes, Consul. + +Peru--Bruce Cartwright, Consul. + +Chile--Julius Hoting, Consul. + +Austria-Hungary--J. F. Hackfeld, Consul. + +Germany--J. F. Hackfeld, Consul. + +Belgium--H. Focke, Consul. + +Great Britain--T. R. Walker, Vice-Consul. + +Spain--H. Renjes, Vice-Consul. + +Russia--J. F. Hackfeld, Acting Vice-Consul. + +Sweden and Norway--Charles Weight, Acting Consul. + +China--Goo Kim Fui, Commercial Agent; Wong Kwai, Assistant + Commercial Agent. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Kahului, A. J. Dickens, Acting. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Mahukona, C. J. Falk. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Hilo, Charles Furneaux. + + * * * * * + + +PRINCIPAL HAWAIIAN REPRESENTATIVES ABROAD. + + +_United States._ + +Washington, D. C.--Francis M. Hatch, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister + Plenipotentiary; Major Frank P. Hastings, Charge d'Affaires and + Secretary of Legation. + +New York--E. H. Allen, Consul-General. + +Chicago--Fred W. Job, Consul-General for the States of Illinois, + Michigan, Ohio, Indiana and Wisconsin. + +San Francisco--Charles T. Wilder, Consul-General for the Pacific + States, California, Oregon, Nevada and Washington; J. F. Soper, + Vice and Deputy Consul-General. + +Boston--Gorham D. Gilman, Consul-General. + +Portland, Oregon--J. McCracken, Consul. + +Port Townsend--James G. Swan, Consul. + +Seattle--John H. Carter, Consul. + +Tacoma--J. T. Steeb, Acting Consul. + +Philadelphia--Robert H. Davis, Consul. + +San Diego--H. P. Wood, Consul. + +Detroit--A. L. Bresler, Consul. + + +_Great Britain._ + +London--Manley Hopkins, Consul-General; Cyril Hopkins, Vice-Consul. + +Liverpool--Harold Janion, Consul. + +Bristol--Mark Whitwill, Consul. + +Hull--W. Moran, Consul. + +Newcastle-on-Tyne--E. Biesterfeld, Consul. + +Falmouth--Cecil Robert Broad, Consul. + +Dover (and the Cinque Ports)--Francis Wm. Prescott, Consul. + +Swansea--H. Goldberg, Consul. + +Cardiff--J. Bovey, Consul. + +Edinburgh and Leith--E. G. Buchanan, Consul. + +Glasgow--Peter Denniston, Consul. + +Dundee--J. G. Zoller, Consul. + +Dublin--R. Jas. Murphy, Consul. + +Queenstown--Geo. B. Dawson, Consul. + +Belfast--W. A. Ross, Consul. + +Middlesborough--B. C. Atkinson, Consul. + + +_British Colonies._ + +Toronto, Ontario--J. Enoch Thompson, Consul-General; Col. Geo. A. Shaw, + Vice-Consul. + +St. John's, N. B.--Allan O. Crookshank, Consul. + +Rimouski--J. N. Pouliot, Vice-Consul. + +Montreal--Dickson Anderson, Consul. + +Yarmouth, N. S.--Ed. F. Clements, Vice-Consul. + +Victoria, B. C.--R. P. Rithet, Consul-General for British Columbia. + +Vancouver, B. C.--J. W. McFarland, Vice-Consul. + +Sydney, N. S. W.--W. E. Dixon, Consul-General. + +Melbourne, Victoria--G. N. Oakley, Consul. + +Brisbane, Queensland--Alex. B. Webster, Consul. + +Hobart, Tasmania--Hon. Audley Coote, Consul. + +Launceston, Tasmania--Geo. Collins, Vice-Consul. + +Newcastle, N. S. W.--W. J. Gillam, Consul. + +Auckland, N. Z.--James Macfarlane, Consul. + +Dunedin, N. Z.--W. G. Neill, Consul. + +Gibraltar--H. Schott, Consul. + + +_France and Colonies._ + +Paris--Alfred Houle, Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General; + A. N. H. Teyssier, Consul. + +Marseilles--........, Consul. + +Bordeaux--Ernest de Boissac, Consul. + +Dijon--H. F. J. Vieilhomme, Consul. + +Liborne--C. Schaessler, Vice-Consul. + +Cette--Julius Chavasse, Vice-Consul. + +Grenoble--J. L. Garcin, Vice-Consul. + +Papeete, Tahiti--E. A. Bonet, Consul. + + +_Spain._ + +Barcelona--Enrique Minguez, Consul-General. + +Cadiz--J. Shaw, Consul. + +Valencia--Julio Soler, Consul. + +Malaga--F. T. de Navarra, Consul. + +Cartagena--J. Paris, Consul. + + +_Portugal and Colonies._ + +Lisbon--A. F. de Serpa, Consul-General. + +Oporto--Narciso T. M. Ferro, Consul. + +Madeira Island--L. D. F. Branco, Consul. + +Cape Vincent, Cape de Verde Islands--Clarimundo Martins, Vice-Consul. + +Lagos, Cape de Verde Islands--Manuel Jose Barbosa, Vice-Consul. + + +_Azores Islands._ + +Ponta Delgardo (St. Michaels)--Senhor Bernardo Machado de Faria Maia, + Consul-General; A. da Silva Moreira, Consul. + + +_Italy._ + +Rome--Dwight Benton, Consul-General; Hale P. Benton, Vice and Deputy + Consul-General. + +Palermo, Sicily--A. Tagliavia, Consul. + +Genoa--Raphael de Luchi, Consul. + + +_Holland._ + +Amsterdam--D. H. Schmull, Consul-General. + +Dordrecht--P. J. Bouwman, Consul. + + +_Japan._ + +Tokio--R. W. Irwin, Minister Resident. + +Kobe--C. P. Hall, Vice-Consul. + +Yokohama--B. C. Howard, Consul; Dr. Stuart Eldridge, M. D., + Sanitary Inspector. + + +_China._ + +Hong Kong--J. J. Bell Irving, Acting Consul-General; Dr. Gregory P. + Jordan, M. D., Sanitary Inspector. + +Amoy--Robert H. Bruce, Consul; Dr. Hugh MacDougald, M. D., + Sanitary Inspector. + + +_Belgium._ + +Antwerp--Victor Forge, Consul-General. + +Ghent--E. Coppieters, Consul. + +Liege--J. Blanpain, Consul. + +Bruges--E. Van Den Brande, Consul. + + +_Sweden and Norway._ + +Stockholm, Sweden--C. A. Engvalls, Consul-General. + +Christiana, Norway--L. Samson, Consul. + +Gothemburg, Sweden--Gustaf Kraak, Vice-Consul. + + +_Austria._ + +Vienna--Hugo Schonberger, Consul. + + +_Germany and Colonies._ + +Bremen--H. F. Glade, Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General; + J. F. Muller, Consul. + +Hamburg--E. F. Weber, Consul. + +Frankfort-on-Main--J. Kopp, Consul. + +Dresden--A. P. Russ, Consul. + + +_Canary Islands._ + +Las Palamas--L. Falcon y Quevedo, Consul; J. B. De Laguna, Vice-Consul. + +Santa Cruz de la Palma--Antonio C. de las Casas, Vice-Consul. + +Areciefe de Lanzarote--E. Murales, Vice-Consul. + + +_Mexico._ + +Mexico--Col. W. J. De Gress, Consul-General; R. H. Baker, Vice-Consul. + +Manzanillo--Robert James Barney, Consul. + +Ensenada--James Moorkens, Vice-Consul. + + +_Central and South America._ + +Valparaiso, South America--David Thomas, Charge d'Affaires and + Consul-General. + +Lima, South America--F. L. Crosby, Consul. + +Montevideo, South America--Conrad Hughes, Consul. + + +_Philippine Islands._ + +Iloilo--Geo. Shelmerdine, Consul. + +Manila--Jasper M. Wood, Consul. + +Cebu--Geo. A. Cadell, Consul. + + + + +Transcriber's Note + +With the exception of OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA, the illustrations and +cover image come from a slightly different printing of the pamphlet than +the text. + +Minor typographical errors and irregularities have been corrected. + +The table of contents and list of illustrations have been added for the +reader's convenience. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 29383-8.txt or 29383-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/9/3/8/29383/ + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/29383-8.zip b/29383-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f24dbdc --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-8.zip diff --git a/29383-h.zip b/29383-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f2bc82 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h.zip diff --git a/29383-h/29383-h.htm b/29383-h/29383-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f566972 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/29383-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5737 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title> +The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Hawaiian Islands, +by The Department of Foreign Affairs. +</title> + +<style type="text/css"> + +/* Body Attributes */ +body { + margin-left: 15%; + margin-right: 15%; +} + +/* Paragraphs */ +p { + text-indent: 1em; + text-align: justify; + margin-top: 0.25ex; + margin-bottom: 0.5ex; + line-height: 3ex; +} + +p.list { + text-indent: 1em; + text-align: justify; + margin-top: 0.25ex; + margin-bottom: 0.25ex; + line-height: 2.5ex; +} + +p.hangindent { + text-align: left; + text-indent: -1em; + margin-left: 1em; /* Must cancel text-indent */ + margin-top: 0.25ex; + margin-bottom: 0.25ex; + line-height: 2.5ex; +} + +/* Headers */ +h2, h3 { + text-align: center; + padding-top: 4ex; + padding-bottom: 2ex; + margin: 0em; +} + +h4, h5 { + text-align: center; + padding-top: 3ex; + padding-bottom: 1.5ex; + margin: 0em; +} + +/* Special headers for top-level title */ +.title h1 { + text-align: center; + padding-top: 4ex; + padding-bottom: 1ex; + margin: 0em; +} + +.title h2 { + text-align: center; + padding-top: 0ex; + padding-bottom: 4ex; + margin: 0em; +} + + +/* Lists */ +ul { + list-style-type: none; + line-height: 3ex; +} + +li { + line-height: 2.5ex; +} + +/* Horizontal Lines */ +hr.mini { + width: 4em; + margin-top: 2ex; + margin-right: auto; + margin-bottom: 1ex; + margin-left: auto; + clear: both; + color: silver; +} + +/* Column Addition of Numbers */ +hr.shortequals { + float: right; + margin-right: 0em; + width: 2em; +} + +hr.midequals { + float: right; + margin-right: 0em; + width: 3.5em; +} + +hr.longequals { + float: right; + margin-right: 0em; + width: 4em; +} + +/* Links */ +a { + text-decoration: none; +} + +/* Vertical Spacing */ + .smallskip { + padding: 0.5ex; + } + + .bigskip { + padding: 1.5ex; + } + + .hugeskip { + padding: 3ex; + } + +/* Page Numbers */ + .nopagenum { + display: none; + } + + .pagenum { + position: absolute; + left: 5%; + font-size: 90%; + font-weight: bold; + font-style: normal; + text-indent: 0em; + text-align: center; + width: 1.5em; + color: silver; + border-bottom: solid silver 1px; + border-right: solid silver 1px; + margin: 1ex; + line-height: 3ex; + } + +/* Font Attributes */ + .smcap { + font-variant: small-caps; + } + +/* Layout Attributes */ + .left { + text-align: left; + } + + .center { + text-align: center; + } + + .right { + text-align: right; + } + +/* Tables */ +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +td.left { + text-align: left; +} + +td.right { + text-align: right; + padding-right: 0.5em; +} + +td.indent { + text-align: left; + padding-left: 2em; +} + +td.hangindent { + text-align: left; + text-indent: -1em; + line-height: 2.5ex; /* Slightly smaller than default */ + padding-left: 1em; +} + +td.center { + text-align: center; +} + +td.padright { + vertical-align: bottom; + text-align: right; + padding-right: 1em; + max-width: 5em; + line-height: 2.5ex; +} + +/* Table of Contents */ +table.toc { + width: 80%; + margin: auto; + padding: 5ex 0em; +} + +td.tocl { + text-align: left; + font-size: 115%; + padding-left: 0.5em; + padding-bottom: 0.5ex; + padding-top: 0.5ex; + border-bottom: silver dotted 1px; +} + +td.tocr { + text-align: right; + width: 3em; + font-size: 115%; + padding-right: 0.5em; + padding-bottom: 0.5ex; + padding-top: 0.5ex; + border-bottom: silver dotted 1px; +} + +/* List of Illos */ +td.listimg { + text-align: left; + text-indent: -1em; /* Copy hangindent code */ + line-height: 2.5ex; /* Slightly smaller than default */ + padding-left: 1em; + font-size: 115%; + padding-bottom: 0.5ex; + padding-top: 0.5ex; +} + +/* Images */ +img { + border: solid 1px silver; + padding: 1px; + margin: 2ex; +} + + .caption { + font-weight: bold; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: center; + } + + .illo { + margin: auto; + margin-bottom: 4ex; + text-align: center; + } + +/* Borders */ + .bbox { + border: solid 1px silver; + margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + padding: 4ex 1em; + } + +/* Transcriber's Notes */ + .tnote { border: dashed 1px; + padding: 1em; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-right: 0%; + margin-bottom: 3em; + margin-left: 0%; + page-break-after: always; + } + + .tnote p { + text-indent: 0em; + margin-left: 2em; + margin-top: .5em; + font-size: 90%; + } + + .tnote h3 { + text-indent: 0em; + margin-left: 0em; + text-align: left; + font-size: 100%; + font-style: normal; + font-weight: bold; + } + +</style> +</head> + +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Hawaiian Islands + +Author: The Department of Foreign Affairs + +Release Date: July 12, 2009 [EBook #29383] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div style="margin:auto; max-width: 40em;"> + +<div class="title"> +<h1>THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS</h1> + +<h2>THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, +COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL.</h2> +</div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="COVER" id="COVER"></a> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="362" height="614" alt="cover" /> +</div> + + +<div class="illo"> +<a href="images/map.jpg" name="MAP" id="MAP"> +<img src="images/map_sm.jpg" width="500" height="315" alt="" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><br /> +MAP of the HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. +</span></div> + + +<!-- TABLE of CONTENTS. --> +<div class="center" style="font-size: 80%"> + +<table class="toc" summary="table of contents"> + +<tr> +<th colspan="2" class="center" style="font-size: 150%; padding-bottom: 2ex"> +<b>CONTENTS</b></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>CHAPTER I.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>3</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>CHAPTER II.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>12</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>CHAPTER III.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>16</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>CHAPTER IV.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>20</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>CHAPTER V.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>37</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>CHAPTER VI.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>43</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>CHAPTER VII.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>52</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>CHAPTER VIII.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>58</b></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="tocl"><a href="#OFFICIAL_DIRECTORY"><b>OFFICIAL DIRECTORY.</b></a></td> + <td class="tocr"><b>85</b></td> +</tr> + +</table> + +</div> +<!-- End TABLE of CONTENTS. --> + + +<!-- LIST of ILLUSTRATIONS. --> +<div class="center" style="font-size: 70%"> + +<table class="toc" summary="list of illustrations"> + +<tr> +<th class="center" style="font-size: 150%; padding-bottom: 2ex"> +<b>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</b></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#MAP"><b>MAP OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.</b></a> + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#DOLE"><b>SANFORD B. DOLE, President of the Republic of Hawaii.</b></a> + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#EXECUTIVE"><b>EXECUTIVE BUILDING</b></a>. / + <a href="#JUDICIARY"><b>JUDICIARY BUILDING</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#EWA"><b>EWA MILL</b></a>. / + <a href="#VALLEY"><b>VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#PAUOA"><b>PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS</b></a>. / + <a href="#PINEAPPLE"><b>PINEAPPLE PLANTATION</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#HAMAKUA"><b>COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA</b></a>. / + <a href="#PUNA"><b>COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#STEAMSHIP"><b>OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA</b></a>. / + <a href="#HOUSE"><b>VOLCANO HOUSE</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#RAILROAD"><b>KOHALA RAILROAD</b></a>. / + <a href="#RICE"><b>RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#NUUANU"><b>NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU</b></a>. / + <a href="#WAIKIKI"><b>WAIKIKI BEACH</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#HOME"><b>LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS</b></a>. / + <a href="#SCHOOL"><b>KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#COLLEGE"><b>OAHU COLLEGE</b></a>. / + <a href="#PAUAHI"><b>PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#MASONIC"><b>MASONIC TEMPLE</b></a>. / + <a href="#MUSEUM"><b>KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="listimg"> + <a href="#KAWAIAHAO"><b>KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian)</b></a>. / + <a href="#CHURCH"><b>CENTRAL UNION CHURCH</b></a>. + </td> +</tr> + +</table> + +</div> +<!-- End LIST of ILLUSTRATIONS. --> + + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="DOLE" id="DOLE"></a> +<img src="images/dole.jpg" width="336" height="450" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +SANFORD B. DOLE. President of the Republic of Hawaii. +</span></div> + +<div class="hugeskip"></div> + +<!-- TITLE PAGE --> +<div class="center bbox" style="margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;"> + +<h1 style="font-size: xx-large"> +THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS +</h1> + + +<span style="font-size: small;"> +THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, +COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL. +</span> + +<div class="bigskip"></div> +<hr class="mini" /> +<div class="bigskip"></div> + + +<span style="font-size: xx-large; font-weight: bold;"> +Coffee, +</span><br /><br /> +<span style="font-size: medium"> +<i>THE COMING STAPLE PRODUCT.</i> +</span> + +<div class="bigskip"></div> +<hr class="mini" /> +<div class="bigskip"></div> + + +<span style="font-size: x-small"> +<b>ISSUED UNDER THE AUSPICES</b><br /><br /> +OF THE<br /><br /> +</span> + +<b>DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS,</b> +<br /><br /> +<span style="font-size: smaller"> +1896. +</span> + +<div class="bigskip"></div> +<hr class="mini" /> +<div class="bigskip"></div> + + +<p class="center smcap" style="font-size: x-small;"> +HONOLULU:<br /> +Printed by the Hawaiian Gazette Company. +</p> +</div> +<!-- END OF TITLE PAGE --> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 2 --> +<span class="nopagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">2</a></span> +</div> + +<div class="hugeskip"></div> + +<p>The following pamphlet has been compiled for the purpose of giving +information to those intending to invest in the industries of the +Hawaiian Islands. The information can be vouched for as correct. The +portion dealing with agriculture is from the pen of Joseph Marsden, +Esq., Commissioner of Agriculture. The digest of the land law has been +prepared by J. F. Brown, Esq., Commissioner of Public Lands. The +historical portion has been written by Prof. Alexander, Chief of the +Government Survey and author of a "Short History of the Hawaiian +People" and other works. The pamphlet has been planned, edited and in +part written by Alatau T. Atkinson, Esq., ex-Inspector General of +Schools, and now General Superintendent of Census.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 3 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">3</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>GENERAL INFORMATION.</h3> + +<p>The Hawaiian Islands are situated in the North Pacific Ocean and +lie between longitudes 154° 40' and 160° 30' West, and +latitudes 22° 16' and 18° 55' North. They are thus on the +very edge of the tropics, but their position in mid-ocean and the +prevalence of the northeast trade wind gives them a climate unequalled +by any other portion of the globe—a perpetual summer without an +enervating heat. In the Hawaiian Islands Americans and Europeans can +and do work in the open air, at all seasons of the year, as they +cannot in countries lying in the same latitudes elsewhere. To note an +instance, Calcutta lies a little to the north of the latitude of +Kauai, our most northerly Island, and in Calcutta the American and +European can only work with his brain; hard physical labor he cannot +do and live. On the Hawaiian Islands he can work and thrive.</p> + + +<h3>RAINFALL AND TEMPERATURE.</h3> + +<p>The rainfall varies, being greater on the windward side of the +Islands, and increasing up to a certain elevation. Thus, at Olaa, on +the Island of Hawaii, windward side and elevation of about 2,000 feet, +the rainfall from July 1st, 1894, to June 30, 1895, was 176.82 inches, +while at Kailua, on the leeward side, at a low level, it was only +51.21 inches during the same period.</p> + +<p>The temperature also varies according to elevation and position. +<!-- Page 4 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">4</a></span> +On the Island of Hawaii you can get any climate from the heat of +summer to actual winter at the summits of the two great mountains. A +meteorological record, kept carefully for a period of twelve years, +gives 89° as the highest and 54° as the lowest temperature recorded, +or a mean temperature of 71° 30' for the year. A case of +sunstroke has never been known. People make no special precautions +against the sun, wearing straw and soft felt hats similar to those +worn in the States during the summer months.</p> + + +<h3>WINDS.</h3> + +<p>The prevailing winds, as mentioned above, are the northeast trades. +These blow for about nine months of the year. The remainder of the +period the winds are variable and chiefly from the south. The Islands +are outside the cyclone belt, and severe storms accompanied by thunder +and lightning are of rare occurrence.</p> + + +<h3>HEALTH.</h3> + +<p>The Islands possess a healthy climate. There are no virulent fevers +such as are encountered on the coast of Africa or in the West India +Islands. Epidemics seldom visit the Islands, and when they do they +are generally light. A careful system of quarantine guards the Islands +now from epidemics from abroad. Such grave diseases as pneumonia and +diphtheria are almost unknown. Children thrive wonderfully.</p> + + +<h3>AREA.</h3> + +<p>For practical purposes—and these lines are written for +practical men—there are eight Islands in the Hawaiian group. The +others are mere rocks, of no value to mankind at present. These eight +Islands, beginning from the northwest, are named Niihau, Kauai, Oahu, +Molokai, Lanai, Kahoolawe, Maui and Hawaii. The areas of these Islands +are as follows:</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 5 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">5</a></span> +</div> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="names and areas of hawaiian islands"> +<tr> <td></td> <td style="padding-left: 1em"><b>Square Miles.</b></td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Niihau</td> <td class="padright"> 97</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Kauai</td> <td class="padright"> 590</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Oahu</td> <td class="padright"> 600</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Molokai</td> <td class="padright"> 270</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Maui</td> <td class="padright"> 760</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Lanai</td> <td class="padright"> 150</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Kahoolawe</td> <td class="padright"> 63</td> </tr> +<tr> <td class="left">Hawaii</td> <td class="padright">4210</td> </tr> +<tr> <td></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="shortequals" /> </td> </tr> +<tr> <td style="text-indent: 0.5em">Total</td> + <td class="padright">6740</td> </tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p>The Islands that interest an intending immigrant are Hawaii, Maui, +Oahu and Kauai. It is on these Islands that coffee, fruits, potatoes, +corn and vegetables can be raised by the small investor, and where +land can be obtained on reasonable terms.</p> + + +<h3>HAWAII.</h3> + +<p>The Island of Hawaii is the largest in the group, and presents +great varieties of soil and climate. The windward side, which includes +the districts of North Kohala, Hamakua, Hilo and Puna, is copiously +watered by rains and, in the Hilo district, the streams rush +impetuously down every gulch or ravine. The leeward side of the +Island, including South Kohala, North and South Kona, and Kau, is not +exposed to such strong rains, but an ample supply of water falls in +the rain belt. The Kona district has given the coffee product a name +in the markets of the world.</p> + +<p>On this Island are now situated numerous sugar plantations. Coffee +employs the industry of several hundred owners, ranging from the man +with 200,000 trees to him who has only an acre or so. There are +thousands upon thousands of acres at present uncultivated and only +awaiting the sturdy arms and enterprising brains of the men of the +temperate zone to develop them.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 6 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">6</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>MAUI.</h3> + +<p>Maui is also a very fine Island. Besides its sugar plantations, it +has numerous coffee lands, especially in the eastern part, which are +just now being opened up. The western slopes of Haleakala, the main +mountain of Maui, are covered with small farms where are raised +potatoes, corn, beans and pigs. Again, here, thousands of acres are +lying fallow.</p> + + +<h3>HONOLULU.</h3> + +<p>On Oahu is the capital, Honolulu. It is a city numbering thirty +thousand inhabitants and is pleasantly situated on the south side of +the Island. The city extends a considerable distance up Nuuanu Valley +and has wings extending northwest and southeast. It is a city of +foliage. Except in the business blocks, every house stands in its own +garden, and some of the houses are wonderfully beautiful.</p> + +<p>The city is lighted with electric light; there is a very complete +telephone system, and tram cars run at short intervals along the +principal streets and continue out to a sea-bathing resort and public +park, four miles from the city. There are numerous stores where all +kinds of goods can be obtained. In this particular Honolulu occupies a +position ahead of any city of similar size. The public buildings are +handsome and commodious. There are numerous churches, schools, a +public library of over 10,000 volumes, +Y. M. C. A. Hall, Masonic Temple, Odd Fellows' Hall and +Theater. There is frequent steam communication with San Francisco, +once a month with Victoria (British Columbia), and twice a month with +New Zealand and the Australian Colonies. Steamers also connect +Honolulu with China and Japan. There are three evening daily papers +published in English, one daily morning paper, and two weeklies. +Besides these there are papers published in the Hawaiian, Portuguese, +Japanese and Chinese languages, and also monthly magazines in various +tongues.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 7 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">7</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>OAHU'S OPPORTUNITIES.</h3> + +<p>The Island of Oahu presents excellent opportunities for the +investor. Acres upon acres of land remain undeveloped among its +teeming valleys, the energies and wealth of the population having been +devoted to the development of the sugar lands on the larger +Islands.</p> + +<p>A line of railroad has been constructed which at present runs along +the coast to a distance of thirty miles from the city. It is proposed +to continue this line completely around the Island. This railroad +opens up rich coffee and farming lands and affords ready means of +transport for the produce, and an expeditious method for obtaining the +necessary supplies, etc., from the capital. The management of the +railroad offers special inducements for would-be investors to see the +country, and special rates should they conclude to settle.</p> + + +<h3>KAUAI.</h3> + +<p>Kauai is called the "Garden Island," it is so well watered and so +luxuriant in vegetation. The Island is at present largely devoted to +the cultivation of sugar. Rice also cuts a considerable figure in the +agricultural production of Kauai. That it can produce coffee is +undoubted, but there is a timidity about embarking in the industry, +because some forty years ago the experiment of a coffee plantation was +tried, and owing to misjudgment of location and soil, failed. Since +then the cultivation of coffee has come to be more thoroughly +understood, and there is no doubt that quantities of land suitable for +such cultivation are now lying, like the sleeping beauty, waiting for +the kiss of enterprise to make them awake into usefulness and profit +for mankind.</p> + +<p>There is room on the Hawaiian Islands for at least ten times the +present population. The climate, soil and social conditions all tend +to make them a desirable home for those who are willing to work, and +have a moderate capital to begin with.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 8 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">8</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>GOVERNMENT.</h3> + +<p>The Government of the Hawaiian Islands is a Republic. Up to the +year 1893 it had been a limited monarchy, but at that date it was +felt, by the progressive party in the state, that monarchy had had its +day, and that the friends of such a form of government should give way +to more liberal institutions, assimilating to the institutions of the +United States, and to become a part of which Great Republic is the +earnest desire of all those who have the interests of the Islands at +heart. The monarchy, in a bloodless revolution, disappeared and the +Republic took its place.</p> + +<p>The Republic is a republic of progress, and under the Government +thus established every facility has been given for developing and +improving the country. The President is elected for six years. The +Legislature consists of a Senate and House of Representatives, all +members being elected by popular vote. The Senators are elected for a +term of six years, and voters for Senators must have real property +worth $1,500, or personal property worth $3,000, or an income of not +less than $600 per annum. The vote for Representatives is based on +manhood suffrage.</p> + + +<h3>TAXATION.</h3> + +<p>All males between the ages of 20 and 60 pay a personal tax +of $5, viz: Poll tax, $1; road tax, $2; school +tax, $2. Land pays a tax of one per cent. on the cash value, and +personal property a similar rate. Carts pay $2, brakes $3, +carriages $5, dogs $1, female dogs $3. From the above +it will be seen that the taxes are not heavy as compared with other +countries; moreover, there are no local taxes of any kind.</p> + + +<h3>METHOD OF ACQUIRING LAND.</h3> + +<p>Land can be obtained from the Government by two methods, viz.; The +cash freehold system, and the right of purchase leases. +<!-- Page 9 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">9</a></span> +Under the first system the land is sold at auction. The purchaser pays +one-quarter in cash and the rest in equal installments of one, two and +three years, interest being charged at the rate of six per cent. upon +the unpaid balance. Under this system the purchaser is bound to +maintain a home on the land from the commencement of the second year +to the end of the third. The right of purchase leases are drawn for +twenty-one years at a rental of eight per cent. on the appraised value +of the land. The lessee has the privilege of purchasing the land, +after the third year, <i>at the original appraised value</i>, provided +25 per cent. of the land is reduced to cultivation, and other +conditions of the lease filled. In this case a home must be maintained +from the end of the first year to the end of the fifth year. The limit +of first-class agricultural land obtainable is 100 acres. This amount +is increased on lands of inferior quality. Under the above conditions +the applicant must be 18 years of age and obtain special letters of +denization. Land can also be obtained from the various land and +investment companies, and from private parties. The full land law will +be treated of in <a href="#CHAPTER_VI">Chapter VI</a>. of this +pamphlet.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="EXECUTIVE" id="EXECUTIVE"></a> +<img src="images/executive.jpg" width="500" height="369" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +EXECUTIVE BUILDING. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="JUDICIARY" id="JUDICIARY"></a> +<img src="images/judiciary.jpg" width="500" height="356" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +JUDICIARY BUILDING. +</span></div> + + +<h3>JUDICIARY, POLICE, ETC.</h3> + +<p>There is a thoroughly efficient judiciary consisting of a Supreme +Court, five Circuit Courts in which trials by jury are conducted, and +District Courts in every district. The higher courts are presided over +by well trained, educated men. There is an efficient police force in +every part of the group. The inhabitants are law-abiding and crimes of +violence are very rare. There is very little petty theft, and even in +Honolulu, the greatest center of population and a seaport town, many +of the houses are left with doors unlocked at night.</p> + + +<h3>SCHOOLS.</h3> + +<p>There is an excellent system of free public schools taught in the +English language, the teachers in many cases being imported +<!-- Page 10 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">10</a></span> +from the United States. The main plan of the system is modelled upon +the public school system of the United States, modified to meet the +wants of a heterogeneous population. The children are instructed in +writing, reading, composition, arithmetic, geography, both local and +general. The books are uniform and obtainable at the same price as in +the United States. The schools are strictly non-sectarian. There is no +district, however remote, in which there is no school. The only people +who cannot read and write are those who come from abroad. Those born +in the Islands are compelled by law to take advantage of the education +offered. Besides the common school education, opportunities are given +at various centers for a higher education equivalent to the grammar +grade of the United States, and in Honolulu a high school and +collegiate course can be obtained at a small cost.</p> + + +<h3>CHURCHES.</h3> + +<p>The various Christian denominations are represented and all forms +are tolerated. The country churches of the Protestant denominations +are chiefly conducted by Hawaiian pastors, the Roman Catholic by +French and German priests, who are mostly good linguists and speak +Hawaiian, English and Portuguese, besides their mother +tongue. Wherever there is a large collection of English speaking +people a Protestant church is usually supported by them. In Honolulu +there is a large number of churches, Congregational, Roman Catholic, +Episcopalian, Methodist and Mormon. There is a Sunday law, and all +work which is not absolutely necessary is prohibited on that +day. Rational outdoor amusement is not prohibited, such as riding, +boating, shooting, etc., and the Government Band plays at the public +park at Waikiki every Sunday afternoon.</p> + + +<h3>PHYSICIANS.</h3> + +<p>In every district of the Islands the Government supports a doctor, +who gives his services to indigent Hawaiians free of +<!-- Page 11 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">11</a></span> +charge—others have to pay. In many places there are physicians +settled who carry on a private practice.</p> + + +<h3>TELEPHONES.</h3> + +<p>The Islands of Oahu, Kauai and Hawaii have telephones to every +accessible point. The rent of the instrument is moderate, and a small +charge is made for those who do not care or cannot afford to possess +an instrument of their own. On Maui the telephone is at present +established only in part.</p> + + +<h3>COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ISLANDS.</h3> + +<p>Communication between the Islands is by steamer; of these some +seventeen are constantly plying from port to port, affording weekly +communication with the capital. The regular passenger steamers are +well fitted with cabins, have electric bells and electric lights and +all modern accommodations.</p> + + +<h3>POSTAL MATTERS.</h3> + +<p>There is a regular postal system, and on the arrival of a steamer +at any main point, mail carriers at once start out to distribute the +mail through the district. The Hawaiian Islands belong to the Postal +Union, and money orders can be obtained to the United States, Canada, +Great Britain, Germany, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, the Netherlands, +Portugal, Hong Kong and Colony of Victoria, as well as local orders +between the Islands.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 12 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">12</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>AGRICULTURAL INDUSTRIES.</h3> + +<p>The mainstay of the Hawaiian Islands has, for the last thirty-five +years, been the sugar industry. From this source a large amount of +wealth has been accumulated. But the sugar industry requires large +capital for expensive machinery, and has never proved remunerative to +small investors. An attempt has been made at profit-sharing and has +met with some success, the small farmer cultivating and the capitalist +grinding at a central mill. Of late years, moreover, the small farmer +has been steadily developing in the Hawaiian Islands and attention has +been given to other products than sugar.</p> + +<p>Rice, neither the European nor the American can cultivate as +laborers. It requires working in marshy land, and though on the +Islands it yields two crops a year, none but the Chinaman can raise it +successfully. A dry-land or mountain rice has been introduced, which +will be treated under the head of Agricultural possibilities.</p> + +<p>The main staple after sugar and rice is coffee. Of this hundreds of +thousands of trees have been planted out within the last five years. +This is essentially the crop of the future and bids fair to become as +important a staple as sugar. Coffee does not require the amount of +capital that sugar does, and it can be worked remuneratively upon a +small area. It is estimated that at the end of the fourth year the +return from a 75-acre coffee plantation will much more than pay the +running expenses, while +<!-- Page 13 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">13</a></span> +from that time on a return of from eight to ten thousand dollars per +annum may be realized.</p> + +<p>On <a href="#Page_32">page 32</a> will be found an estimate of the +cost of establishing a 75-acre coffee plantation from the first to the +seventh year.</p> + +<p>Fruits can also be cultivated to advantage. At present the banana +trade of the Islands amounts to over 100,000 bunches per annum, valued +at over $100,000, and the quantity might be very easily quadrupled. +The banana industry may be regarded as in its infancy. The export of +the fruit is only from the Island of Oahu, but there are thousands of +acres on the other Islands of the group which could be profitably used +for this cultivation and for nothing else. The whole question of the +banana industry hinges on the market. At present the market is +limited.</p> + +<p>Limes and oranges can be cultivated and the fruit can be easily +packed for export; at present the production does not meet the local +market. The fruits can be raised to perfection. The Hawaiian orange +has a fine flavor and the Hawaiian lime has an aroma and flavor far +superior to that cultivated in Mexico and Central America. In the +uplands of Hawaii and Maui potatoes can be and are raised. Their +quality is good. Corn is also raised. In these industries many +Portuguese, Norwegians and others have embarked. Both these products +find an ample local market. The corn is used largely for feed on the +plantations. The corn is ground with the cob and makes an excellent +feed for working cattle, horses and mules.</p> + +<p>In the uplands, where the climate is temperate, as at Waimea, +Hawaii, vegetables of all kinds can be raised; excellent cauliflowers, +cabbages and every product of the temperate zone can be grown to +perfection.</p> + +<p>Cattle raising in so small a place as the Hawaiian Islands does not +present great opportunities except for local consumption. Pigs are +profitable to the small farmer. In the Kula district of Maui pigs are +fattened upon the corn and potatoes raised in the district. The price +of pork, dressed, is 25 cents per pound in Honolulu and about 15 cents +per pound in the +<!-- Page 14 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">14</a></span> +outside districts. The Chinese, of whom there are some 15,000 resident +on the various Islands, are extremely fond of pork, so that there is a +large local market, which has to be supplemented by importations from +California.</p> + +<p>Attention has lately been given to fiber plants, for which there +are many suitable locations. Ramie grows luxuriantly, but the lack of +proper decorticating and cleaning machinery has prevented any advance +in this cultivation.</p> + +<p>Sisal hemp and Sansevieria<!--Typo: sanseveira--> have been +experimented with, but without any distinct influence upon the trade +output.</p> + +<p>The cultivation of pineapples is a very growing industry. In 1895 +pines were exported from the Islands to San Francisco to the value of +nearly $9,000. This has grown up in the last half dozen years. There +is every reason to think that canning pineapples for the Coast and +other markets can be made profitable.</p> + +<p>The guava, which grows wild, can also be put up to profit, for the +manufacture of guava jelly. It has never been entered upon on a large +scale, but to the thrifty farmer it would add a convenient slice to +his income, just as the juice of the maple adds an increase to the +farmer of the Eastern States. Well made guava jelly will find a market +anywhere. In England it is regarded as a great delicacy, being +imported from the West India Islands. Besides the guava there are +other fruits which can be put up to commercial profit, notably the +poha or Cape gooseberry (Physalis Edulis). This has been successfully +made into jams and jelly, which command an extensive local sale and +should find their way into larger markets.</p> + +<p>In point of fact, outside the great industries of sugar, coffee and +rice, there is a good field for many minor industries which can be +carried on with profit by those who know what work is, and are willing +to put their shoulders to the wheel.</p> + +<p>In the Hawaiian Islands a simple life can be lived, and entering +gradually upon the coffee industry, a good competence can be obtained +long before such could be realized by the agriculturalist +<!-- Page 15 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">15</a></span> +elsewhere. However, it is useless to come to the Islands without the +necessary capital to develop the land that can be obtained.</p> + +<p>Between arriving and the time that the crops begin to give returns +there is a period where the living must be close, and cash must be +paid out for the necessary improvements. The land is here, the climate +is here; it only requires brains, a small capital and energy to +realize such comfort and independence as can not be realized in old +countries, in one-fourth of the time.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 16 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">16</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>COFFEE.</h3> + + +<p>The most promising of all the Island products, outside of sugar, is +coffee. No finer coffee in the world is produced than that of the +Hawaiian Islands. It requires care and does not produce a crop until +the third year, but it remains till the fifth year to make a proper +realization upon the investment. It is evidently necessary to give a +very full description of the coffee plant and its method of culture to +assure intending immigrants of what is before them.</p> + +<p>Coffee is a shrub belonging to the family of the +Rubiaceae.<!--Typo: Rubiaciae--> Botanists divide it into many +species, but it can be practically divided into two sections, Arabian +coffee and Liberian coffee, or in point of fact, Asiatic and +African. In the Hawaiian Islands coffee grows best between 500 and +2,000 feet above the sea level, though there are cases in which it has +done well close to the sea. It requires a loose porous soil and does +not thrive well in heavy clayey ground which holds much water. Of such +heavy land there is very little in the Hawaiian Islands. The soil is +generally very porous.</p> + +<p>It is very evident that coffee will thrive and give good results in +varying conditions of soil and degrees of heat. In these Islands it +grows and produces from very nearly at the sea level to the elevation +of 2,600 feet. The highest elevation of bearing coffee, known here, is +twenty-five miles from the town of Hilo and in the celebrated Olaa +district.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="EWA" id="EWA"></a> +<img src="images/ewa.jpg" width="500" height="356" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +EWA MILL. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="VALLEY" id="VALLEY"></a> +<img src="images/valley.jpg" width="500" height="356" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII. +</span></div> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 17 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">17</a></span> +</div> + +<p>With such a range it is evident that, in a tropical climate, the +cultivation of coffee presents greater opportunities for an investor +than other tropical products.</p> + +<p>For years it was thought that coffee would only grow to advantage +in the Kona district of Hawaii. Practical experiment has shown that it +can be grown with success in almost any part of the Islands.</p> + +<p>The opening up of the Olaa portion of the Puna district, by a well +macadamized road leading from Hilo to the Volcano, may be regarded as +the commencement of the coffee industry on a large scale on the +Hawaiian Islands. There are now over fifty plantations where six years +ago there was nothing but tangled and dense forest. The Olaa land is +Government property and can be acquired under the land law. There are +still 10,000 acres not taken up. The location is very desirable as +there is direct communication with Hilo by an excellent road and the +crop can be readily taken to the shipping point. Indeed it can not be +long before a railroad will be built; when this takes place a far +larger extent of land will be available for coffee growing in this +section of the country. The soil in the Olaa district is deep and +wonderfully prolific.</p> + +<p>Other portions of Puna also present many fertile lands, and coffee +plantations in those parts are coming to the front showing excellent +results. A considerable number of investors have opened up coffee +plantations in them, all of which are doing excellently. These +plantations, to the knowledge of the writer are, many of them, carried +on out of the savings made by workers in Honolulu, who are thus +preparing for themselves a provision for their early middle age. On +the Island of Hawaii are the great coffee districts of Olaa, Puna, +Kona and Hamakua, in each of which thriving coffee plantations are +established, while tens of thousands of acres of the very finest lands +are yet undisturbed. Government lands in these districts are being +opened up for settlement as fast as circumstances will permit.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 18 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">18</a></span> +</div> + +<p>On the Island of Maui there is a large area of splendid coffee +lands. The extensive land of Keanae belonging to the Government will +be opened for settlement as soon as the preliminary work of surveying +is completed.</p> + +<p>On the Island of Molokai the industry is making progress and there +are several plantations along the leeward valleys.</p> + +<p>So also on the Island of Oahu there is much good coffee land, which +is being experimented upon, and considerable capital invested in the +undertaking.</p> + +<p>As the case now stands for the investor, land can be obtained for +coffee growing in:—</p> + +<div> +<ul> +<li><span class="smcap">Island of Hawaii</span>. + <ul> + <li>North and South Kona,</li> + <li>Hilo,</li> + <li>Puna, including Olaa,</li> + <li>Hamakua.</li> + </ul> +</li> + +<li><span class="smcap">Island of Maui</span>. + <ul> + <li>Keanae,</li> + <li>Nahiku,</li> + <li>Lahaina,</li> + <li>Kaupo.</li> + </ul> +</li> + +<li><span class="smcap">Island of Molokai</span>.</li> + +<li><span class="smcap">Island of Oahu</span>.</li> + +<li><span class="smcap">Island of Kauai</span>.</li> +</ul> +</div> + +<p>In addition to the large tracts of Government lands on Hawaii and +Maui, there are many fine tracts of first-class<!--Add hyphen--> +coffee lands owned or controlled by private parties. It is the policy +of the Government to encourage the settlement of its lands by small +farmers. Hence the amount of land, granted to one party or that one +party can take up, while amply sufficient to enable one person or +family, with honest endeavor, to acquire an independence, is not large +enough to offer inducements for the employment of large amounts of +capital.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 19 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">19</a></span> +</div> + +<p>That areas of land, for the establishment of large coffee +plantations, can be acquired is reasonably certain as large owners are +evincing a disposition to sell and lease their lands.</p> + +<p>There is no agricultural investment that offers better +opportunities for the profitable employment of capital, than a well +managed coffee estate.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 20 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">20</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>CULTIVATION OF THE COFFEE TREE IN THE +HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.</h3> + + +<p>In order to obtain the best results the coffee tree requires to be +properly planted, and during its life time needs frequent and +intelligent cultivation.</p> + +<p>The various operations incidental to the opening and carrying on of +a coffee plantation will be taken up in their proper order and +described in as plain language as possible, and as briefly as is +consistent with a clear explanation of the subject.</p> + +<p>The very first thing the planter should do after obtaining +possession of his land is to plant a nursery, so that he may have, as +soon as possible, an abundant supply of strong healthy plants. Many +planters have planted their fields with wild stumps, these are young +coffee plants that are found under wild growths of coffee trees. The +young trees are cut off about six inches above the ground, they are +then taken up and the lateral roots trimmed close to the tap root. The +thready end of the tap root is cut off and the stump is ready to +plant. In some cases the young plants are taken up, from under the +wild trees, and planted just as they are. This method can be dismissed +at once as the worst possible method of planting the coffee tree. The +very best plants are strong healthy nursery plants, that is, plants +that have been grown from the best seed in a properly prepared +nursery. The next best plants to use are nursery +<!-- Page 21 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">21</a></span> +stumps. These are nursery trees that have grown too large to safely +transplant. By cutting them down and trimming the roots they can be +safely transplanted to the field, where they will grow into good +healthy trees. Stumps soon after planting send up several shoots, +these, with the exception of the strongest one, are taken off. This +latter shoot is to grow and make the coffee trees.</p> + + +<h3>MAKING THE NURSERY.</h3> + +<p>The size of the nursery will depend on how large the plantation is +to be. For a 75-acre plantation, one acre of ground will more than +supply all the plants required. It is always desirable to have a +greater number of plants than is needed to just plant the acreage the +plantation is to be, for after the fields are planted some of the +plants may get injured from dry weather and require replacing with +plants from the nursery. Any surplus left, after the trees in the +fields are well established, can be sold to some later planter, who +will find it to his advantage to purchase good nursery plants for his +first planting and thereby save one year of time. It is advisable for +all planters to buy plants for their first planting, but for the +second year's planting they should have a nursery of their own from +which they can select the strongest and most forward plants.</p> + +<p>The land for the nursery should be selected as close as possible to +where the plantation is to be. It should be on a slight slope to +insure drainage, and free from rocks and stones. The soil should be +ploughed or dug over to the depth of one foot and made as fine as +possible. Beds should be thrown up six inches high and three feet +wide. The surface of the beds should be made quite smooth and level; +the seeds should be planted six inches apart and three quarters of an +inch deep. A good way to ensure even and regular planting is to make a +frame three feet wide each way. Pegs, three quarters of an inch long +and five eighths of an inch diameter, should be fastened +<!-- Page 22 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">22</a></span> +to one side of the frame, placing them exactly six inches apart. The +frame, thus prepared, is placed, pegs down, on the bed. A slight +pressure will sink the pegs into the soil. The frame is now lifted +and you have the holes for the seeds all of one depth and equi-distant +from each other. The seeds can now be dropped one in each hole. The +seeds should be placed flat side down, and covered by brushing over +the surface of the bed. If the weather is at all dry it is a good plan +to mulch the surface of the bed with dry grass or fern leaves. The +soil should be kept moist, and if there is not sufficient rain the +beds must be watered. In six or seven weeks the seeds should sprout +and show above ground. The mulching should now be moved from over the +plants and arranged in the rows. It has been the practice of some +planters to plant the seed much closer than six inches apart, but it +will be found that plants at six inches apart can be more easily and +safely transplanted than from close planted beds. It will be advisable +in taking up plants from the beds, to take only every other one, this +will give the remaining plants more room to develop and grow more +stocky than would be the case if all the plants were taken up from +each bed as they were required.</p> + + +<h3>CLEARING THE LAND.</h3> + +<p>The next thing for the planter to do is to get his land +cleared. This can be done more satisfactorily and cheaply by contract +than can be done by days' work. Gangs of Chinese and Japanese +undertake the clearing of land and will make a contract to clear the +land as per specification. In the Olaa District land costs from $20 to +$50 per acre to clear, according to the kind of clearing done. The +land is forest land and some planters have the trees cut down and +everything burned making the land quite clear, while others just have +the vines and ferns cut and the trees felled, leaving everything on +the land to rot. +<!-- Page 23 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">23</a></span> +This method while costing much less than burning up everything, makes +it more expensive to lay out and plant the land. The planter must +decide for himself which of the two methods he will pursue. However, +it can be said in the case of those who only cut and fell, in a few +years everything, trees, vines and ferns rot down and greatly increase +the fertility of the soil. The next thing is to lay out the land for +the digging of the holes where it is intended to set out the young +trees. There is a wide diversity of opinion as to the proper distance +apart to plant coffee trees. From 10x12 feet down to 5x6 and all +intermediate distances are practiced. It is a significant fact that +planters who formerly planted their trees at the wider distances are +now setting out trees as close as 6x5. Trees planted 6x6 will probably +yield better results per acre than trees planted at a wider or closer +distance. Having fixed upon the distance apart the trees are to be +planted, the planter proceeds to mark with pegs the places where he +wants the holes dug. This is usually done with a line or rope that has +pieces of red rag fastened in the strands, at the distance apart at +which it is intended to dig the holes. The line is drawn tightly +across one end of the clearing and a peg driven into the soil at every +place that is marked on the line. The men, holding the two ends of the +line, are each provided with a stick the exact length that the rows +are to be apart. After one row is pegged, the line is advanced one +length of the stick and the operation repeated until the whole +clearing is pegged. After the first line is pegged a line should be +laid at exactly right angles to the first line so that the rows will +be straight both ways. The pegging being completed, the holes should +be dug not less than 18 inches wide and 18 inches deep. The top soil +should be carefully placed on one side of the hole and the subsoil on +the other, the holes should remain open as long as possible and should +only be filled in a week or so before planting the trees. The bottoms +of the holes should be explored with a light crowbar +<!-- Page 24 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">24</a></span> +and, if any rocks or stones are found, they should be removed. In +filling the holes the top soil (that has been placed on one side) +should be placed in the bottom of the hole and other top soil should +be taken from between the rows until the hole is full, the subsoil can +now be disposed of by scattering it between the rows. The holes after +filling should have the marking pegs replaced in the center of the +filling, this will serve as a guide for planting the trees.</p> + + +<h3>PLANTING.</h3> + +<p>There is no operation in all the work of establishing a coffee +plantation that requires such careful supervision as that of planting +out the young trees. If the work is carelessly done and the slender +tap root is doubled up or, if it is shortened too much, the tree will +never thrive. It may grow fairly well for a time, perhaps until the +time for the first crop, then the foliage will turn yellow and the +tree show every sign of decay. The effort to produce a crop is too +much for the tree and the sooner it is pulled up and replaced by a +properly planted tree the better.</p> + +<p>The closest supervision is necessary in order that the planter may +be certain that the tap roots are placed perfectly straight in the +ground; and the lateral roots placed in a natural position. In order +to effect this, with the least amount of trouble, transplanters have +been used. A transplanter that has been used with success is made as +follows: two pieces of sheet iron (galvanized) are bent into two half +circles, which, when placed together, form a cylinder 3 inches in +diameter and seven inches long. A piece of hoop iron is bent to a +ring, that will fit over the cylinder, and riveted. The mode of using +is as follows: The two halves of the cylinder are pressed into the +ground, one on each side of the young coffee tree. They are pressed +down until the upper ends are level with the surface of the soil. The +<!-- Page 25 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">25</a></span> +hoop iron ring is then pressed over the ends of the two halves of the +cylinder, binding them firmly together. The cylinder can now be lifted +from the ground bringing with it the young tree with all its roots in +the position in which they grew. In this condition the young trees are +carried to the field and, the holes being opened, the cylinder, +holding the tree, is placed in the ground and the soil packed firmly +around it. The hoop iron ring is then removed and the two halves of +the cylinder withdrawn. The soil is again compacted around the roots +and the tree is planted. There is another transplanter, invented in +America, that would probably be better and more economical in working +than the one described above. This transplanter consists of a cylinder +of thin sheet steel. These are made in America of various sizes to +suit different kinds of trees. For a coffee tree a good size would be +7 inches long and 5 inches in diameter. The cylinder has an +opening, five-eighths of an inch wide, running the whole length of the +cylinder and exactly opposite this opening a handle is riveted. This +handle is of half inch round iron, 18 inches long with a cross bar on +top. The rod is bent outward in the form of a bow, so that in working, +the branches of the young tree may not be injured. The mode of working +the transplanter is as follows: the cylinder is placed on the ground +with the tree in the center of the cylinder. This can be done by +allowing the stem of the young tree to pass through the slot in the +cylinder. Then, by means of the cross handle, the cylinder is turned +and pressed into the soil until the upper end is level with the +surface of the ground. Then, by lifting on the stem of the tree and +the handle of the transplanter at the same time, the tree is taken +from the ground with its roots undisturbed. Should the end of the tap +root project below the end of the cylinder, the thready end should be +pinched off with the thumb nail. By placing the lower end of the +cylinder on the bottom of a box and inserting a wedge-shaped piece of +wood in the slot, the cylinder is sprung +<!-- Page 26 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">26</a></span> +open and can be withdrawn, leaving the young tree, with a cylinder of +earth around its roots, standing on the bottom of the box. This +operation can be repeated until the box is full of the young trees, +when it is carried to the field and the trees placed one at each hole. +By using a duplicate transplanter a cylinder of earth is removed from +the spot where the tree is to be placed, and the tree with its +cylinder of earth is placed in the round hole, which it exactly fits, +the earth being slightly compacted around the roots. The tree is thus +planted with the absolute certainty that the roots are in their +natural position.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="PAUOA" id="PAUOA"></a> +<img src="images/pauoa.jpg" width="500" height="354" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="PINEAPPLE" id="PINEAPPLE"></a> +<img src="images/pineapple.jpg" width="500" height="363" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +PINEAPPLE PLANTATION. +</span></div> + + +<h3>WEEDING.</h3> + +<p>The old adage, "a stitch in time saves nine," will bear its fullest +application in the care and weeding of a coffee estate. From the time +the land is first cleared, weeding should commence, and it is +astonishing how little it will cost if care is taken that no weed be +allowed to run to seed. The bulk of Hawaiian coffee lands is situated +in the forests where the land is covered with a dense undergrowth of +ferns and vines and there are no pernicious weeds to bother. But soon +after clearing, the seeds of weeds are dropped by the birds and are +carried in on the feet and clothing of the laborers and visitors. We +have no weeds that run to seed in less than thirty days, and if the +fields are gone over, once a month, and any weed that can be found +pulled up and buried, the work of weeding will be reduced to a +minimum. But if the weeds, that are bound to spring up, are allowed to +run to seed, the work of weeding will be greatly increased and will +require the labor of a large gang to keep the fields in order. If +taken in time, the labor of one man will keep from 15 to 25 acres +quite clean. During the first year after setting out the fields, all +that is required is to keep the fields clear of weeds and the +replacing, with a healthy tree from the nursery, any tree that from +any cause looks sickly and does not come along well.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 27 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">27</a></span> +</div> + +<p>It will be found that in parts of the field some trees, while +looking healthy, do not grow as fast as the average of the trees, this +is often due to the soil not being of as good a quality. Knolls and +side hills are not generally so rich as the hollows and valleys, and +the coffee trees, planted in the poorest parts of the field, should be +fertilized until they are as vigorous as the trees in the best +parts.</p> + + +<h3>HANDLING.</h3> + +<p>During the second year the young trees will have begun to make a +good growth and will require handling. In order to make clear the +description of the operations of handling and pruning, it may be well +to describe here the component parts of the coffee tree.</p> + +<p>The underground portion consists of a tap root and numerous lateral +or side roots. The parts above ground consist of:</p> + +<p class="list">1st. The stem or trunk.</p> + +<p class="list">2d. The primaries or first branches; these grow from +the trunk in pairs at intervals of from two to four inches, the two +primaries, making a pair, grow one opposite to the other, the pair +above radiating out at a different angle and so on to the top of the +tree.</p> + +<p class="list">3rd. The secondaries; these are the branches that grow +in pairs from the primaries.</p> + +<p class="list">4th. The tertiaries; these are the third branches that +grow in pairs from the secondaries in the same manner as the +secondaries grow on the primaries.</p> + +<p class="list">5th. The leaves that grow on all the branches.</p> + +<p>During the whole of the second year, the field should be gone over +at least every two months and all the secondaries that make their +appearance should be rubbed off; this can be done by a touch of the +fingers, if the secondaries are not more than two or three inches +long. If allowed to grow longer, the knife +<!-- Page 28 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">28</a></span> +must be used, or there is danger of tearing out the eye or bud, which +we depend upon for growing new secondaries at the proper time. During +the second year, the secondaries will make their appearance only on +the lower sets of primaries, the upper sets as they grow being too +young to grow secondaries. At the beginning of the third year all the +secondaries should be allowed to grow till they attain a length of six +inches; then the trees should be carefully gone over and all but five +of the secondaries on each primary cut off with a sharp pruning +knife. No pairs should be left, and only the strongest and most +vigorous should be retained. They should be disposed on alternate +sides of the primary and none left in a space of six inches from the +stem of the tree. The object of this is to allow the light to +penetrate to the center of the tree, for the coffee tree bears fruit +in greater profusion on branches that are exposed to the light than on +those that are shaded.</p> + +<p>During this third year the tree will blossom and bear the first or +maiden crop. In some cases the tree will blossom in the second year, +but it is a wise plan to rub all the blossoms off, as it only weakens +the tree to bear a crop at such an early age. It is of the utmost +importance that in the first crop, as well as in all future crops, the +tree should not be overburdened with a superabundance of growing +wood. If left to itself, the lower primaries will grow a mass of +secondaries, so much so that no blossom will set on them, and the +first crop will come only on the upper primaries, and be only a third +or fourth of the crop that would be produced if the trees were +properly handled. By handling, as described above, the tree is +relieved of all superfluous wood and only such secondaries are left as +are needed to bear the fourth year's crop, and the maiden crop will +grow on the primaries. It may be well to mention here, that coffee +only grows on wood of the second year's growth, and does not grow on +the same wood twice.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 29 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">29</a></span> +</div> + +<p>During the third year, the secondaries will come on the upper +primaries. When they are well set, they should be reduced in number +and in no case should more than five be left to grow. In some cases +four or even three will be sufficient. Whatever the number that may be +left, it must be understood that these are the branches that will bear +the crop for the fourth year. During the third year new secondaries +will grow from the places where the former secondaries grew. Sometimes +two will grow from one bud, they should all be removed, the trees +being gone over two months, but at the last handling before blossoming +time, which varies greatly with the elevation above sea level, enough +of these new secondaries should be left to make wood for the fifth +year's crop. From this time on the coffee planter should be able to +point out the wood on which the present and the next year's crop will +be borne, and it is this wood and that only, that should be allowed to +grow. All other shoots, suckers, etc., should be rubbed off each time +the tree is handled, provision being made each year for the wood for +the crop two years hence.</p> + +<p>During the third year, the trees will require topping. As to the +height at which a coffee tree should be topped, there is a great +diversity of opinion. Some planters advocate topping as low as four +and a half feet, others at six or seven feet; as a matter of fact the +coffee tree will bear fruit if topped as low as one and one half feet +or if not topped at all. The only valid reason for topping as low as +four and a half feet is for the convenience of picking the crop. Five +and a half or six feet is a good height to top a coffee tree on the +rich lands of the Hawaiian Islands. In fact the planters should not be +guided by the number of feet, but by the number of primaries he +desires the tree to carry. Eighteen to twenty pairs are a reasonable +number for a coffee tree to carry in this country, and it will be +found that by not counting those primaries that grow on the stem +within fifteen inches from the ground, eighteen or +<!-- Page 30 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">30</a></span> +twenty pairs of primaries will come on the stem within six feet from +the ground. Before topping the tree, it should be allowed to grow +somewhat higher that it is intended to top, so that the wood may be +hardened and not decay as it sometimes does if topped when the wood is +too young. Topping is performed by cutting off the top of the tree at +a point an inch above a pair of primaries. Both primaries should also +be cut off an inch from the stem. This will leave the top in the form +of a cross; a knot will form at this point from which the tree will +constantly send up shoots striving to make a new top. These should be +torn off every time the tree is handled.</p> + +<p>We have now arrived at the time when the tree is bearing the first +or maiden crop. Through careful handling the tree has been divested of +all superfluous shoots, branches, etc., and the crop is maturing on +the primaries. If the trees are situated on good rich soil, and the +trees are well grown, there should be at least thirteen pairs of +primaries bearing crop. At an average of fifty berries to each primary +there will be a yield of over one and a quarter pounds of clean coffee +to the tree. This yield for the first crop has been much exceeded in +this country, but it can only be assured by careful cultivation and +handling as described in this paper.</p> + +<p>We will now take a look at the condition of our three years old +trees. They have all been topped and are carrying from thirty-six to +forty primaries, of which all except the upper six or eight are +carrying four or five secondaries that are well advanced and which +will bear the crop for the fourth year. There will also be four or +five secondaries, that are one or two months old, which are intended +to bear the fifth year's crop. All other growth should be removed as +before up to the time of blossoming for the fourth year's crop. This +may be estimated as follows: There should be at least twenty-four +primaries that have on each of them say, four bearing secondaries. At +thirty berries to each secondary, the yield would be close to three +<!-- Page 31 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">31</a></span> +pounds of clean coffee to each tree. This again has been exceeded in +this country for four year old trees, but it must be borne in mind, +that in order to obtain these results, proper cultivation, handling +and pruning must be done. Without proper care such results would be +impossible, the coffee cannot grow an abundance of wood and coffee at +the same time. As soon as the crop of the fourth year is gathered the +work of pruning must commence without delay. This consists of cutting +off with a sharp knife the secondaries that have borne the crop. They +must not be cut so close as to injure the eye or bud. About +three-sixteenths of an inch from the stem of the primary will be quite +safe, and the secondaries for the fifth year's crop will soon make +their appearance. Care should be taken to leave the stem of the tree +clear of shoots and foliage for a space of six inches from the stem; +the tree will want all the light it can get. The coffee tree can be +said to be in full bearing when all the primaries are carrying bearing +secondaries. During the life of the coffee tree, the planter must +keep a close watch on his trees and restrict their wood-bearing +propensities to the wood that is to bear his crops; nothing else +should be allowed to grow. If the work is commenced rightly and +carried on systematically, the work will not be difficult and no crops +will be lost. But on the other hand, if the work is neglected, the +trees will become matted and all the lower primaries die off. These, +if once lost, will not grow again. The tree under these conditions +will only bear a tithe of the crop it would bear with proper +attention, and furthermore it is a most difficult matter to bring a +neglected tree into proper shape and it can only be done at a loss of +one and perhaps two years' time. There are many minor details +connected with the care of the coffee tree which would occupy too much +space to describe here, and which the coffee planter can easily learn +as he carries on the work of coffee planting. Without doubt coffee +planting in this country is destined to become a great industry. We +have large tracts +<!-- Page 32 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">32</a></span> +of the finest coffee lands in the world, only waiting to be cultivated +to make prosperous and happy homes. One parting word to the intending +coffee planter, take Davie Crockett's motto, "Be sure you're right and +then go ahead."</p> + +<h3> +ESTIMATE OF COST OF ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A +COFFEE PLANTATION OF 75 ACRES, FROM THE FIRST +TO THE SEVENTH YEAR.</h3> + +<div class="center"> +<table width="100%" summary="coffee plantation cost estimate, first +seven years, 3 columns, 89 rows"> + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>FIRST YEAR.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"> + Purchase of 100 acres of Government land at $10.00 per acre</td> + <td class="padright">$1,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's house and water tank</td> + <td class="padright"> 600 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Laborers' quarters and water tank</td> + <td class="padright">350 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Clearing 50 acres of land, at $20 per + acre</td> + <td class="padright">1,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Fencing</td> + <td class="padright">300 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Purchase of 65,000, 1-year old coffee plants + at $5.00 per M</td> + <td class="padright">325 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Lining, holing and planting 50 acres</td> + <td class="padright">600 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary, 1 year</td> + <td class="padright">1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor of 6 Japanese, 1 year at $15 per + month</td> + <td class="padright">1,080 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Purchase of tools and starting nursery</td> + <td class="padright">500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$6,955 00</td> + <td class="padright">$6,955 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>SECOND YEAR.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 6 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">1,080 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Extra labor lining, holing and planting + 25 acres</td> + <td class="padright">300 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries</td> + <td class="padright">500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$3,080 00</td> + <td class="padright">$10,035 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> + <th colspan="3"> +<!-- Page 33 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">33</a></span> + + <h4>THIRD YEAR.</h4> +</th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 9 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">1,620 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Pulping shed and drying house</td> + <td class="padright">500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Pulper, with engine and boiler</td> + <td class="padright">500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Extra help for picking, pulping and drying + 20,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres (at 4 cents + per lb.)</td> + <td class="padright">800 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Hulling, polishing and grading + 20,000 lbs. of coffee at 1 cent</td> + <td class="padright">200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries: bags, freight, etc.</td> + <td class="padright">250 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$5,070 00</td> + <td class="padright"> 5,070 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$15,105 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>CREDIT.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">By sale of 20,000 lbs. of coffee at + 18 cents</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">3,600 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$11,505 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>FOURTH YEAR.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 9 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">1,620 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Extra labor picking, pulping and drying + 50,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres (at 4 cents + per lb.)</td> + <td class="padright">2,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">10,000 lbs. from 25 acres + (3-year-old trees)</td> + <td class="padright">400 00</td> + <td class="padright"> + <!-- Page 34 --> + <span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">34</a></span> +</td> +</tr> + + + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Hulling, polishing and grading + 60,000 lbs. at 1 cent</td> + <td class="padright">600 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries: bags, freight, etc.</td> + <td class="padright">400 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$6,220 00</td> + <td class="padright"> 6,220 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$17,725 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>CREDIT.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">By sale of 60,000 lbs. of coffee at 18c</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">10,800 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$ 6,925 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>FIFTH YEAR.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 9 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">1,620 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Picking, pulping and drying + 60,000 lbs. coffee from 50 acres and + 25,000 lbs. from 25 acres, at 4 cents</td> + <td class="padright">3,400 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Hulling, polishing and grading + 85,000 lbs. at 1 cent per lb.</td> + <td class="padright">850 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries: bags, freight, etc.</td> + <td class="padright">500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$7,570 00</td> + <td class="padright"> 7,570 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$14,495 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>CREDIT.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">By sale of 85,000 lbs. coffee at + 18 cents</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">15,300 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Balance on hand</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$ 905 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> + <th colspan="3"> +<!-- Page 35 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">35</a></span> + + <h4>SIXTH YEAR.</h4> +</th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 9 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">1,620 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Picking, pulping and drying + 75,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres, + and 25,000 lbs. from 25 acres, 100,000 lbs. at + 4 cents</td> + <td class="padright">4,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Hulling, polishing and grading + 100,000 lbs. at 1 cent</td> + <td class="padright">1,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries: bags, freight, etc.</td> + <td class="padright">1,000 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$8,820 00</td> + <td class="padright">$8,820 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>CREDIT.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">By sale of 100,000 lbs. of coffee at + 18 cents</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">18,000 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Balance on hand</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$10,085 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> +<th colspan="3"><h4>SEVENTH YEAR.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Manager's salary</td> + <td class="padright">$1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Labor, 12 Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">2,160 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Picking, pulping and drying + 125,000 lbs. of coffee at 4 cents</td> + <td class="padright">5,500 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Hulling, polishing and grading + 125,000 lbs. at 1 cent</td> + <td class="padright">1,250 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Sundries: bags, freight, etc.</td> + <td class="padright">1,200 00</td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> + <td class="padright"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright">$11,310 00</td> + <td class="padright">$11,310 00</td> +</tr> + + +<tr> + <th colspan="3"> +<!-- Page 36 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">36</a></span> + + <h4>CREDIT.</h4></th> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">By sale of 125,000 lbs. of coffee at + 18 cents</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">22,500 00</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent"></td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="longequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="hangindent">Balance to credit of Plantation at end of + seventh year</td> + <td class="padright"></td> + <td class="padright">$21,275 00</td> +</tr> + +</table> +</div> +<div class="bigskip"></div> + +<p>The yields as given in the above estimate are far below what may be +attained by thorough cultivation and fertilizing. The coffee tree +responds readily to good treatment, but will disappoint its owner if +neglected.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="HAMAKUA" id="HAMAKUA"></a> +<img src="images/hamakua.jpg" width="500" height="392" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="PUNA" id="PUNA"></a> +<img src="images/puna.jpg" width="500" height="364" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA. +</span></div> + +<div> +<!-- Page 37 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">37</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>AGRICULTURAL POSSIBILITIES.</h3> + + +<p>While the coffee trees are growing and during the time that will +elapse before the planter receives returns from his investment, it +would be a wise thing for him to plant such things, as will not only +provide the greater part of the food for himself and family, but may +also yield a moderate return in money. The soil and climate of the +Hawaiian Islands will grow almost anything that grows in any other +country. All Northern fruits can be grown if one will only go high +enough on the mountain slopes of Maui and Hawaii. But the coffee +planter must confine himself to such things as will thrive in the +vicinity in which his coffee trees are planted, and it is for the +information of intending planters that this chapter is written.</p> + +<p>In the first place, almost all kinds of vegetables will grow in +such profusion as will astonish those who have lived only in Northern +climes. Green and sweet corn, potatoes, Irish and sweet, cabbages, +tomatoes, beans, lettuce, radishes and many other kinds of vegetables, +all of the finest quality and in the greatest profusion, can be had +every day in the year. Strawberries and raspberries can also be had +all the year round. In addition to oranges and limes, which grow to +perfection in this country, many fruits peculiar to tropical and +semi-tropical climates grow well and flourish in these Islands. Among +the more important is the Avocado Pear (Persea Gratissima), commonly +called the Alligator Pear. This tree grows well and bears fruit, of +splendid quality, in from 3 to 5 years from seed. +<!-- Page 38 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">38</a></span> +The fruit is much esteemed by all classes. A small quantity of the +fruit is shipped to California; what reaches there in good condition +is quickly bought at high prices. It can only be carried safely in +cold storage, and this is very expensive freight. A native peach does +well, and will bear fruit in two years from seed. The fruit is much +smaller than the American peach, which by the way does not do well on +elevations below 4000 feet, but very sweet and juicy and makes +excellent preserves and pies. Without doubt this peach could in a few +years be improved so as to rival peaches of any other country. The +Mango (Mangifera Indica) is a tropical fruit tree that grows in the +greatest profusion and bears enormous crops of delicious fruit. It +comes into bearing in 5 or 6 years from seed and does well from sea +level to an elevation of 2000 feet. The fruit is much liked by every +one; the green fruit is made into a sauce resembling, but much +superior to, apple butter.</p> + +<p>The Guava (Psidium Guayava) grows wild in all parts of the Islands +below 3000 feet. The fruit, of which there is a great abundance, is +made into jam and the very finest jelly in the world. In the fruiting +season large quantities of the jelly can be made, and without doubt, +exported at a profit.</p> + +<p>The Poha (Physalis edulis) is a quick growing shrub bearing a berry +that makes excellent jelly and jam. The shrub grows wild on elevations +between 1000 and 4000 feet. A patch of pohas planted in a corner of a +garden, will grow and yield a bountiful supply of fruit almost without +cultivation.</p> + +<p>Pineapples are at home on these Islands; a small plot planted with +the best varieties of this king of fruits will keep the table supplied +the year round.</p> + +<p>Another valuable fruit indigenous to this country is the Papaia +(Carica papaya). This fine fruit can be raised in enormous quantities +and is a most fattening food for pigs and chickens. The tree fruits in +eight or nine months from the seed, and thence forward for years it +yields ripe fruit every +<!-- Page 39 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">39</a></span> +month in the year. The fruit is of the size of a small melon and is +very rich in sugar. The unripe fruit contains a milky juice that, even +when diluted with water, renders any tough meat, that is washed in it, +quite tender. A small piece of the unripe fruit placed in the water in +which meat or tough chicken is boiled makes it tender and easily +digestible.</p> + +<p>A very valuable food plant, indigenous to these Islands, is the +taro (Colocasia esculenta). The variety known as dry land taro will +grow on land that is moist enough for the coffee trees. The taro is a +grand food plant, the tubers containing more nutriment for a given +weight than any other vegetable food. The young tops when cooked are +hard to distinguish from spinach. The tubers must be cooked before +they can be used for food, in order to dissipate a very acrid +principle that exists in both leaves and root.</p> + +<p>Another important food plant that has been introduced and yields +abundantly is the Cassava (Manihot utilissima). This plant furnishes +the staple food for the population of Brazil. It is easily propagated +by the planting pieces of the woody portions of the stems and +branches. The tubers are available in nine or ten months after +planting. There are two kinds, the sweet and the bitter; the latter +being the more prolific. The sweet kind can be fed to pigs without +cooking. The bitter kind contains a poisonous substance which is +entirely destroyed by cooking. There is no danger of animals eating +the bitter kind in a raw state, for no stock will touch it, while the +sweet kind is eagerly eaten in the raw state by pigs, horses, cows, +etc. The tubers are prepared for human food by grating them. The juice +is then expelled by pressure, and the residue pounded into a coarse +meal, which is made into thin cakes. It is an excellent food, and said +to be much more digestible than bread and other foods made from +wheat. Pigs can be very cheaply raised on the sweet variety of this +plant. A field of the plant being ready +<!-- Page 40 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">40</a></span> +to gather, a portion is fenced off, and the pigs turned into it. They +will continue to feed until every vestige of the tubers is eaten, +leaving the ground in a fine condition for replanting. The tubers +never spoil in the ground, in fact the soil is the very best +storehouse for them. However if left for two or three years the tubers +grow very large and tough.</p> + +<p>Bananas, in great variety, are grown in all parts of the Islands +where there is sufficient moisture. Any land that will grow coffee +will grow bananas. The yield of fruit from this remarkable plant is +something astonishing. It commences to bear fruit in a little over one +year from the time of planting. The stem decays after the formation of +a bunch of fruit; this will weigh from 50 to 100 pounds and +upwards. Numerous suckers spring up from around the decaying stem and +bear fruit in their turn. One-half an acre planted with bananas would +not only furnish a large family with an abundance of delicious and +nutritious fruit, but would also yield a large supply of feed for +pigs, chickens and other stock.</p> + +<p>The tea plant (Camellia Thea) grows well in this country and yields +a tea of good quality. It is hardly likely that it will become an +article of export from this country, as we cannot compete with the +very low prices paid for labor in the great tea countries, India, +Ceylon, and China. But it can be grown for home consumption, and there +is no reason why every coffee planter should not have a patch of tea +growing on his land. An eighth of an acre, planted out in tea plants, +would yield more tea than could be consumed by a large family; the +work of cultivation and preparation is light and easy and could be +done by women and children.</p> + +<p>The coffee lands are situated in forested tracts in which there is +little or no pasturage for animals. Every coffee planter should keep +one or more cows to obtain the milk and butter which will furnish a +large addition to the food supply for himself and family. In order to +do this, it will be necessary to +<!-- Page 41 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">41</a></span> +plant such things as will furnish food for the animals. We have +several fodder plants that will yield a large quantity of feed and +which will only grow in tropical and semi-tropical countries.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="STEAMSHIP" id="STEAMSHIP"></a> +<img src="images/steamship.jpg" width="500" height="355" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="HOUSE" id="HOUSE"></a> +<img src="images/house.jpg" width="500" height="390" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +VOLCANO HOUSE. +</span></div> + + +<p>First among these is the Teosinte Reana (Euchlacna luxurians). This +plant is a native of Guatamala,<!--[sic]--> and grows splendidly in +this country; each plant requires sixteen feet of ground for its full +development. It is an annual if allowed to run to seed; but its growth +can be continued by cutting when four or five feet high, and green +feed obtained all the year round.</p> + +<p>Guinea grass (Panicum Maximum), one of the grandest of fodder +plants, has been introduced and finds a congenial home in this +country. It is purely a tropical grass, it grows to a height of eight +feet forming large bunches which, when cut young, furnish an abundance +of sweet and tender feed. In districts when there is sufficient +moisture, it can be cut every two months. Caffir corn, Egyptian millet +and Sorghum grow well, and should be planted in order to have a change +of feed.</p> + +<p>Pumpkins and squash grow to an enormous size and yield an immense +quantity of feed, much relished by cows and pigs.</p> + +<p>A dry land rice is being tried in the coffee districts of Olaa and +Kona, on the Island of Hawaii, and there is every reason to believe +that it will be successful. Nearly all the laborers on the coffee +plantations use rice as their staple food and it has to be brought +from the Island of Oahu to the Islands of Hawaii and Maui. There is no +doubt but that the rice used by the labor on the coffee plantations, +can be raised on the spot, reducing the cost of living to the +laborers, and making them more contented.</p> + +<p>It will be seen from the foregoing that many things can be grown +that will enable the coffee planter to not only reduce the outlay for +living expenses for himself and family but will also allow them to +enjoy many of the comforts and luxuries of life.</p> + +<p>While our main industries, sugar, coffee and rice, are being +vigorously carried on, new products are not lost sight of. Experiments +<!-- Page 42 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">42</a></span> +are in progress that promise to greatly diversify our industries and +increase the number of our exports.</p> + +<p>Several fiber plants are receiving attention, particularly the +Sisal Hemp (Agave Sisalana) and Sansevieria or bow string Hemp. The +Sisal plant will grow and flourish on lands that are too dry for any +other cultivation. Many thousands of the plants have been introduced +and at least one plantation is being set out.</p> + +<p>The bow string Hemp requires a wet, rich land in order to do +well. It probably yields the best fiber of all the leaf fiber +plants.</p> + +<p>Ramie (Boehmeria nivea) grows splendidly in this country and after +being well established will yield 4 to 6 crops per annum. Whenever a +machine is invented that will economically decorticate the Ramie +fiber, its cultivation will become an important industry in this +country. Ramie will grow and do well wherever the coffee tree will +grow, and whenever the machine is available, the coffee planter will +have a profitable industry, to go hand in hand with coffee and employ +the slack time between the coffee picking seasons.</p> + +<p>Cocoa (Theobroma Cacao) is the tree that<!--Typo: the--> produces +the fruit from which chocolate is made. It grows and bears well in +moist humid districts, and many of the coffee planters are setting out +numbers of the trees.</p> + +<p>There are many other economic plants that are well suited for +culture in this country. The country is entering on a new era, and as +the lands become settled and population increases, many small cultures +will become possible, which will afford many persons the opportunity +of making an easy living in a land of eternal summer.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 43 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">43</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>DIGEST OF THE LAND ACT OF 1895.</h3> + +<h4>(With reference to unoccupied lands.)</h4> + + +<p>The Land Act of 1895, having for its special object the settlement +and cultivation of the Government agricultural and pastoral land, +vested the control and management of Public Lands in a Board of Three +Commissioners, composed of the Minister of the Interior and two +persons appointed and removable by the President, one of whom is +designated the Agent of Public Lands; but excepting from the control +of the Commissioners, town lots, landings, tracts reserved for Public +purposes, etc., which remain under the control of the Minister of the +Interior.</p> + +<p class="smallskip">For the purposes of the Act, the Republic of +Hawaii is divided into Six Land Districts, as follows:</p> + +<p class="list">1st. Hilo and Puna on the Island of Hawaii.</p> + +<p class="list">2d. Hamakua and Kohala on the Island of Hawaii.</p> + +<p class="list">3rd. Kona and Kau on the Island of Hawaii.</p> + +<p class="list">4th. The Islands of Maui, Molokai, Lanai and Kahoolawe.</p> + +<p class="list">5th. The Island of Oahu.</p> + +<p class="list">6th. The Island of Kauai.</p> + + +<p>The Commissioners are represented by a Sub-Agent in each District.</p> + +<p class="smallskip">Public Lands for the purposes of this Act are +classified as follows:</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 44 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">44</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="list">I. Agricultural Lands. First Class: Land suitable for +the cultivation of Fruit, Coffee, Sugar or other perennial crops with +or without irrigation.</p> + +<p class="list">Second Class: Land suitable for the cultivation of +annual crops only.</p> + +<p class="list">Third Class: Wet lands such as kalo and rice +lands.</p> + +<p class="list">II. Pastoral Land. First Class: Land not in the +description of Agricultural land but capable of carrying livestock the +year through.</p> + +<p class="list">Second Class: Land capable of carrying livestock only +part of the year, or otherwise inferior to First Class Pastoral +land.</p> + +<p class="list">III. Pastoral Agricultural Land: Land adapted in part +for pasturage and in part for cultivation.</p> + +<p class="list">IV. Forest Land: Land producing forest trees but +unsuitable for cultivation.</p> + +<p class="list">V. Waste Land. Land not included in the other +classes.</p> + + +<p class="smallskip">The Act provides three principal methods for the +acquirement of Public Lands, under systems known as +</p> + +<p class="list">I. Homestead Lease.</p> + +<p class="list">II. Right of Purchase Lease.</p> + +<p class="list">III. Cash Freehold.</p> + + +<h3>GENERAL QUALIFICATION OF APPLICANTS.</h3> + +<p>Applicants for land under systems named above, must be over +eighteen years of age, must be citizens by birth or naturalization or +have received letters of denization or special rights of citizenship, +be under no civil disability for any offense, nor delinquent in the +payment of taxes. Special qualifications are named under the +respective systems.</p> + + +<h3>HOMESTEAD LEASE SYSTEM.</h3> + +<p>The Homestead Lease system permits the acquirement of Public Land +by qualified persons without other payments than +<!-- Page 45 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">45</a></span> +a fee of two dollars upon application and a fee of five dollars upon +issuance of Homestead Lease.</p> + +<p class="smallskip">The limit of area in the different classes of +land which may be acquired under Homestead Lease is:</p> + +<p class="list">8 acres first-class agricultural land;</p> + +<p class="list">16 acres second-class agricultural land;</p> + +<p class="list">1 acre wet (rice or taro) land;</p> + +<p class="list">30 acres first-class pastoral land;</p> + +<p class="list">60 acres second-class pastoral land;</p> + +<p class="list">45 acres pastoral-agricultural land.</p> + + +<h3>SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS FOR HOMESTEAD LEASE.</h3> + +<p>Any person having the general qualifications (as to citizenship, +etc.) who is not the owner in his own right of any land in the +Hawaiian Islands, other than "wet land" (rice, taro, etc.) and who is +not an applicant for other land under the Act may apply under this +part of the Act, and such application may cover one lot of wet land in +addition to other land, if reasonably near. Husband and wife may not +both be applicants.</p> + +<p>Applications must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of +the District, accompanied by sworn declaration of qualifications, and +a fee of $2.</p> + + +<h3>CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPATION.</h3> + +<p>The successful applicant receives a certificate of occupation which +entitles him to occupy the described premises and to receive a +homestead lease for Nine Hundred and Ninety-Nine Years, if conditions +of certificate of occupation have been fulfilled, the conditions +being:</p> + +<p>That the occupier shall, before the end of two years, build a +dwelling house and reside on the premises. He shall maintain his home +on the premises from and after the end of two years +<!-- Page 46 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">46</a></span> +from date of certificate. He shall before the end of six years from +date of certificate have in cultivation not less than 10 per cent. of +the land, or have in cultivation 5 per cent. of the land and, in good +growing condition, not less than ten timber, shade or fruit trees per +acre on agricultural land, or if pastoral land, fence the same within +six years.</p> + +<p>He shall pay the taxes assessed upon the premises within sixty days +after the same are delinquent.</p> + +<p>He shall perform any conditions of the certificates for the +planting or protection of trees, or prevention or destruction of +vegetable pests that may be on the premises.</p> + + +<h3>CONDITIONS OF HOMESTEAD LEASE.</h3> + +<p>The Lessee or his successors must maintain his home on the leased +premises, must pay the taxes assessed upon the premises, within sixty +days after the same are delinquent, and perform any conditions of the +lease relating to protection or planting of trees, or destruction and +prevention of vegetable pests.</p> + +<p>Lands held under a certificate of occupation or homestead lease are +liable to taxation as estates in fee.</p> + +<p>In case of the death of an occupier or lessee his interests, +notwithstanding any devise or bequest shall vest in his relations, in +the order prescribed in the Act, the widow or widower being first in +order, then the children, etc.</p> + +<p>Certificates of occupation or homestead lease, or any interest +thereunder, is not assignable by way of mortgage nor is the same +subject to attachment, levy or sale on any process issuing from the +Courts of the country. Neither the whole nor any portion of the +premises may be sub-let.</p> + +<p>Surrender may be made to the Government by an occupier or lessee +having the whole interest if all conditions to date of surrender have +been fulfilled, and the person so surrendering is entitled to receive +from the Government the value of permanent improvement, whenever the +same is received by the Government from a new tenant.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 47 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">47</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASES.</h3> + +<p>Right of Purchase Leases, for the term of twenty-one years, may be +issued to qualified applicants, with the privilege to the Lessee of +purchasing at the end of three years and upon fulfillment of special +conditions.</p> + + +<h3>QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS.</h3> + +<p>Any person who is over eighteen years of age, who is a citizen by +birth or naturalization of the Republic of Hawaii or who has received +letters of denization of special rights of citizenship, who is under +no civil disability for any offense, who is not delinquent in the +payment of taxes, and who does not own any agricultural or pastoral +land in the Hawaiian Islands, may apply for Right of Purchase Lease, +the limit of areas which may be acquired being:</p> + +<!--Normalize hyphenation of first-class, second-class--> +<p class="list">100 acres first-class agricultural land;</p> + +<p class="list">200 acres second-class agricultural land;</p> + +<p class="list">2 acres wet (rice or taro) land;</p> + +<p class="list">600 acres first-class pastoral land;</p> + +<p class="list">1200 acres second-class pastoral land;</p> + +<p class="list">400 acres mixed agricultural and pastoral land.</p> + + +<p>Any qualified person, owning less than the respective amounts +stated in foregoing list, and which is not subject to residence +condition, may acquire additional land of the classes already held by +him but so that his aggregate holding shall not be in excess of the +limit named; or if desiring additional land of another class may +acquire the same according to ratio established between the various +classes.</p> + +<p>Husband and wife may not both be applicants for Right of Purchase +Leases.</p> + +<p>Application must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of +the District, and must be accompanied by a fee equal to six months +rent of premises, fee to be credited on account +<!-- Page 48 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">48</a></span> +of rent, if application is successful, and to be returned is +application is unsuccessful. In case of more than one application for +same lot the first application takes precedence.</p> + + +<h3>CONDITIONS OF RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASE.</h3> + +<p>Term: twenty-one years.</p> + +<p>Rental: Eight per cent. on the appraised value given in lease, +payable semi-annually.</p> + +<p>The Lessee must from the end of the first to the end of the fifth +year continuously maintain his home on the leased premises.</p> + +<p>The Lessee<!--Typo: lessee--> must have in cultivation at the end +of three years five per cent. and at the end of five years ten per +cent. of his holding, and maintain on agricultural land an average of +ten trees to the acre.</p> + +<p>Pastoral land must be fenced.</p> + +<p>Interest in Right of Purchase Lease is not assignable without +written consent of the Commissioners of Public Lands, but the lease +may be surrendered to the Government.</p> + +<p>In case of forfeiture or surrender of right of purchase lease, +reappraisement is made of the land and of permanent improvements +thereon, and if the land is again disposed of, the incoming tenant +shall pay for such permanent improvements and the amount when so +received by the Government shall be paid to the surrendering +Lessee.</p> + + +<h3>CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH PURCHASE MAY BE MADE.</h3> + +<p>At any time after third year of leasehold<!--Typo: leashold--> +term, the Lessee is entitled to a Land Patent giving fee simple title, +upon his payment of the appraised value set forth in lease, if he has +reduced to cultivation twenty-five per cent. of his leased premises, +and has substantially performed all other conditions of his lease.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="RAILROAD" id="RAILROAD"></a> +<img src="images/railroad.jpg" width="500" height="359" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +KOHALA RAILROAD. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="RICE" id="RICE"></a> +<img src="images/rice.jpg" width="500" height="363" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY. +</span></div> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 49 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">49</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>CASH FREEHOLDS.</h3> + +<p>Cash Freehold Lots are sold at auction to the highest qualified +bidder, at appraised value as upset price.</p> + +<p>The qualification of applicants for Cash Freeholds and the areas of +land which may be acquired are the same as those under Right of +Purchase lease system.</p> + + +<h3>APPLICATIONS.</h3> + +<p>Applications must be made to Sub-Agent of District in writing with +sworn declaration as to qualifications, and a fee of ten per cent. of +appraised value of lot, which fee is forfeited if applicant declines +to take the premises at the appraised value, and is credited to him if +he becomes the purchaser of the lot. If such applicant, however, is +outbid, his fee is returned to him.</p> + +<p>If two or more applications are made and there is no bid above the +upset price, the first application takes precedence.</p> + +<p>The purchaser at auction sale must pay immediately thereafter +one-fourth of purchase price and thereupon receive a "Freehold +Agreement."</p> + + +<h3>CONDITIONS OF FREEHOLD AGREEMENT.</h3> + +<p>The freeholder shall pay the balance of purchase price in equal +installments in one, two and three years, with interest at 6 per cent., +but may pay any installment before it is due and stop corresponding +interest.</p> + +<p>Twenty-five per cent. of agricultural land must be cultivated, and +pastoral land fenced before the end of third year.</p> + +<p>Freeholder must maintain his home on the premises, from end of first to +end of third year.</p> + +<p>He may not assign or sub-let without consent of Agent of Public +Lands.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 50 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">50</a></span> +</div> + +<p>He must allow Agents of the Government to enter and examine the +premises.</p> + +<p>He must pay all taxes that may be due upon the premises.</p> + +<p>If all conditions are fulfilled he is entitled at end of three +years to Patent giving fee simple title.</p> + +<p>In case of forfeiture or surrender the land and permanent +improvements are reappraised separately, and the value of such +improvements when received by Government from new tenant or +freeholder, will be paid to surrendering freeholder.</p> + + +<h3>SETTLEMENT ASSOCIATIONS.</h3> + +<p>Six or more qualified persons may form a "Settlement Association" +and apply for holdings in one block.</p> + +<p>The provisions for cash freehold apply to the settlement of such +blocks, but first auction sale is confined to members of such +Settlement Association.</p> + +<p>Any lot in such block which may be forfeited or surrendered, or +which is not taken up by any member of the Settlement Association, +within three months, shall be open to any qualified applicants.</p> + +<p>Disputes, disagreements or misunderstandings, between the parties +to certificate of occupation, homestead lease, right of purchase +lease, or cash freehold and relating thereto, which can not be +amicably settled, shall be submitted to the Circuit Judge in whose +jurisdiction the premises are situated and his decision shall be final +subject only to appeal to Supreme Court.</p> + + +<h3>CASH SALES AND SPECIAL AGREEMENTS.</h3> + +<p>With consent of Executive Council, public lands not under lease may +be sold in parcels of not over one thousand acres, at public auction +for cash, and upon such sale and payment of full consideration, a land +patent will issue.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 51 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">51</a></span> +</div> + +<p>Parcels of land of not over six hundred acres, may with consent of +Executive Council, be sold at public auction upon part credit and part +cash, and upon such terms and conditions of improvement, residence, +etc., as may be imposed.</p> + +<p>Upon fulfillment of all conditions a Land Patent will issue.</p> + + +<h3>GENERAL LEASES.</h3> + +<p>General leases of public lands may be made for a term not exceeding +twenty-one years.</p> + +<p>Such leases are sold at public auction, and require rent in advance +quarterly, semi-annually or annually.</p> + +<p>The conditions of general leases are made at discretion of the +Commissioners, and may be made for any class of public lands.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 52 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">52</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>MISCELLANEOUS.</h3> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h4>POPULATION.</h4> + +<p>The population of the Islands according to the census of 1890 was +89,991, or in round numbers 90,000. A census of the population has +just been taken, but the results cannot be exactly known for some +months. An estimate recently made based upon the knowledge of general +increase from various sources gives the population as follows:</p> + +<div class="center"> +<table summary="population by ethnicity"> +<tr> + <td class="left">Hawaiians</td> + <td class="padright">35,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left">Part Hawaiians</td> + <td class="padright">10,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left">Chinese</td> + <td class="padright">15,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left">Japanese</td> + <td class="padright">24,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left">Portuguese</td> + <td class="padright"> 9,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left">American and European</td> + <td class="padright">14,000</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td></td> + <td class="padright"><hr class="midequals" /></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="left" style="text-indent: 0.5em">Total</td> + <td class="padright">107,000</td> +</tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p>Since the census returns began to come in, it is very evident that +this estimate will be exceeded by some 2,000, making the total +population 109,000. The increase will probably be found among Japanese +and Portuguese. The population of Honolulu is 29,920, or practically +30,000.</p> + + +<h4>SHIPPING.</h4> + +<p>The vessels flying the Hawaiian flag number 52, aggregating 21,678 +tons. They are divided as follows:</p> + +<div class="center"> +<!-- Page 53 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">53</a></span> +<table summary="tonnage of hawaiian vessels"> + +<tr> + <td class="right">23</td> + <td class="left"> steamers,</td> + <td class="center">aggregating</td> + <td></td> + <td class="padright">9,575</td> + <td class="center"> tons</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="right"> 5</td> + <td class="left">barks,</td> + <td class="center"> '' </td> + <td></td> + <td class="padright">4,198</td> + <td class="center"> '' </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="right"> 3</td> + <td class="left">ships,</td> + <td class="center"> '' </td> + <td></td> + <td class="padright">6,272</td> + <td class="center"> '' </td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="right">21</td> + <td colspan="2" class="left">schooners and sloops,</td> + <td class="center">aggregating</td> + <td class="padright">1,623</td> + <td class="center"> '' </td> +</tr> + +</table> +</div> + +<p>Of these vessels 13 are employed in foreign trade and 39 in trade +between the Islands.</p> + + +<h4>FINANCES.</h4> + +<p>Mention has been made of the taxes of this country. A few words +will be to the point upon the financial condition of the +government.</p> + +<p>The direct taxes yielded, in 1895, $592,691.92. The Customs revenue +was $547,149.04 and licenses, &c., produced $600,224.23, in +all $1,740,065.19.</p> + +<p>The current expenditures are kept within the current income. Great +public improvements are provided for by loan. This is what every +growing country has to do. The public debt of the country on January +1, 1896, was $3,764,335. With a population of 109,000, this gives +about $34 per head of the population. The Hawaiian Government finds no +difficulty in obtaining means for internal improvements, and a scheme +is now on foot to reduce the interest and consolidate the public +debt.</p> + +<p>The exports in 1895 amounted to $8,474,138.15 and the imports to +$5,339,785.04. This certainly shows well for a country whose total +population is exceeded by dozens of cities. Of the exports +$7,975,590.41 were accredited to sugar, $22,823.68 to coffee, +$102,599.25 to bananas and $8,783.84 to pineapples. These three latter +items are elastic and the showing of 1896 will give a very large +increase in their yields.</p> + +<p>Of the imports $4,121,920.22 came from the Pacific ports of the +United States and $394,399.16 from the Atlantic ports; a total of +$4,516,319.38, leaving but $1,197,698.16 for every other nation that +the country has commercial relations with.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 54 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">54</a></span> +</div> + +<p>In point of fact, taking exports and imports, the business in 1895 +done by the Hawaiian Islands with all its commercial relations +amounted to $14,188,155.69; of this sum $12,908,508.92 was done with +the United States, which amounts to 91 per cent. of the whole business +of the Islands. From these figures it can be judged how prosperous a +little community that of the Hawaiian Islands is, and further how +close are its relations with the Great Republic. What country in the +world has 91 per cent. of its commercial relations with its +neighbor?</p> + +<p>The financial condition of Hawaii is on a sound basis. The men in +charge of its government are frugal and careful of the public +expenditure, the whole tendency of the Republic is to foster industry +and thrift. The institutions are liberal and nothing is more desirable +for such a country than the immigration of colonists, with capital to +develop the industries and determination to work honestly and +well.</p> + + +<h4>FOR TOURISTS.</h4> + +<p>It was not the intention when planning this pamphlet to speak of +the opportunities for tourists visiting the Islands, but a few words +are appended. The object of the pamphlet has been to show the +agricultural resources and general conditions.</p> + +<p>The great attraction of the Islands is undoubtedly the Volcano of +Kilauea, the greatest and most striking volcano in the world. Though +quiescent for a time during part of 1895 and 1896, it has now burst +forth with renewed splendor and promises to exceed many of its former +efforts. Moreover, from the rising of the lakes of fire, and the floor +of the crater generally, it has evidently come to stay.</p> + +<p>But it is not only this one great natural wonder that is attractive +to the tourist. The crater of Haleakala, the largest extinct crater in +the world, is almost, in its silent magnificence, equal to the wonder +of the boiling and seething Kilauea. Then the delightful climate, the +balmy breezes, the brilliant coloring +<!-- Page 55 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">55</a></span> +of sky, sea and land, the luxuriant tropical vegetation, and the +peculiar "Dolce far niente" life, all lend a charm to which no one who +visits the place has ever failed to respond. In fact a visit to the +Hawaiian Islands is one of the pleasantest experiences of a +life-time.</p> + +<p>For people suffering from pulmonary troubles the climate is +unrivalled and there are now several sanitariums where such patients +can be attended to.</p> + +<p>San Francisco and Victoria are the two points of deportation for +the Hawaiian Islands. The Oceanic Steamship Line has vessels sailing +twice a month. One steamer sails for Honolulu, stays a few days, and +returns to San Francisco. The other steamers touch at Honolulu and go +on to the Australian colonies. Round trip tickets can be obtained and +also lay over tickets, at the Company's offices on Montgomery street, +San Francisco. The Pacific Mail and +O. & O. S. S. lines, running from China and Japan +to San Francisco, also touch at Honolulu regularly. Arrangements can +be made to lay over in Honolulu, visit the Volcano and proceed on the +voyage by the next vessel.</p> + +<p>From Victoria the C. & A. S. S. sail once a +month. They give the tourist a chance of seeing the Canadian Pacific +Railroad before coming here, but a round trip ticket would have to be +for a full month. By the O. S. S. lines less time need be +spent on the Islands.</p> + +<p class="list">The cost of round trip passage is $125.</p> + +<p class="list">The cost of trip to the Volcano, including all +expenses is $50.</p> + +<p class="list">Hotel expenses in Honolulu from $2 a day, according to +accommodation.</p> + +<p>Particulars on these subjects can always be learned by writing to +Wilder S. S. Co., Fort street, Honolulu; or the Inter-Island +Steamship Co., Queen street, Honolulu.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 56 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">56</a></span> +</div> + +<h4>PRICE LIST OF PROVISIONS ON THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.</h4> + +<p class="list">Fresh Hawaiian butter,<!--Added comma--> from 25 to +50c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Hams, from 16-1/2 to 30c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Bacon, from 16-1/2 to 20c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Cheese, from 20 to 35c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Family pork, from 15 to 18c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Corned beef, 7c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Fresh meat, from 6 to 15c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Loin of Porterhouse steaks,<!--Added comma--> from 6 +to 15c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Tinned fruits per doz.,<!--Added comma--> from $1.75 +to $2.25.</p> + +<p class="list">Golden Gate Flour, per 100-lb., $2.50.</p> + +<p class="list">Lower grades, $2.20.</p> + +<p class="list">Hawaiian rice, $3.25 to $5.00 per 100 lbs.</p> + +<p class="list">Hawaiian bananas, per bunch, 25 to 55c.</p> + +<p class="list">Potatoes, from 1 to 2c. per lb.</p> + +<p class="list">Eggs per dozen, 25 to 50c.</p> + +<p class="list">Rolled oats per case, $5.50.</p> + +<p class="list">Ice, in small quantities, 1-1/2c.; 50 lbs. and over, +1c. per lb.</p> + + +<h4>WAGES.</h4> + +<p>The following is an approximation of the wages paid to different +classes of labor on the Hawaiian Islands:</p> + +<p class="list">Engineers on plantations, from $125 to $175 per month, +house and firewood furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Sugar boilers, $125 to $175 per month, house and +firewood furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Blacksmiths, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house +and firewood furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Carpenters, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house +and firewood furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Locomotive drivers, $40 to $75 per month, room and +board furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Head overseers, or head lunas, $100 to $150.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 57 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">57</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="list">Under overseers, or lunas, $30 to $50 with room and +board.</p> + +<p class="list">Bookkeepers, plantation, $100 to $175, house and +firewood furnished.</p> + +<p class="list">Teamsters, white, $30 to $40 with room and board.</p> + +<p class="list">Hawaiians, $25 to $30 with room; no board.</p> + +<p class="list">Field labor, Portuguese and Hawaiian $16 to $18 per +month; no board.</p> + +<p class="list">Field labor, Chinese and Japanese, $12.50 to $15 per +month; no board.</p> + +<p class="list">In Honolulu bricklayers and masons receive from $5 to +$6 per day; carpenters, $2.50 to $5; machinists, $3 to $5; painters, +$2 to $5, per day of nine hours.</p> + + +<h4>DOMESTIC LABOR.</h4> + +<p>The domestic labor in Honolulu and in all parts of the Islands, has +for many years been performed by Chinese males, who undoubtedly make +excellent house servants. During the last four or five years the +Japanese have entered the field; the Japanese women are especially in +demand as nurses for children.</p> + +<p class="list">The following are the prevailing rates of wages:</p> + +<p class="list">Cooks, Chinese and Japanese, $3 to $6 per week, with +board and room.</p> + +<p class="list">Nurses and house servants, $8 to $12 per month, with +board and room.</p> + +<p class="list">Gardeners or yard men, $8 to $12 per month, with board +and room.</p> + +<p class="list">Sewing women, $1 per day and one meal.</p> + +<p>Good substantial meals can be obtained at respectable Chinese +restaurants and at the Sailors' Home for 25 cents or Board for $4.50 +per week.</p> + +<p>The market for all kinds of labor is overstocked and it would be +very unwise for any one to come to these Islands with no capital on +the mere chance of obtaining employment. The many steamships arriving +at this port bring numbers of people seeking employment who are +obliged to return disappointed.</p> + + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="NUUANU" id="NUUANU"></a> +<img src="images/nuuanu.jpg" width="500" height="356" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="WAIKIKI" id="WAIKIKI"></a> +<img src="images/waikiki.jpg" width="500" height="367" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +WAIKIKI BEACH. +</span></div> + +<div> +<!-- Page 58 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">58</a> + <a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<h3>HISTORICAL SKETCH.</h3> + +<p>Although the written history of the Hawaiian Islands begins with +their discovery by Captain Cook in 1778, yet the aboriginal +inhabitants had at that time an oral traditional history which +extended back for several centuries.</p> + + +<h3>ORIGIN.</h3> + +<p>As to their origin, these people formed but one branch of the +Polynesian race, which at a remote period settled all the groups of +islands in the central and Eastern Pacific, as far as New Zealand in +the South and Easter Island in the East. This is shown by the close +physical and moral resemblance between their inhabitants, as well as +by the facts that they all speak dialects of the same language, and +have the same manners and customs, the same general system of +tabus,<!--[sic]--> and similar traditions and religious rites.</p> + +<p>The evidence of both language and physical traits tends to show +that their remote ancestors came from the East Indian Archipelago, and +that they were still more distantly related to the pre-Arian races of +Hindostan.<!--[sic]--></p> + +<p>It is also proved by concurrent traditions of the different groups +that there was a general movement of population throughout central +Polynesia during the twelfth and thirteenth centuries of the Christian +Era, during which the Harvey Islands and afterwards New Zealand were +colonized, and many +<!-- Page 59 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">59</a></span> +voyages were made between the Hawaiian Islands and the Samoan and +Society groups. This intercourse, however, seems to have ceased for +four or five hundred years before the arrival of Captain Cook.</p> + + +<h3>ARTS AND MANUFACTURES.</h3> + +<p>The ancient Hawaiians were not savages, in the proper sense of the +term, but barbarians of a promising type. When we consider that they +occupied the most isolated position in the world, and that they were +destitute of metals and of beasts of burden, as well as of the cereal +grains, cotton, flax and wool, we must admit that they had made a +creditable degree of progress towards civilization. Like the other +Polynesians, they had not invented the art of making pottery, or the +use of the loom for weaving.</p> + +<p>Their cutting tools were made of stone, sharks' teeth or +bamboo. Their axes were made of hard, fine grained lava, chiefly found +on the mountain summits. Their principal implement for cultivating the +soil was simply a stick of hard wood, either pointed or shaped into a +flat blade at the end. With these rude tools they cut and framed the +timbers for their houses, which were oblong with long sides and steep +roofs, and were thatched with <i>pili</i> grass, ferns or <i>hala</i> +leaves. In the building as well as in the management of canoes they +were unsurpassed. For containers they used a large gourd (<i>cucurbita +maxima</i>, which was not found elsewhere in the Pacific), and also +cut out circular dishes of wood as truly as if they had been turned in +a lathe.</p> + +<p>For clothing they beat out the inner bark of the paper mulberry and +of some other trees, until it resembled thick flexible paper, when it +was called <i>kapa</i> or <i>tapa</i>. For insignia of rank, they made +splendid feather cloaks, and feather helmets, which were worn only by +chiefs.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 60 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">60</a></span> +</div> + +<p>For lights they used the oily nuts of the <i>kukui</i> or +candle-nut tree.</p> + +<p>For food they chiefly depended upon the tuberous roots of the +<i>taro</i> plant (<i>Colocasia antiquorum</i>), but sweet potatoes +were cultivated in the dry districts, and yams in Kauai and +Niihau. They also cultivated bananas and sugar cane and the <i>awa</i> +or <i>kava</i> plant for its narcotic properties.</p> + +<p>Fishing was carried on with great ingenuity and skill. Extensive +fish ponds were built along the coasts, which must have cost immense +labor.</p> + +<p>Their food was cooked then, as now, by steaming it in an <i>imu</i> +or underground oven with heated stones. Fire was produced by friction, +viz., by rubbing a hard, pointed stick in a groove made in a piece of +softer wood, until the little heap of fine powder collected at the end +of the groove took fire.</p> + +<p>There was no circulating medium which served the purpose of money, +and all trade was conducted by barter.</p> + + +<h3>CIVIL POLITY.</h3> + +<p>The civil polity of the ancient Hawaiians was far more despotic +than that of any other Polynesian tribe. The community was divided +into three classes, namely:</p> + +<p class="list">1. The nobility or <i>Alii</i> +(N. Z. <i>Ariki</i>), comprising the kings and chiefs of various +grades of rank.</p> + +<p class="list">2. The priests, <i>Kahuna</i> +(N. Z. <i>Tahunga</i>), including priests, sorcerers and +doctors.</p> + +<p class="list">3. The common people, <i>Makaainana</i>, or +laboring class.</p> + +<p>There was a wide and impassable gulch between the chiefs and common +people. In fact, the distinction between them was primarily of a +sacred and religious character. The chief was believed to be descended +from the gods, and to be allied to the invisible powers.</p> + +<p>The contrast in stature and appearance as well as in bearing +between the chiefs and common people was very striking. Only +<!-- Page 61 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">61</a></span> +a chief had the right to wear the feather cloak and helmet, or the +ivory clasp, <i>Niho Palaoa</i>; his canoe and his sails were painted +red, and on state occasions he was attended by men carrying +<i>kahilis</i> or plumed staffs of various colors. When the highest +chiefs appeared abroad, all the common people prostrated themselves +with their faces upon the ground. It was death for a common man to +remain standing at the mention of the king's name in song, or when the +king's food, water or clothing was carried past; to put on any article +of dress belonging to him, to enter his enclosure without permission, +or to cross his shadow or that of his house. If a common man entered +the dread presence of the sovereign, he must crawl prone on the +ground, <i>kolokolo</i>, and leave in the same manner.</p> + +<p>The head chief of an island was styled the <i>Moi</i>, and his +dignity was generally hereditary. There were usually at least four +independent kinglets in the group, and sometimes the single Island of +Hawaii was divided between several independent chiefs.</p> + + +<h3>LAND TENURE.</h3> + +<p>As a rule, the chiefs were the only proprietors of the soil. They +were supposed to own not only the soil and all that grew upon it, not +only the fish of the sea, but also the time and labor of their +people.</p> + +<p>The accepted theory was that all the lands belonged to the king, of +whom they were held by the high chiefs in fief; <i>i. e.</i>, on +condition of rendering him tribute and military service. Each of these +district chieftains divided up his territory among an inferior order +of petty chiefs, who owed to him the same service and obedience that +he owed to the king.</p> + +<p>In this way the land was subdivided again and again, while at the +bottom of the scale were the miserable serfs who tilled the +soil. These last were simply tenants at will, liable to be +dispossessed +<!-- Page 62 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">62</a></span> +of their little holdings at any time, or to be stripped of their +personal property at the requisition of the chief.</p> + + +<h3>WAR.</h3> + +<p>Wars were frequent and cruel. There were numerous wars to settle +the succession to the sovereignty of an Island, as well as contests +between the head chiefs of the principal Islands. For example, the +chiefs of Oahu often contended with those of Maui for the possession +of Molokai, and there were frequent wars between the chiefs of Hawaii +and those of Maui for the district of Hana.</p> + +<p>Their weapons consisted of long spears, <i>pololu</i>; javelins, +<i>ihe</i>; daggers, <i>pahoa</i>, and clubs made of hard wood. They +never used the bow in war, but slings made of cocoanut<!--[sic]--> +fiber or human hair were extensively employed. They used no shields, +but became wonderfully expert in catching or parrying spears thrown at +them.</p> + +<p>Sometimes they engaged in sea fights, with large fleets of canoes +on each side. In general no quarter was given to the vanquished, but +there were certain sanctuaries called <i>puuhonuas</i>, which afforded +an inviolable refuge in time of war. Cannibalism was regarded by them +with horror and detestation.</p> + + +<h3>RELIGION.</h3> + +<p>The religious system of the ancient Hawaiians was very similar to +that of other Polynesians. It consisted in a great measure of nature +worship. To their minds all the powers of nature, especially those +that are mysterious and terrible, were conceived of as living and +spiritual beings. Thus the volcano, the thunder, the whirlwind, the +meteor and the shark were feared as being either the embodiment or the +work of malevolent spirits (<i>akuas</i>).</p> + +<p>The four great gods, Kane, Kanaloa, Ku and Lono, who were worshiped +throughout Polynesia, originally belonged to +<!-- Page 63 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">63</a></span> +this class, as is shown by the cosmogony of the New Zealand +Maoris. Among these four Kane held the primacy. The souls of great +chiefs went to his abode after death.</p> + +<p>Pele, the dread goddess of volcanoes, and her numerous family, +dwelt in the crater of Kilauea, but also caused the eruptions of Mauna +Loa and Hualalai. In Hawaii she was feared more than any other +deity.</p> + +<p>One large class of <i>akuas</i> were supposed to be incarnated in +certain species of animals, which were feared or believed to have a +supernatural character, as the shark.</p> + +<p>Another class of deities, which included most of the professional +gods, consisted of deified spirits of the dead. The <i>Aumakuas</i> +were tutelar deities, attached to particular families, who were often +deified ancestors. Sickness and disease were generally caused by their +displeasure.</p> + + +<h3>CEREMONIAL SYSTEM.</h3> + +<p>There were two hereditary orders of priests, endowed with lands, +who kept up the elaborate liturgy and ritual of the temples, and also +preserved whatever knowledge of astronomy, history, medicine, etc., +had been handed down to them.</p> + +<p>The tabu<!--[sic]--> system covered the entire daily life of the +people with a vast network of minute regulations and penalties. Thus, +it was tabu for men and women to eat together, or even to have their +food cooked in the same oven. Women were forbidden to eat pork, +bananas, cocoanuts,<!--[sic]--> or turtle and certain kinds of fish, +on pain of death. There were certain tabu days when no canoe could be +launched, no fire lighted, and when no sound could be made, on pain of +death. Even dogs had to be muzzled and fowls shut up in calabashes for +twenty-four hours at a time.</p> + +<p>The human sacrifice was the crowning act of the ancient worship, +offered only on certain solemn occasions, and at the temples +(<i>Heiaus</i>) of the highest class.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 64 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">64</a></span> +</div> + +<p>Whenever a temple was to be dedicated, a new house to be built for +the chief, or a new war canoe to be launched, many of the people fled +to the mountains and lay hidden till the danger was past.</p> + +<p>Besides the regular priesthood, there were many kinds of medicine +men, necromancers or mediums, sorcerers and diviners, who preyed upon +the superstition and credulity of their countrymen. The belief that +all forms of disease were caused by evil spirits, and their fear of +being "prayed to death" (<i>anaana</i>), kept the people in a state of +abject fear.</p> + +<p>There is too much reason to believe that during several centuries +preceding the discovery of the Islands they had been deteriorating in +many respects. As the historian Fornander has stated:</p> + +<p>"It was an era of strife, dynastic ambitions, internal and external +wars on each Island, with all their deteriorating consequences of +anarchy, depopulation, social and intellectual degradation, loss of +liberty, loss of knowledge, loss of arts."</p> + + +<h3>DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS.</h3> + +<p>It seems to be almost certain that one Juan Gaetano, a Spanish +navigator, saw Hawaii in 1555 A. D. A group of islands, the +largest of which was called La Mesa, was laid down in the old Spanish +charts in the same latitude as the Hawaiian Islands, but 10 degrees +too far east.</p> + +<p>On the eighteenth of January, 1778, Captain Cook, the great +navigator, while sailing due north from the Society Islands, +discovered the Islands of Oahu and Kauai. The next day he landed at +Waimea, Kauai, where he held friendly intercourse with the natives, +and afterwards laid in supplies at Niihau. He finally sailed for +Alaska, Feb. 2d. The Hawaiians looked upon him as an incarnation of +the god Lono, and upon his crew as supernatural beings. Returning from +the Arctic the following winter, he anchored in Kealakekua bay, +January 17th, 1779. +<!-- Page 65 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">65</a></span> +Here he received divine honors and was loaded with munificent presents +of the best that the islands could produce. By his rash and arbitrary +conduct, however, he involved himself in an affray with the natives, +in which he was killed on February 14th, 1779.</p> + +<p>The spot where he fell is now marked by an appropriate monument.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="HOME" id="HOME"></a> +<img src="images/home.jpg" width="500" height="366" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="SCHOOL" id="SCHOOL"></a> +<img src="images/school.jpg" width="500" height="384" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL. +</span></div> + + +<h3>EARLY TRADERS.</h3> + +<p>For seven years after the death of Captain Cook no foreign vessel +ventured to touch at the Islands. After that time many of the vessels +engaged in the fur trade on the northwest coast of America called at +the Islands for supplies on their way to Canton or ran down here to +spend the winter. Waimea, Kauai, and Kealakekua bay were the two +harbors most frequented by them. Fire arms, powder and shot were the +articles most in demand among the natives.</p> + + +<h3>THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA.</h3> + +<p>At the death of Kalaniopuu, <i>Moi</i>, of Hawaii, in 1782, a civil +war broke out, which rent the Island into three petty sovereignties, +which were presently reduced to two.</p> + +<p>The districts of Kohala and Kona were held by Kamehameha, a nephew +of the late king, while the other districts were loyal to his son, +Keoua. After a sanguinary war lasting nine years (during which +Kamehameha had ravaged West Maui and conquered the district of +Hamakua), he became master of the whole of the Island of Hawaii by the +assassination of his rival, Keoua, at Kawaihae, in 1791.</p> + + +<h3>VISITS OF VANCOUVER.</h3> + +<p>The name of Capt. George Vancouver is still cherished as that of a +wise and generous benefactor to these Islands. During his +<!-- Page 66 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">66</a></span> +survey of the northwest coast of America in 1792-1794, he made three +visits to the Islands. He uniformly refused to sell fire arms or +ammunition to the chiefs, but gave them useful plants and seeds, and +presented Kamehameha with the first cattle and sheep ever landed in +the Islands. On the 25th of February, 1794, Kamehameha and his chiefs +voluntarily placed Hawaii under the protection of Great Britain, in +token of which the British flag was hoisted on shore at +Kealakekua.</p> + + +<h3>CONQUEST OF OAHU.</h3> + +<p>After the death of Kahekili, the sovereign of the leeward Islands, +in 1794, a civil war broke out between his brother Kaeo and his son +Kalanikupule, in which the former was killed. Soon after Kalanikupule +treacherously massacred Captains Brown and Gordon, who had assisted +him in the late war, and seized<!--Typo: siezed--> their vessels in +the harbor of Honolulu.</p> + +<p>Having put his guns and ammunition on board, he proposed to sail +immediately for Hawaii, in company with a fleet of war canoes, to +attack Kamehameha. But the English sailors who had been reserved to +navigate the two vessels, suddenly rose at midnight, recaptured them, +and sailed for Hawaii, where they informed Kamehameha of all that had +occurred.</p> + +<p>Kamehameha saw that his opportunity had now come, and lost no time +in mustering all the war canoes and fighting men of Hawaii.</p> + +<p>After overrunning West Maui and touching at Molokai, he landed in +Waialea bay, Oahu, in the latter part of April, 1795. There he spent a +few days in organizing his army before marching up the valley of +Nuuanu, where Kalanikupule had prepared to make his last stand. The +Oahu warriors were soon routed and pursued up the valley. Some of the +fugitives were hemmed in and driven over the "<i>Pali</i>," or +precipice, at the head of Nuuanu, a little north of the present +road.</p> + +<p>This victory made Kamehameha master of all the Islands +<!-- Page 67 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">67</a></span> +except Kauai and Niihau. With the exception of a short insurrection in +Hawaii, there was peace during the rest of his reign.</p> + + +<h3>DECREASE OF POPULATION.</h3> + +<p>The decrease of the population during this period must have been +very rapid. Vancouver in 1792, Broughton in 1796, and Trumbull in +1801, were strongly impressed with the misery of the common people and +their rapid decrease in numbers. This was partly the result of wars, +but was still more due to the diseases and vices introduced by +foreigners. In the summer of 1804 a pestilence, supposed to have been +the cholera, carried off half of the population of Oahu. Botany Bay +convicts had introduced the art of distilling liquor before the year +1800, and drunkenness had become very prevalent.</p> + + +<h3>THE SANDAL-WOOD TRADE.</h3> + +<p>During the first quarter of the present century the sandal-wood +trade was at its height. This wood was in great request at Canton, +where it was sold for incense and the manufacture of fancy +articles. It was purchased by the picul of 133-1/2 pounds, the price +varying from eight to ten dollars for the picul. This wood, while it +lasted, was a mine of wealth for the chiefs, by means of which they +were enabled to buy fire arms, liquor, boats and schooners, as well as +silks and other Chinese goods, for which they paid exorbitant +prices.</p> + + +<h3>THE CESSION OF KAUAI.</h3> + +<p>In March, 1810, Kaumualii, the last King of Kauai, visited Honolulu +in the ship Albatross, Capt. Nathan Winship, in order to have an +interview with Kamehameha. It was then arranged between the two chiefs +that Kaumualii should continue to hold his Island in fief of +Kamehameha during his life-time, on condition of paying tribute.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 68 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">68</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>RUSSIAN AGGRESSIONS.</h3> + +<p>During the year 1815 a Dr. Scheffer was sent to the Islands by +Baranoff, the Russian Governor of Alaska. He built a fort at Waimea, +for Kaumualii, on which the Russian colors were displayed, and urged +him to place himself under the protection of Russia. On hearing of +this, Kamehameha sent a large force to Honolulu, where a substantial +fort was built during the year 1816. He also sent orders to Kaumualii +to expel Dr. Scheffer, which was done.</p> + + +<h3>DEATH OF KAMEHAMEHA.</h3> + +<p>Kamehameha I. died on May 8th, 1819, at Kailua, Hawaii. His +work was done. He had consolidated the group under a strong +government, put an end to feudal anarchy and petty wars, and thus +prepared the way for civilization and Christianity.</p> + + +<h3>ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY.</h3> + +<p>In accordance with his will, his eldest son, Liholiho, was +installed as king, with the title of Kamehameha II., and +Kaahumanu, his favorite queen, as premier, to exercise equal powers +with the young prince, whose dissolute and reckless character is well +known.</p> + +<p>Their first important act was the abolition of the tabu<!--[sic]--> +system, which took place at a great feast held at Kailua in October, +1819, at which men and women ate together in public for the first +time. This was followed by the general burning of idols and temples +throughout the group.</p> + +<p>Kekuaokalani, a cousin of Liholiho, put himself at the head of the +adherents of the ancient faith, but was defeated and slain in the +battle of Kuamoo, fought about December 20th, 1819.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 69 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">69</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>THE ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN MISSIONARIES.</h3> + +<p>The pioneer company of American missionaries to these Islands +arrived at Kailua, April 4th, 1820. They soon reduced the language to +writing and commenced printing the first book in January, 1822. They +found in the Hawaiians an amiable and highly receptive race, eager for +knowledge and easily influenced for good or evil. The principal +opposition to reform was made by foreigners.</p> + + +<h3>THE WHALING FLEET.</h3> + +<p>The first whale ship called at Honolulu in 1820, and was soon +followed by many others. Their number soon increased to 100 every +year, and the furnishing of supplies for them became the chief +resource of the Islands, as the sandal-wood became exhausted.</p> + + +<h3>DEATH OF LIHOLIHO.</h3> + +<p>The young king, accompanied by his wife and six chiefs, embarked +for England, November 27, 1823, on an English whale ship. On their +arrival in London they received the utmost hospitality and courtesy, +but in a few weeks the whole party was attacked by the measles, of +which the king and queen both died.</p> + + +<h3>REBELLION ON KAUAI.</h3> + +<p>Meanwhile, on the death of Kaumualii, a rebellion broke out in +Kauai, led by his son, Humehume. A desperate assault was made on the +fort at Waimea, which was repulsed with loss. Over 1,000 warriors were +sent down from Oahu and Maui, and a battle was fought near Hanapepe, +August 18th, 1824, in which the rebels were routed.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 70 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">70</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>VISIT OF LORD BYRON.</h3> + +<p>The frigate "Blonde," commanded by Lord Byron, cousin of the poet +of that name, was commissioned to convey the remains of the late king +and queen, together with their retinue, back to their native land. It +arrived at Honolulu, May 6th, 1825, when the royal remains were +deposited in a mausoleum with impressive funeral ceremonies.</p> + +<p>Kauikeaouli, the younger brother of Liholiho, was proclaimed king +with the title of Kamehameha III., and Kaahumanu as regent during +his minority. Her administration was signalized by a series of +outrages at Lahaina and Honolulu, committed by a depraved class of +foreigners who resented certain regulations made to restrict public +prostitution.</p> + +<p>Com. Jones visited the Islands in the "Peacock" in 1826, and +concluded the first treaty between the Hawaiian Islands and the United +States. The next year the first written laws were published against +murder, theft, adultery and gambling.</p> + + +<h3>THE ROMAN CATHOLIC MISSION.</h3> + +<p>The first Roman Catholic missionaries arrived at Honolulu, July +7th, 1827, on the ship "Comet," from Bordeaux, and soon gathered a +congregation. They were members of the so-called "Picpusian Order," or +"Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary." Unfortunately, +misunderstandings arose, and from a mistaken belief that they were +fomenting discord and sedition, the chiefs caused them to be deported +to San Pedro, California, in January, 1832.</p> + + +<h3>ACCESSION OF KAMEHAMEHA III.</h3> + +<p>Kaahumanu died June 5th, 1832, and was succeeded by Kinau, +half-sister of the king. The king's minority was declared to be at an +end in March, 1833. A tract of land was leased to Ladd & Co. in +1835, and about the same time a silk +<!-- Page 71 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">71</a></span> +plantation was commenced by Peck & Titcomb. Cotton was raised and +manufactured on a small scale at Kailua, Hawaii.</p> + + +<h3>PERSECUTIONS.</h3> + +<p>During the next few years the chiefs persisted in a harsh and +unjustifiable policy, which imperiled the independence of the +country.</p> + +<p>On the return of the two banished priests from California, in +April, 1837, they were ordered to return in the same vessel in which +they had come, and were obliged to go on board of it. Meanwhile the +British sloop of war "Sulphur," Captain Belcher, and the French +frigate "Venus," Captain Du Petit Thouars, arrived and interposed in +behalf of the priests. As a compromise, they were landed again on +condition that they should leave by the first favorable +opportunity. Again on the 3d of November, another priest, +Rev. L. Maigret, and a lay brother arrived from Valparaiso, but +were not allowed to land. Finally Revs. Maigret and Bachelot left in a +schooner for Bonabe, Micronesia. From 1835 to 1839 the persecution of +native converts was resumed, but was at last put an end to by the +declaration of rights promulgated June 4th, 1839, and the king's edict +of toleration, issued June 17th.</p> + + +<h3>VISIT OF THE "ARTEMISE."</h3> + +<p>In consequence of these proceedings the French frigate "Artemise," +Captain Laplace, was ordered to Honolulu, where it arrived July 9th, +1839.</p> + +<p>Captain Laplace immediately sent the Government a peremptory letter +demanding that full religious liberty be proclaimed, and that the sum +of $20,000 be brought on board by noon of the 12th, or hostilities +would commence. The required treaty was signed and the money promptly +paid, and on the 16th, a commercial convention was also signed.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 72 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">72</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>FIRST CONSTITUTION.</h3> + +<p>The declaration of rights, mentioned above, which guaranteed +religious liberty, produced a feeling of security unknown before, and +formed the first step towards establishing individual property in +land. The first constitution was proclaimed October 8th, 1840. It +constituted a Legislature, consisting of a House of Hereditary Nobles, +and Representatives to be chosen by the people, who voted as a +separate house. It also defined the duties of the Governors and +provided for a Supreme Court.</p> + + +<h3>THE FIRST EMBASSY.</h3> + +<p>During the next two years the French and English consuls seemed to +vie with each other in the manufacture of petty grievances. Aware of +the dangers impending over it, the Hawaiian Government sent an embassy +to the United States, Great Britain and France, in July, 1842, which +consisted of Messrs. Haalilio, William Richards and Sir George +Simpson, one of the governors of the Hudson Bay Company.</p> + + +<h3>VISIT OF CAPTAIN MALLET.</h3> + +<p>On the 24th of August, 1842, the French corvette "Embuscade," +Captain Mallet, arrived at Honolulu, having been sent to investigate +complaints of the violation of the Laplace Convention, chiefly +relating to local school matters. Having received an able and +courteous reply to his demands, he informed the king that Admiral Du +Petit<!--Normalize DuPetit--> Thouars might be expected the next +spring to settle these matters.</p> + + +<h3>THE CESSION TO LORD PAULET.</h3> + +<p>The dispatch of the embassy to Europe and the visit of Captain +Mallet both served to bring to a head the designs of +Mr. Charlton, the British consul. He suddenly left for London, +<!-- Page 73 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">73</a></span> +leaving Alexander Simpson as acting consul, in order to defeat the +objects of the embassy. In consequence of their representations, +H. B. M. frigate "Carysford," commanded by George Paulet, +was ordered to Honolulu, arriving there February 10, 1843. On the +arrival of the king from Lahaina, Lord Paulet sent him six demands, +threatening war if they were not acceded to by 4 p. m. of the next +day. These demands chiefly related to a fraudulent land claim of +Charlton's, and to decisions of the courts in certain civil suits +between foreigners. Before the hour set for hostilities had arrived, +the king acceded to the demands under protest, and appealed to the +British Government for damages. But a fresh series of demands having +been made, and claims for damages having been trumped up amounting to +$80,000, the king decided, by Dr. Judd's advice, to forestall the +intended seizure of the Islands by a provisional cession, pending an +appeal to the justice of the home government.</p> + +<p>The act of cession was carried into effect February 25th, 1843. The +British flag took the place of the Hawaiian for five months, and a +body of native troops was organized and drilled by British +officers.</p> + +<p>The country was meanwhile governed by a mixed commission consisting +of Lord Paulet, Lieutenant Frere, a Mr. Mackay and +Dr. Judd.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="COLLEGE" id="COLLEGE"></a> +<img src="images/college.jpg" width="500" height="355" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +OAHU COLLEGE. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="PAUAHI" id="PAUAHI"></a> +<img src="images/pauahi.jpg" width="500" height="352" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE. +</span></div> + + +<h3>THE RESTORATION.</h3> + +<p>On being informed of these events, Admiral Thomas, +Commander-in-Chief of H. B. M.'s naval forces in the Pacific +ocean, immediately sailed from Valparaiso for the Islands, arriving at +Honolulu July 25th, 1843. He immediately issued a proclamation, +declaring in the name of his government that he did not accept of the +provisional cession of the Hawaiian Islands, and on the 31st restored +the national flag with impressive ceremonies. His course was fully +approved of by the home government, +<!-- Page 74 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">74</a></span> +and certainly tended to exalt the reputation of his country for +justice and magnanimity in dealing with inferior races.</p> + + +<h3>THE RECOGNITION OF HAWAIIAN INDEPENDENCE.</h3> + +<p>Meanwhile the Hawaiian embassadors,<!--[sic]--> who had been joined +by Mr. Marshall, the king's envoy, had done effective work in +London and Paris. At their request the matters in dispute had been +referred to the law advisers of the crown, who decided in favor of the +Hawaiian Government on every point except the Charlton land claim. At +length, on the 28th of November, 1843, the two governments of France +and England issued a joint declaration in which they recognized the +independence of the Islands, and reciprocally engaged "never to take +possession, either directly or under the title of a protectorate, or +under any other form, of any part of the territory of which they are +composed."</p> + + +<h3>ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT.</h3> + +<p>Both the king and his advisers saw that in order to maintain a +permanent government it was necessary to combine both the native and +foreign elements together in one common organization, and to make the +king the sovereign not merely of one race or class, but of all. During +the next few years the executive departments of the Government and the +judiciary were organized by a group of men of remarkably high +character and ability.</p> + + +<h3>LAND TITLES.</h3> + +<p>During the period of 1846-1855 the ancient tenure of land was +abolished, and the foundation laid of individual property in land. In +the first place, the king as feudal suzerain divided the lands of the +kingdom between himself and each one of the +<!-- Page 75 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">75</a></span> +chiefs, his feudatories, this partition being recorded in a book +called the <i>Mahele</i> Book, or Book of Division. After this first +partition was closed, out of four million acres there remained in the +king's hands about two and a half millions. The king then redivided +the lands which had been surrendered to him, setting apart about a +million and a half acres for the Government, and reserving for himself +as his private domain, about a million acres, including the best of +the lands. The common people were granted fee simple titles for their +house lots and the lands which they actually cultivated for +themselves, called <i>Kuleanas</i> or homesteads.</p> + + +<h3>THE "REPRISALS" OF 1849.</h3> + +<p>From 1843 till 1848 the most amicable relations continued to exist +between France and the Hawaiian Government. But this state of things +was then reversed by M. Dillon, the new French consul, who +endeavored to reopen all old disputes and to create new grievances in +every possible way. His principal grounds of complaint were the high +duty on brandy and the alleged partiality shown to the English +language. On the 12th of August, 1849, the French frigate +"Poursuivante," Admiral De Tromelin, arrived at Honolulu, and was +joined the next day by the corvette "Gassendi."</p> + +<p>On the 22d the admiral sent to the king ten demands, drawn up by +M. Dillon, allowing the Hawaiian Government three days in which +to comply with them.</p> + +<p>As these demands were firmly but courteously refused, an armed +force was landed on the 25th, which took possession of the deserted +fort, the custom house and other buildings, and the harbor was +blockaded for ten days. The fort was dismantled and the king's private +yacht confiscated by way of "reprisal," after which the "Poursuivante" +sailed for San Francisco, taking M. Dillon as a passenger.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 76 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">76</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>THE SECOND EMBASSY TO FRANCE.</h3> + +<p>The king immediately sent Dr. Judd as special commissioner to +France, accompanied by the two nephews of the king, Alexander, the +heir-apparent, and Lot Kamehameha.</p> + +<p>But on arriving in Paris they found that M. Dillon had +preceded them, and still retained the confidence of the Minister of +Foreign Affairs.</p> + +<p>The embassy, however, agreed with Lord Palmerston upon the basis of +a new treaty with Great Britain.</p> + + +<h3>THE U. S. PROTECTORATE.</h3> + +<p>The French corvette "Serieuse" arrived at Honolulu, December 13, +1850, bringing M. Perrin, Commissioner of France, and remained in +port three months.</p> + +<p>To the surprise of all, he presented again the identical ten +demands of his predecessor, and resumed his policy of petty annoyance +and interference with internal affairs of the kingdom. At length his +attitude became so menacing that the king and privy council passed a +proclamation placing the Islands provisionally under the protectorate +of the United States. This action was ratified by the next +Legislature. Although it was finally declined by the United States, +it had the desired effect, and the obnoxious demands were dropped.</p> + + +<h3>THE CONSTITUTION OF 1852.</h3> + +<p>Was a very liberal one for the times, and has formed the basis of +all succeeding constitutions. The nobles were to be appointed by the +kings for life. The representatives, who were to be not less than +twenty-four in number, were to be elected by universal suffrage.</p> + + +<h3>INDUSTRIAL PROGRESS.</h3> + +<p>Between the years 1850 and 1860 a large part of the government land +was sold to the common people in small tracts at nominal prices.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 77 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">77</a></span> +</div> + +<p>The rapid settlement of California opened a new market for the +productions of the Islands, and gave a great stimulus to agriculture. +For a time large profits were made by raising potatoes for the +California market. Wheat was cultivated in the Makawao district, and a +steam flouring mill was erected in Honolulu in 1854. The next year 463 +barrels of Hawaiian flour were exported. A coffee plantation was +started at Hanalei, Kauai, in 1842, and promised well, but was +attacked by blight after the severe drought of 1851-2. The export of +coffee rose to 208,000 pounds in 1850, but then fell off. The export +of sugar only reached 500 tons in 1853. The sugar mills were generally +worked by oxen or mules, and the molasses drained in the old fashioned +way.</p> + + +<h3>THE UNFINISHED ANNEXATION TREATY.</h3> + +<p>The year 1853 was rendered memorable by a terrible epidemic of +small-pox, which carried off several thousand people on the Island of +Oahu. During that and the following year there was an active agitation +in Honolulu in favor of annexation to the United States. The king +favored it as a refuge from impending dangers. The missionaries +generally opposed it, fearing that its effects would be injurious to +the native race. The negotiations were carried on between +Mr. Gregg, the American Minister, and Mr. Wyllie, the +Minister of Foreign Affairs, and a draft of the treaty was completed +in June, 1854.</p> + +<p>The representatives of France and Great Britain remonstrated with +the king against it, while the heir-apparent was also opposed to +it. The negotiation was still pending when the king suddenly died on +the 15th of December, 1854.</p> + +<p>His adopted son and heir, Alexander Liholiho, was immediately +proclaimed king, under the title of Kamehameha IV.</p> + + +<h3>THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV.</h3> + +<p>Was uneventful. He was married to Emma Rooke, a chiefess partly of +English descent, who both by her character and her +<!-- Page 78 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">78</a></span> +talents was worthy of the position. By their personal exertions the +king and queen succeeded in raising the funds with which to found the +"Queen's Hospital" at Honolulu. Their little son, the "Prince of +Hawaii," died in 1862, at four years of age, and with him expired the +hope of the Kamehameha dynasty. During the same year Bishop Staley, +accompanied by a staff of clergymen, arrived at Honolulu and commenced +the Anglican Mission.</p> + +<p>During the following year the king was rapidly failing in health, +and on the 30th of November, 1863, he died, at the early age of +twenty-nine, and was succeeded by his elder brother, Prince Lot +Kamehameha.</p> + +<p>The development of the country during his reign was nearly at a +stand-still. The cultivation of wheat as well as that of coffee was +given up, but the culture of rice was commenced in 1860, and proved to +be a great success.</p> + + +<h3>THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V.</h3> + +<p>The reign of Kamehameha V. was memorable for the change of the +constitution which he made on his own authority, soon after coming to +the throne. The right of suffrage was made to depend on a small +property qualification and on ability to read and write. The Nobles +and representatives were henceforth to sit and vote in one +chamber. During his reign the Board of Education was constituted, the +Bureau of Immigration formed, and the Act passed in 1865 to segregate +the lepers.</p> + +<p>A treaty of reciprocity with the United States was negotiated, but +failed of ratification by the Senate.</p> + +<p>A destructive eruption from Mauna Loa took place in 1868, in the +District of Kau. The almost total destruction of the whaling fleet in +the Arctic Sea in 1871 was a serious blow to the prosperity of the +Islands.</p> + +<p>The King died suddenly December 11th, 1872, and with him ended the +line of the Kamehamehas.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 79 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">79</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>THE REIGN OF LUNALILO.</h3> + +<p>As Kamehameha V. died without appointing any successor, the +choice devolved upon the Legislature, which met on the 8th of January, +1873, and elected William Lunalilo, cousin of the late king, by a +large majority, amid general rejoicing. During that year, the proposal +to cede or lease Pearl Harbor to the United States in consideration of +a treaty of commercial reciprocity gave rise to an extensive +agitation, which intensified the suspicion and race prejudice that +already existed.</p> + +<p>The execution of the law for the segregation of lepers helped to +widen the breach, and the effects were seen in the mutiny of the +household troops in September, 1873, which had the sympathy of the +populace.</p> + +<p>The King's health was already failing, and on the 3d of February, +1874, he died of pulmonary consumption. By his will he left the bulk +of his real estate to found a home for aged and indigent +Hawaiians.</p> + + +<h3>ACCESSION OF KALAKAUA.</h3> + +<p>Again the Legislature was called together to elect his successor on +the 12th of February, 1874. The two rival candidates were the +Queen-Dowager Emma and David Kalakaua, the latter of whom was elected +by thirty-nine votes to six. A large mob, composed of Queen Emma's +partisans, surrounded the court house during the election, after which +they broke into the building and assaulted the members of the +Legislature.</p> + +<p>At the request of the Cabinet, a body of marines was landed from +the U. S. ships "Tuscarora" and "Portsmouth," and another from +H. B. M.'s ship "Tenedos," which dispersed the rioters and +guarded the public buildings for a week. Kalakaua was sworn in at noon +the next day, and duly proclaimed King.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 80 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">80</a></span> +</div> + +<h3>THE RECIPROCITY TREATY.</h3> + +<p>During the next year negotiations were opened with the United +States for a treaty of commercial reciprocity, which was ratified in +June, 1875, and finally went into operation in September, 1876, in +spite of bitter opposition in both countries. The development of the +resources of the Islands, which has resulted from this treaty, has +surpassed all expectation. In connection with it there has also been a +large increase of the foreign elements in the population.</p> + + +<h3>THE KING'S TOUR AROUND THE WORLD.</h3> + +<p>On the 20th of January, 1881, King Kalakaua set out on a tour +around the world, accompanied by the late Col. C. H. Judd, +and Mr. W. N. Armstrong. He was received with royal honors +in Japan, and afterwards visited China, Siam, Johore and British +India. After visiting the Khedive of Egypt, the party made the tour of +Europe, and returned home by way of the United States, arriving in +Honolulu Oct. 29, 1881.</p> + + +<h3>REACTIONARY POLICY OF KALAKAUA.</h3> + +<p>Unlike his predecessors, Kalakaua seemed to regard himself as merely a +king of the native Hawaiians, and foreign residents as alien invaders. +It also seemed to be his chief aim to change the system of government +into a personal despotism, in which he should have unchecked control of +the Government Treasury. Thus he took it upon himself in July, 1878, and +again in August, 1880, to dismiss a Ministry, without assigning any +reason, immediately after it had been triumphantly sustained by a vote +of the Legislature. On the latter occasion, his appointment of Celso +Caesar Moreno as premier called forth the protest of the representatives +of three great Powers, and such an uprising of the people that he had to +give way. Adroit politicians were not wanting to flatter his vanity, +defend his +<!-- Page 81 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">81</a></span> +follies, and show him how to violate the spirit and intent of the +Constitution, while keeping within the letter of the law. The +Legislatures were packed with subservient office-holders, while every +artifice was used to debauch the native electorate and to foment race +prejudice. The national debt grew up from $389,000 in 1880 to +$1,936,000 in 1887. At the same time, under the existing law, no +foreigner could be naturalized without the King's approval.</p> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="MASONIC" id="MASONIC"></a> +<img src="images/masonic.jpg" width="500" height="363" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +MASONIC TEMPLE. +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="MUSEUM" id="MUSEUM"></a> +<img src="images/museum.jpg" width="500" height="359" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM. +</span></div> + + +<h3>THE REVOLUTION OF 1887.</h3> + +<p>After the legislative session of 1886, the King was virtually his +own prime minister, and went from one folly to another, until his +acceptance of two bribes, one of $75,000 and another of $80,000 in +connection with the assignment of an opium license, precipitated the +revolution of 1887. Overawed by the unanimity of the movement, and +deserted by his followers, the King yielded without a struggle. The +Constitution which he was pleased to sign on the 7th of July, 1887, +was a revision of that of 1864, intended to put an end to mere +personal government, and to make the executive responsible to the +representatives of the people. Office-holders were made ineligible to +seats in the Legislature. The Ministers were henceforth to be +removable only upon a vote of want of confidence passed by a majority +of all the elective members of the Legislature. The Nobles, instead of +being appointed by the King, were to be elected for terms of six +years, by electors who should be possessed of taxable property worth +$3,000, or in receipt of an annual income of $600.</p> + + +<h3>THE INSURRECTION OF 1889.</h3> + +<p>The opposition of the Court and of other adherents of the old +regime, to the reforms of 1887, led to an insurrection headed by +R. W. Wilcox, on the 30th of July, 1889 which was promptly +<!-- Page 82 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">82</a></span> +put down, but not without bloodshed. Seven of the rioters were killed +and a large number wounded.</p> + +<p>There can be little doubt that the late King and his sister were +accessory to this ill-advised outbreak.</p> + + +<h3>ACCESSION OF LILIUOKALANI.</h3> + +<p>In order to recruit his health, the King visited California in +November, 1890. In spite of the best medical attendance, he continued +to fail, and breathed his last on the 20th of January, 1891, in San +Francisco. His remains were brought to Honolulu in the +U. S. S. "Charleston," arriving there January 29th, 1891. On +the same day, his sister took the oath to maintain the Constitution, +and was proclaimed Queen, under the title of Liliuokalani.</p> + + +<h3>THE REVOLUTION OF 1893.</h3> + +<p>The ex-Queen in a published statement has since declared that she +signed the Constitution unwillingly. The history of her short reign +shows that it was her unaltered purpose to restore autocratic +government. In short, she was determined to govern as well as to +reign.</p> + +<p>The decision of the Supreme Court that the term of the last Cabinet +expired with the King, gave her an opportunity (which she improved), +to dictate terms in advance to the incoming Cabinet, and to secure +control of all appointments. The legislative session of 1892 was +protracted to eight months chiefly by her determination to retain her +control of the Executive, as well as to carry through the opium and +lottery bills. Meanwhile she had caused a Constitution to be drawn +up, which would practically, have transformed the government from a +limited to an absolute monarchy, besides disfranchising a class of +citizens who paid two-thirds of the taxes. This Constitution she +undertook to spring upon the country by a <i>coup d'etat</i>, on +<!-- Page 83 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">83</a></span> +the day of the prorogation of the Legislature, January 14th, 1893.</p> + +<p>Fortunately, at the critical moment, when her preparations were +complete, her Ministers shrank from sharing the responsibility of such +a revolutionary act, and induced her to postpone it. In such an +undertaking to hesitate is fatal.</p> + +<p>Again there was a general uprising of the conservative part of the +community similar to that of 1887. But this time public opinion +condemned all half way measures, and declared the monarchy to be +forfeited by its own act.</p> + +<p>The Reform leaders reorganized their forces, and formed a +Provisional Government, which was proclaimed January 17th, 1893 from +the Government Building. The U. S. S. "Boston," which had +unexpectedly arrived from Hilo on the day of the prorogation, landed a +force on the 16th, to protect the lives and property of American +citizens, in case of disorder or incendiarism. The Queen's ministers +availed themselves of the presence of these troops on shore as an +excuse for their inaction, and persuaded the Queen to resign under +protest, and to appeal to the government of the United States.</p> + +<p>A treaty of annexation was soon after negotiated with the United +States during President Harrison's administration, which was withdrawn +by President Cleveland immediately after his accession. The failure of +his attempt to restore the monarchy by diplomacy is well known.</p> + + +<h3>THE REPUBLIC OF HAWAII.</h3> + +<p>During the next year a convention was elected, which sat in +Honolulu during the month of June, 1894, and framed a new Constitution +for the country, and the Republic of Hawaii was formally proclaimed +July 4, 1894.</p> + +<p>Another royalist conspiracy was formed during the fall of that +year, which resulted in the insurrection of January 6th, +<!-- Page 84 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">84</a></span> +1895, which was promptly crushed by the patriotic citizens of the +Republic.</p> + +<p>A dangerous epidemic of Asiatic cholera in the following September, +was stamped out by the united efforts of the public spirited citizens +of Honolulu.</p> + +<p>For four years, in spite of hostile influences from without and +enemies at home, the Republic has maintained peace and order, +administered justice, carried on extensive internal improvements, +advanced education, and kept the financial credit of the nation above +par in the markets of the world.</p> + +<div style="margin: auto; max-width: 36em"> +<div> +<!-- Page 85 --> +<span class="pagenum"> + <a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">85</a> + <a name="OFFICIAL_DIRECTORY" id="OFFICIAL_DIRECTORY"></a> +</span> +</div> + +<h3>OFFICIAL DIRECTORY, REPUBLIC OF HAWAII.</h3> + +<h4>EXECUTIVE COUNCIL.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent"> +Sanford B. Dole, President of the Republic of Hawaii.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Foreign Affairs.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">James A. King, Minister of the Interior.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Samuel M. Damon, Minister of Finance.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">William O. Smith, Attorney-General.</p> + + +<h4>COUNCIL OF STATE.</h4> + +<table width="100%" summary="council of state"> +<tr> +<td class="hangindent"> +William C. Wilder, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +George W. Smith, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +Mark P. Robinson, +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="hangindent"> +Cecil Brown, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +John Phillips, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +John Ena, +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="hangindent"> +P. C. Jones, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +D. L. Naone, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +Samuel M. Ka-ne, +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="hangindent"> +J. A. Kennedy, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +A. G. M. Robertson, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +John Nott, +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class="hangindent"> +C. Bolte, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +E. C. Winston, +</td> + +<td class="hangindent"> +J. P. Mendonca. +</td> +</tr> + +</table> + + +<h4>SUPREME COURT.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent"> +Hon. A. F. Judd, Chief Justice.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Hon. W. F. Frear, First Associate +Justice.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Hon. W. Austin Whiting, Second Associate +Justice.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Henry Smith, Chief Clerk.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Geo. Lucas, Deputy Clerk.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">James Thompson, Second Deputy Clerk.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">J. Walter Jones, Stenographer.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 86 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">86</a></span> +</div> + +<h4>CIRCUIT JUDGES.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent"> +First Circuit—Alfred W. Carter, Antonio Perry, Oahu.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Second Circuit—J. W. Kalua.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Third and Fourth +Circuits—S. L. Austin.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Fifth Circuit—J. Hardy.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Offices and Court-room in Court House, King +street. Sitting in Honolulu: First Monday in February, May, August and +November.</p> + + +<h4>DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Executive Building, King street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Henry E. Cooper, Minister Foreign +Affairs.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">George C. Potter, Secretary.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Alexander St. M. Mackintosh, Clerk.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Miss Kate Kelley, Stenographer.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">B. L. Marx, Clerk Executive Council.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">James W. Girvin, Secretary Chinese +Bureau.</p> + + +<h4>DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Executive Building, King street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent">James A. King, Minister of the +Interior.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Chief Clerk, John A. Hassinger.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Assistant Clerks, James H. Boyd, +H. C. Meyers, Stephen Mahaulu, George C. Ross, +Edward S. Boyd.</p> + + +<h4>CHIEFS OF BUREAUS, INTERIOR DEPARTMENT.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent">Surveyor-General, W. D. Alexander.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Superintendent Public Works, W. E. Rowell.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Superintendent Water Works, Andrew Brown.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Inspector Electric Lights, John Cassidy.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 87 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">87</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Registrar of Conveyances, T. G. Thrum.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Road Supervisor, Honolulu, W. H. Cummings.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Insane Asylum, Dr. Geo. H. Herbert.</p> + + +<h4>BOARD OF FIRE COMMISSIONERS.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent">Andrew Brown, Charles Crozier and +J. H. Fisher.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">James H. Hunt, Chief +Engineer,<!--Typo: Enginee--> H. F. D.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">William R. Sims, Secretary.</p> + + +<h4>BUREAU OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY.</h4> + +<p class="hangindent">President, the Minister of the Interior. Allan +Herbert, Thomas King, Wray Taylor, E. W. Jordan. Joseph Marsden, +Commissioner and Secretary.</p> + + +<h4>DEPARTMENT OF FINANCE.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Executive Building, King street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Minister of Finance, Samuel M. Damon.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Auditor-General, H. Laws.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Registrar of Accounts, W. G. Ashley.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Clerk of Finance Office, +E. R. Stackable.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Collector-General of Customs, +James B. Castle.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Tax Assessor, Oahu, Jonathan Shaw.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Postmaster-General, J. M. Oat.</p> + + +<h4>CUSTOMS BUREAU.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Custom House, Esplanade, Fort street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent"> +Collector-General, James B. Castle.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Deputy Collector, Frank B. McStocker.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Harbor Master, Captain A. Fuller.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Port Surveyor, George C. Stratemeyer.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Storekeeper, .........</p><!--Add dots--> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 88 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">88</a></span> +</div> + + +<h4>DEPARTMENT OF ATTORNEY-GENERAL.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Executive Building, King street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent"> +Attorney-General, William O. Smith.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Deputy Attorney-General, E. P. Dole.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Clerk, J. M. Kea.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Marshal, A. M. Brown.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Deputy Marshal, H. R. Hitchcock.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Jailor<!--[sic]--> Oahu Prison, J. A. Low.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Prison Physician, C. B. Cooper, M. D.</p> + + +<h4>DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Judiciary Building.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent"> +Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Public Instruction.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Commissioners, Professor William Dewitt +Alexander, Mrs. Emma Louisa Dillingham, +Mr. William A. Bowen, Mrs. Alice Clark Jordan, +Mr. H. M. von Holt.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">H. S. Townsend, Inspector-General of +Schools.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">J. F. Scott, Deputy Inspector-General of +Schools.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">C. T. Rodgers, Secretary of Department.</p> + + +<h4>BOARD OF IMMIGRATION.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Judiciary Building.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent"> +President, James A. King.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Members of Board of Immigration, +J. B. Atherton, Joseph Marsden, D. B. Smith, +James G. Spencer, J. Carden. Secretary, Wray Taylor.</p> + + +<h4>BOARD OF HEALTH.</h4> + +<h5>Office in Judiciary Building.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent">President, William O. Smith.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Secretary, Charles Wilcox.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 89 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">89</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Members, D. Keliipio, C. A. Brown, +N. B. Emerson, M. D.; F. R. Day, M. D.; +C. B. Wood, M. D., and T. F. Lansing.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Port Physician, Dr. Francis Day.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dispensary, Dr. H. W. Howard.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Leper Settlement, Dr. R. K. Oliver.</p> + + +<h4>POLICE COURT.</h4> + +<h5>Police Station Building, Merchant street.</h5> + +<p class="hangindent"> +George H. de la Vergne, Magistrate.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">William Cuelho, Clerk.</p> + + +<hr class="mini" /> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="KAWAIAHAO" id="KAWAIAHAO"></a> +<img src="images/kawaiahao.jpg" width="500" height="356" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian). +</span></div> + +<div class="illo"> +<a name="CHURCH" id="CHURCH"></a> +<img src="images/church.jpg" width="337" height="500" alt="" /> +<span class="caption"><br /> +CENTRAL UNION CHURCH. +</span></div> + + +<h4>FOREIGN REPRESENTATIVES IN HONOLULU.</h4> + +<h5><i>Diplomatic.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">United States—Envoy Extraordinary and +Minister Plenipotentiary, Albert S. Willis, Esq.; residence, King +St. Ellis Mills, Esq., Secretary of Legation.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Portugal—Charge d'Affaires and +Consul-General, Senhor A. de Souza Canavarro; residence, Beretania +St.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Great Britain—Commissioner and +Consul-General, Captain A. G. S. Hawes.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Japan—Diplomatic Agent and Consul-General, +Mr. H. Shimamura; residence, Nuuanu +Ave. H. I. J. M. Eleve Consul, Mr. K. Mimashi, +Secretary H. I. J. M. Consulate-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">France—Consul and Commissioner, +Mons. Louis Voisson; Chancellor of Legation, +Mons. A. Vizzavona.</p> + +<h5><i>Consular.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">United States—Consul-General, Ellis Mills. +W. Porter Boyd, United States Vice and Deputy Consul-General. +</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 90 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">90</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Italy—F. A. Schaefer, Consul. (Dean +of the Consular Corps.)</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Netherlands—J. H. Paty, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Denmark—H. R. Macfarlane, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Mexico, H. Renjes, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Peru—Bruce Cartwright, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Chile—Julius Hoting, Consul.</p><!--Typo: Chili--> + +<p class="hangindent">Austria-Hungary—J. F. Hackfeld, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Germany—J. F. Hackfeld, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Belgium—H. Focke, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Great Britain—T. R. Walker, +Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Spain—H. Renjes, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Russia—J. F. Hackfeld, Acting +Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Sweden and Norway—Charles Weight, Acting +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">China—Goo Kim Fui, Commercial Agent; Wong +Kwai, Assistant Commercial Agent.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">U. S. Consular Agent, Kahului, +A. J. Dickens, Acting.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">U. S. Consular Agent, Mahukona, +C. J. Falk.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">U. S. Consular Agent, Hilo, Charles +Furneaux.</p> + +<hr class="mini" /> + + +<h4>PRINCIPAL HAWAIIAN REPRESENTATIVES ABROAD.</h4> + + +<h5><i>United States.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Washington, +D. C.—Francis M. Hatch, Envoy Extraordinary and +Minister Plenipotentiary; Major Frank P. Hastings, Charge +d'Affaires and Secretary of Legation.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">New York—E. H. Allen, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Chicago—Fred W. Job, Consul-General +for the States of Illinois, Michigan, Ohio, Indiana and Wisconsin.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">San Francisco—Charles T. Wilder, +Consul-General for the Pacific States, California, Oregon, Nevada and +Washington; J. F. Soper, Vice and Deputy Consul-General.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 91 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">91</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Boston—Gorham D. Gilman, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Portland, Oregon—J. McCracken, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Port Townsend—James G. Swan, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Seattle—John H. Carter, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Tacoma—J. T. Steeb, Acting Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Philadelphia—Robert H. Davis, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">San Diego—H. P. Wood, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Detroit—A. L. Bresler, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Great Britain.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">London—Manley Hopkins, Consul-General; +Cyril Hopkins, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Liverpool—Harold Janion, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Bristol—Mark Whitwill, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Hull—W. Moran, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Newcastle-on-Tyne—E. Biesterfeld, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Falmouth—Cecil Robert Broad, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dover (and the Cinque Ports)—Francis +Wm. Prescott, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Swansea—H. Goldberg, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cardiff—J. Bovey, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Edinburgh and Leith—E. G. Buchanan, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Glasgow—Peter Denniston, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dundee—J. G. Zoller, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dublin—R. Jas. Murphy, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Queenstown—Geo. B. Dawson, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Belfast—W. A. Ross, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Middlesborough—B. C. Atkinson, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>British Colonies.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Toronto, Ontario—J. Enoch Thompson, +Consul-General; Col. Geo. A. Shaw, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">St. John's, +N. B.—Allan O. Crookshank, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Rimouski—J. N. Pouliot, +Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Montreal—Dickson Anderson, Consul. +<!-- Page 92 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">92</a></span> +Yarmouth, N. S.—Ed. F. Clements, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Victoria, B. C.—R. P. Rithet, +Consul-General for British Columbia.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Vancouver, +B. C.—J. W. McFarland, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Sydney, +N. S. W.—W. E. Dixon, Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Melbourne, Victoria—G. N. Oakley, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Brisbane, +Queensland—Alex. B. Webster, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Hobart, Tasmania—Hon. Audley Coote, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Launceston, Tasmania—Geo. Collins, +Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Newcastle, +N. S. W.—W. J. Gillam, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Auckland, N. Z.—James Macfarlane, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dunedin, N. Z.—W. G. Neill, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Gibraltar—H. Schott, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>France and Colonies.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Paris—Alfred Houle, Charge d'Affaires and +Consul-General; A. N. H. Teyssier, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Marseilles—........, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Bordeaux—Ernest de Boissac, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dijon—H. F. J. Vieilhomme, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Liborne—C. Schaessler, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cette—Julius Chavasse, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Grenoble—J. L. Garcin, +Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Papeete, Tahiti—E. A. Bonet, +Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Spain.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Barcelona—Enrique Minguez, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cadiz—J. Shaw, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Valencia—Julio Soler, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Malaga—F. T. de Navarra, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cartagena—J. Paris, Consul.</p> + + +<div> +<!-- Page 93 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">93</a></span> +</div> + + +<h5><i>Portugal and Colonies.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Lisbon—A. F. de Serpa, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Oporto—Narciso T. M. Ferro, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Madeira Island—L. D. F. Branco, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cape Vincent, Cape de Verde +Islands—Clarimundo Martins, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Lagos, Cape de Verde Islands—Manuel Jose +Barbosa, Vice-Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Azores Islands.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Ponta Delgardo (St. Michaels)—Senhor +Bernardo Machado de Faria Maia, Consul-General; A. da Silva Moreira, +Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Italy.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Rome—Dwight Benton, Consul-General; +Hale P. Benton, Vice and Deputy Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Palermo, Sicily—A. Tagliavia, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Genoa—Raphael de Luchi, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Holland.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Amsterdam—D. H. Schmull, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dordrecht—P. J. Bouwman, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Japan.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Tokio—R. W. Irwin, Minister +Resident.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Kobe—C. P. Hall, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Yokohama—B. C. Howard, Consul; +Dr. Stuart Eldridge, M. D., Sanitary Inspector.</p> + + +<h5><i>China.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Hong Kong—J. J. Bell Irving, Acting +Consul-General; Dr. Gregory P. Jordan, M. D., Sanitary +Inspector.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 94 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">94</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Amoy—Robert H. Bruce, Consul; +Dr. Hugh MacDougald, M. D., Sanitary Inspector.</p> + + +<h5><i>Belgium.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Antwerp—Victor Forge, Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Ghent—E. Coppieters, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Liege—J. Blanpain, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Bruges—E. Van Den Brande, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Sweden and Norway.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Stockholm, Sweden—C. A. Engvalls, +Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Christiana, Norway—L. Samson, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Gothemburg, Sweden—Gustaf Kraak, +Vice-Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Austria.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Vienna—Hugo Schonberger, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Germany and Colonies.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Bremen—H. F. Glade, Charge d'Affaires +and Consul-General; J. F. Muller, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Hamburg—E. F. Weber, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Frankfort-on-Main—J. Kopp, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Dresden—A. P. Russ, Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Canary Islands.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Las Palamas—L. Falcon y Quevedo, Consul; +J. B. De Laguna, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Santa Cruz de la +Palma—Antonio C. de las Casas, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Areciefe de Lanzarote—E. Murales, +Vice-Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Mexico.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Mexico—Col. W. J. De Gress, +Consul-General; R. H. Baker, Vice-Consul.</p> + +<div> +<!-- Page 95 --> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">95</a></span> +</div> + +<p class="hangindent">Manzanillo—Robert James Barney, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Ensenada—James Moorkens, Vice-Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Central and South America.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Valparaiso, South America—David Thomas, +Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Lima, South America—F. L. Crosby, +Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Montevideo, South America—Conrad Hughes, +Consul.</p> + + +<h5><i>Philippine Islands.</i></h5> + +<p class="hangindent">Iloilo—Geo. Shelmerdine, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Manila—Jasper M. Wood, Consul.</p> + +<p class="hangindent">Cebu—Geo. A. Cadell, Consul.</p> + +<div class="hugeskip"></div> + +</div> + +</div> <!-- End of global div--> + + +<div class="tnote"> +<h3> +<a name="Transcribers_Endnote" id="Transcribers_Endnote"></a> +Transcriber's Note +</h3> + +<p> +With the exception of OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA, the illustrations +and cover image come from a slightly different printing of the +pamphlet than the text. +</p> + +<p> +Minor typographical errors and irregularities have been corrected. +</p> + +<p> +The table of contents and list of illustrations have been added for +the reader's convenience. +</p> +</div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 29383-h.htm or 29383-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/9/3/8/29383/ + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/29383-h/images/church.jpg b/29383-h/images/church.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3f18be --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/church.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/college.jpg b/29383-h/images/college.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3acddc --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/college.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/cover.jpg b/29383-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..45737f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/dole.jpg b/29383-h/images/dole.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7e8a15 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/dole.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/ewa.jpg b/29383-h/images/ewa.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a42fcf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/ewa.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/executive.jpg b/29383-h/images/executive.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1e687a --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/executive.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/hamakua.jpg b/29383-h/images/hamakua.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9ae351 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/hamakua.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/home.jpg b/29383-h/images/home.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5b59ec --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/home.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/house.jpg b/29383-h/images/house.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d50de77 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/house.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/judiciary.jpg b/29383-h/images/judiciary.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b023d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/judiciary.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/kawaiahao.jpg b/29383-h/images/kawaiahao.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a027fe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/kawaiahao.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/map.jpg b/29383-h/images/map.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5230336 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/map.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/map_sm.jpg b/29383-h/images/map_sm.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3b7ddf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/map_sm.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/masonic.jpg b/29383-h/images/masonic.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..635e8ef --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/masonic.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/museum.jpg b/29383-h/images/museum.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea1b087 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/museum.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/nuuanu.jpg b/29383-h/images/nuuanu.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c981ec2 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/nuuanu.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/pauahi.jpg b/29383-h/images/pauahi.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7370b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/pauahi.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/pauoa.jpg b/29383-h/images/pauoa.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e4d276 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/pauoa.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/pineapple.jpg b/29383-h/images/pineapple.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2beef88 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/pineapple.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/puna.jpg b/29383-h/images/puna.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0d2071 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/puna.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/railroad.jpg b/29383-h/images/railroad.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2880e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/railroad.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/rice.jpg b/29383-h/images/rice.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..33d649c --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/rice.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/school.jpg b/29383-h/images/school.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cec2f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/school.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/steamship.jpg b/29383-h/images/steamship.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..411fb6b --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/steamship.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/valley.jpg b/29383-h/images/valley.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bab056d --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/valley.jpg diff --git a/29383-h/images/waikiki.jpg b/29383-h/images/waikiki.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d770166 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383-h/images/waikiki.jpg diff --git a/29383.txt b/29383.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a4cf09 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3978 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Hawaiian Islands + +Author: The Department of Foreign Affairs + +Release Date: July 12, 2009 [EBook #29383] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + + + + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + + + + + + + + +THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS + +THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, +COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL. + + +[Illustration (Cover image).] + + +[Illustration: MAP of the HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.] + + + + +CONTENTS + +CHAPTER I. 3 +CHAPTER II. 12 +CHAPTER III. 16 +CHAPTER IV. 20 +CHAPTER V. 37 +CHAPTER VI. 43 +CHAPTER VII. 52 +CHAPTER VIII. 58 +OFFICIAL DIRECTORY. 85 + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + +MAP OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. +SANFORD B. DOLE, President of the Republic of Hawaii. +EXECUTIVE BUILDING. / JUDICIARY BUILDING. +EWA MILL. / VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII. +PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS. / PINEAPPLE PLANTATION. +COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA. / COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA. +OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA. / VOLCANO HOUSE. +KOHALA RAILROAD. / RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY. +NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU. / WAIKIKI BEACH. +LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS. / KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL. +OAHU COLLEGE. / PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE. +MASONIC TEMPLE. / KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM. +KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian). / CENTRAL UNION CHURCH. + + +[Illustration: SANFORD B. DOLE. President of the Republic of Hawaii.] + + + + +THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS + +THEIR RESOURCES AGRICULTURAL, COMMERCIAL AND FINANCIAL. + + +Coffee, +_THE COMING STAPLE PRODUCT._ + + +ISSUED UNDER THE AUSPICES +OF THE +DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS, +1896. + + +HONOLULU: +PRINTED BY THE HAWAIIAN GAZETTE COMPANY. + + + + +The following pamphlet has been compiled for the purpose of giving +information to those intending to invest in the industries of the +Hawaiian Islands. The information can be vouched for as correct. The +portion dealing with agriculture is from the pen of Joseph Marsden, +Esq., Commissioner of Agriculture. The digest of the land law has been +prepared by J. F. Brown, Esq., Commissioner of Public Lands. The +historical portion has been written by Prof. Alexander, Chief of the +Government Survey and author of a "Short History of the Hawaiian People" +and other works. The pamphlet has been planned, edited and in part +written by Alatau T. Atkinson, Esq., ex-Inspector General of Schools, +and now General Superintendent of Census. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + + +GENERAL INFORMATION. + +The Hawaiian Islands are situated in the North Pacific Ocean and lie +between longitudes 154 deg. 40' and 160 deg. 30' West, and latitudes 22 deg. 16' and +18 deg. 55' North. They are thus on the very edge of the tropics, but their +position in mid-ocean and the prevalence of the northeast trade wind +gives them a climate unequalled by any other portion of the globe--a +perpetual summer without an enervating heat. In the Hawaiian Islands +Americans and Europeans can and do work in the open air, at all seasons +of the year, as they cannot in countries lying in the same latitudes +elsewhere. To note an instance, Calcutta lies a little to the north of +the latitude of Kauai, our most northerly Island, and in Calcutta the +American and European can only work with his brain; hard physical labor +he cannot do and live. On the Hawaiian Islands he can work and thrive. + + +RAINFALL AND TEMPERATURE. + +The rainfall varies, being greater on the windward side of the Islands, +and increasing up to a certain elevation. Thus, at Olaa, on the Island +of Hawaii, windward side and elevation of about 2,000 feet, the rainfall +from July 1st, 1894, to June 30, 1895, was 176.82 inches, while at +Kailua, on the leeward side, at a low level, it was only 51.21 inches +during the same period. + +The temperature also varies according to elevation and position. On the +Island of Hawaii you can get any climate from the heat of summer to actual +winter at the summits of the two great mountains. A meteorological record, +kept carefully for a period of twelve years, gives 89 deg. as the highest and +54 deg. as the lowest temperature recorded, or a mean temperature of 71 deg. 30' +for the year. A case of sunstroke has never been known. People make no +special precautions against the sun, wearing straw and soft felt hats +similar to those worn in the States during the summer months. + + +WINDS. + +The prevailing winds, as mentioned above, are the northeast trades. +These blow for about nine months of the year. The remainder of the +period the winds are variable and chiefly from the south. The Islands +are outside the cyclone belt, and severe storms accompanied by thunder +and lightning are of rare occurrence. + + +HEALTH. + +The Islands possess a healthy climate. There are no virulent fevers such +as are encountered on the coast of Africa or in the West India Islands. +Epidemics seldom visit the Islands, and when they do they are generally +light. A careful system of quarantine guards the Islands now from +epidemics from abroad. Such grave diseases as pneumonia and diphtheria +are almost unknown. Children thrive wonderfully. + + +AREA. + +For practical purposes--and these lines are written for practical +men--there are eight Islands in the Hawaiian group. The others are mere +rocks, of no value to mankind at present. These eight Islands, beginning +from the northwest, are named Niihau, Kauai, Oahu, Molokai, Lanai, +Kahoolawe, Maui and Hawaii. The areas of these Islands are as follows: + + =Square Miles.= + + Niihau 97 + Kauai 590 + Oahu 600 + Molokai 270 + Maui 760 + Lanai 150 + Kahoolawe 63 + Hawaii 4210 + ---- + Total 6740 + +The Islands that interest an intending immigrant are Hawaii, Maui, Oahu +and Kauai. It is on these Islands that coffee, fruits, potatoes, corn +and vegetables can be raised by the small investor, and where land can +be obtained on reasonable terms. + + +HAWAII. + +The Island of Hawaii is the largest in the group, and presents great +varieties of soil and climate. The windward side, which includes the +districts of North Kohala, Hamakua, Hilo and Puna, is copiously watered +by rains and, in the Hilo district, the streams rush impetuously down +every gulch or ravine. The leeward side of the Island, including South +Kohala, North and South Kona, and Kau, is not exposed to such strong +rains, but an ample supply of water falls in the rain belt. The Kona +district has given the coffee product a name in the markets of the world. + +On this Island are now situated numerous sugar plantations. Coffee +employs the industry of several hundred owners, ranging from the man +with 200,000 trees to him who has only an acre or so. There are +thousands upon thousands of acres at present uncultivated and only +awaiting the sturdy arms and enterprising brains of the men of the +temperate zone to develop them. + + +MAUI. + +Maui is also a very fine Island. Besides its sugar plantations, it has +numerous coffee lands, especially in the eastern part, which are just +now being opened up. The western slopes of Haleakala, the main mountain +of Maui, are covered with small farms where are raised potatoes, corn, +beans and pigs. Again, here, thousands of acres are lying fallow. + + +HONOLULU. + +On Oahu is the capital, Honolulu. It is a city numbering thirty thousand +inhabitants and is pleasantly situated on the south side of the Island. +The city extends a considerable distance up Nuuanu Valley and has wings +extending northwest and southeast. It is a city of foliage. Except in +the business blocks, every house stands in its own garden, and some of +the houses are wonderfully beautiful. + +The city is lighted with electric light; there is a very complete +telephone system, and tram cars run at short intervals along the +principal streets and continue out to a sea-bathing resort and public +park, four miles from the city. There are numerous stores where all +kinds of goods can be obtained. In this particular Honolulu occupies +a position ahead of any city of similar size. The public buildings +are handsome and commodious. There are numerous churches, schools, a +public library of over 10,000 volumes, Y. M. C. A. Hall, Masonic Temple, +Odd Fellows' Hall and Theater. There is frequent steam communication +with San Francisco, once a month with Victoria (British Columbia), and +twice a month with New Zealand and the Australian Colonies. Steamers +also connect Honolulu with China and Japan. There are three evening +daily papers published in English, one daily morning paper, and two +weeklies. Besides these there are papers published in the Hawaiian, +Portuguese, Japanese and Chinese languages, and also monthly magazines +in various tongues. + + +OAHU'S OPPORTUNITIES. + +The Island of Oahu presents excellent opportunities for the investor. +Acres upon acres of land remain undeveloped among its teeming valleys, +the energies and wealth of the population having been devoted to the +development of the sugar lands on the larger Islands. + +A line of railroad has been constructed which at present runs along the +coast to a distance of thirty miles from the city. It is proposed to +continue this line completely around the Island. This railroad opens up +rich coffee and farming lands and affords ready means of transport for +the produce, and an expeditious method for obtaining the necessary +supplies, etc., from the capital. The management of the railroad offers +special inducements for would-be investors to see the country, and +special rates should they conclude to settle. + + +KAUAI. + +Kauai is called the "Garden Island," it is so well watered and so +luxuriant in vegetation. The Island is at present largely devoted to the +cultivation of sugar. Rice also cuts a considerable figure in the +agricultural production of Kauai. That it can produce coffee is +undoubted, but there is a timidity about embarking in the industry, +because some forty years ago the experiment of a coffee plantation was +tried, and owing to misjudgment of location and soil, failed. Since then +the cultivation of coffee has come to be more thoroughly understood, and +there is no doubt that quantities of land suitable for such cultivation +are now lying, like the sleeping beauty, waiting for the kiss of +enterprise to make them awake into usefulness and profit for mankind. + +There is room on the Hawaiian Islands for at least ten times the present +population. The climate, soil and social conditions all tend to make +them a desirable home for those who are willing to work, and have a +moderate capital to begin with. + + +GOVERNMENT. + +The Government of the Hawaiian Islands is a Republic. Up to the year +1893 it had been a limited monarchy, but at that date it was felt, by +the progressive party in the state, that monarchy had had its day, and +that the friends of such a form of government should give way to more +liberal institutions, assimilating to the institutions of the United +States, and to become a part of which Great Republic is the earnest +desire of all those who have the interests of the Islands at heart. The +monarchy, in a bloodless revolution, disappeared and the Republic took +its place. + +The Republic is a republic of progress, and under the Government thus +established every facility has been given for developing and improving +the country. The President is elected for six years. The Legislature +consists of a Senate and House of Representatives, all members being +elected by popular vote. The Senators are elected for a term of six +years, and voters for Senators must have real property worth $1,500, or +personal property worth $3,000, or an income of not less than $600 per +annum. The vote for Representatives is based on manhood suffrage. + + +TAXATION. + +All males between the ages of 20 and 60 pay a personal tax of $5, viz: +Poll tax, $1; road tax, $2; school tax, $2. Land pays a tax of one per +cent. on the cash value, and personal property a similar rate. Carts pay +$2, brakes $3, carriages $5, dogs $1, female dogs $3. From the above it +will be seen that the taxes are not heavy as compared with other +countries; moreover, there are no local taxes of any kind. + + +METHOD OF ACQUIRING LAND. + +Land can be obtained from the Government by two methods, viz.; The cash +freehold system, and the right of purchase leases. Under the first +system the land is sold at auction. The purchaser pays one-quarter in +cash and the rest in equal installments of one, two and three years, +interest being charged at the rate of six per cent. upon the unpaid +balance. Under this system the purchaser is bound to maintain a home on +the land from the commencement of the second year to the end of the +third. The right of purchase leases are drawn for twenty-one years at a +rental of eight per cent. on the appraised value of the land. The lessee +has the privilege of purchasing the land, after the third year, _at the +original appraised value_, provided 25 per cent. of the land is reduced +to cultivation, and other conditions of the lease filled. In this case a +home must be maintained from the end of the first year to the end of the +fifth year. The limit of first-class agricultural land obtainable is 100 +acres. This amount is increased on lands of inferior quality. Under the +above conditions the applicant must be 18 years of age and obtain +special letters of denization. Land can also be obtained from the +various land and investment companies, and from private parties. The +full land law will be treated of in Chapter VI. of this pamphlet. + +[Illustration: EXECUTIVE BUILDING.] + +[Illustration: JUDICIARY BUILDING.] + + +JUDICIARY, POLICE, ETC. + +There is a thoroughly efficient judiciary consisting of a Supreme Court, +five Circuit Courts in which trials by jury are conducted, and District +Courts in every district. The higher courts are presided over by well +trained, educated men. There is an efficient police force in every part +of the group. The inhabitants are law-abiding and crimes of violence are +very rare. There is very little petty theft, and even in Honolulu, the +greatest center of population and a seaport town, many of the houses are +left with doors unlocked at night. + + +SCHOOLS. + +There is an excellent system of free public schools taught in the +English language, the teachers in many cases being imported from the +United States. The main plan of the system is modelled upon the public +school system of the United States, modified to meet the wants of a +heterogeneous population. The children are instructed in writing, +reading, composition, arithmetic, geography, both local and general. The +books are uniform and obtainable at the same price as in the United +States. The schools are strictly non-sectarian. There is no district, +however remote, in which there is no school. The only people who cannot +read and write are those who come from abroad. Those born in the Islands +are compelled by law to take advantage of the education offered. Besides +the common school education, opportunities are given at various centers +for a higher education equivalent to the grammar grade of the United +States, and in Honolulu a high school and collegiate course can be +obtained at a small cost. + + +CHURCHES. + +The various Christian denominations are represented and all forms are +tolerated. The country churches of the Protestant denominations are +chiefly conducted by Hawaiian pastors, the Roman Catholic by French and +German priests, who are mostly good linguists and speak Hawaiian, +English and Portuguese, besides their mother tongue. Wherever there is a +large collection of English speaking people a Protestant church is +usually supported by them. In Honolulu there is a large number of +churches, Congregational, Roman Catholic, Episcopalian, Methodist and +Mormon. There is a Sunday law, and all work which is not absolutely +necessary is prohibited on that day. Rational outdoor amusement is not +prohibited, such as riding, boating, shooting, etc., and the Government +Band plays at the public park at Waikiki every Sunday afternoon. + + +PHYSICIANS. + +In every district of the Islands the Government supports a doctor, who +gives his services to indigent Hawaiians free of charge--others have to +pay. In many places there are physicians settled who carry on a private +practice. + + +TELEPHONES. + +The Islands of Oahu, Kauai and Hawaii have telephones to every +accessible point. The rent of the instrument is moderate, and a small +charge is made for those who do not care or cannot afford to possess an +instrument of their own. On Maui the telephone is at present established +only in part. + + +COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ISLANDS. + +Communication between the Islands is by steamer; of these some seventeen +are constantly plying from port to port, affording weekly communication +with the capital. The regular passenger steamers are well fitted with +cabins, have electric bells and electric lights and all modern +accommodations. + + +POSTAL MATTERS. + +There is a regular postal system, and on the arrival of a steamer at +any main point, mail carriers at once start out to distribute the +mail through the district. The Hawaiian Islands belong to the Postal +Union, and money orders can be obtained to the United States, Canada, +Great Britain, Germany, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, the Netherlands, +Portugal, Hong Kong and Colony of Victoria, as well as local orders +between the Islands. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + + +AGRICULTURAL INDUSTRIES. + +The mainstay of the Hawaiian Islands has, for the last thirty-five +years, been the sugar industry. From this source a large amount of +wealth has been accumulated. But the sugar industry requires large +capital for expensive machinery, and has never proved remunerative to +small investors. An attempt has been made at profit-sharing and has met +with some success, the small farmer cultivating and the capitalist +grinding at a central mill. Of late years, moreover, the small farmer +has been steadily developing in the Hawaiian Islands and attention has +been given to other products than sugar. + +Rice, neither the European nor the American can cultivate as laborers. +It requires working in marshy land, and though on the Islands it yields +two crops a year, none but the Chinaman can raise it successfully. A +dry-land or mountain rice has been introduced, which will be treated +under the head of Agricultural possibilities. + +The main staple after sugar and rice is coffee. Of this hundreds of +thousands of trees have been planted out within the last five years. +This is essentially the crop of the future and bids fair to become as +important a staple as sugar. Coffee does not require the amount of +capital that sugar does, and it can be worked remuneratively upon a +small area. It is estimated that at the end of the fourth year the +return from a 75-acre coffee plantation will much more than pay the +running expenses, while from that time on a return of from eight to ten +thousand dollars per annum may be realized. + +On page 32 will be found an estimate of the cost of establishing a +75-acre coffee plantation from the first to the seventh year. + +Fruits can also be cultivated to advantage. At present the banana trade +of the Islands amounts to over 100,000 bunches per annum, valued at over +$100,000, and the quantity might be very easily quadrupled. The banana +industry may be regarded as in its infancy. The export of the fruit is +only from the Island of Oahu, but there are thousands of acres on the +other Islands of the group which could be profitably used for this +cultivation and for nothing else. The whole question of the banana +industry hinges on the market. At present the market is limited. + +Limes and oranges can be cultivated and the fruit can be easily packed +for export; at present the production does not meet the local market. +The fruits can be raised to perfection. The Hawaiian orange has a fine +flavor and the Hawaiian lime has an aroma and flavor far superior to +that cultivated in Mexico and Central America. In the uplands of Hawaii +and Maui potatoes can be and are raised. Their quality is good. Corn is +also raised. In these industries many Portuguese, Norwegians and others +have embarked. Both these products find an ample local market. The corn +is used largely for feed on the plantations. The corn is ground with the +cob and makes an excellent feed for working cattle, horses and mules. + +In the uplands, where the climate is temperate, as at Waimea, Hawaii, +vegetables of all kinds can be raised; excellent cauliflowers, cabbages +and every product of the temperate zone can be grown to perfection. + +Cattle raising in so small a place as the Hawaiian Islands does not +present great opportunities except for local consumption. Pigs are +profitable to the small farmer. In the Kula district of Maui pigs are +fattened upon the corn and potatoes raised in the district. The price of +pork, dressed, is 25 cents per pound in Honolulu and about 15 cents per +pound in the outside districts. The Chinese, of whom there are some +15,000 resident on the various Islands, are extremely fond of pork, so +that there is a large local market, which has to be supplemented by +importations from California. + +Attention has lately been given to fiber plants, for which there are +many suitable locations. Ramie grows luxuriantly, but the lack of proper +decorticating and cleaning machinery has prevented any advance in this +cultivation. + +Sisal hemp and Sansevieria have been experimented with, but without any +distinct influence upon the trade output. + +The cultivation of pineapples is a very growing industry. In 1895 pines +were exported from the Islands to San Francisco to the value of nearly +$9,000. This has grown up in the last half dozen years. There is every +reason to think that canning pineapples for the Coast and other markets +can be made profitable. + +The guava, which grows wild, can also be put up to profit, for the +manufacture of guava jelly. It has never been entered upon on a large +scale, but to the thrifty farmer it would add a convenient slice to his +income, just as the juice of the maple adds an increase to the farmer of +the Eastern States. Well made guava jelly will find a market anywhere. +In England it is regarded as a great delicacy, being imported from the +West India Islands. Besides the guava there are other fruits which can +be put up to commercial profit, notably the poha or Cape gooseberry +(Physalis Edulis). This has been successfully made into jams and jelly, +which command an extensive local sale and should find their way into +larger markets. + +In point of fact, outside the great industries of sugar, coffee and +rice, there is a good field for many minor industries which can be +carried on with profit by those who know what work is, and are willing +to put their shoulders to the wheel. + +In the Hawaiian Islands a simple life can be lived, and entering +gradually upon the coffee industry, a good competence can be obtained +long before such could be realized by the agriculturalist elsewhere. +However, it is useless to come to the Islands without the necessary +capital to develop the land that can be obtained. + +Between arriving and the time that the crops begin to give returns there +is a period where the living must be close, and cash must be paid out +for the necessary improvements. The land is here, the climate is here; +it only requires brains, a small capital and energy to realize such +comfort and independence as can not be realized in old countries, in +one-fourth of the time. + + + + +CHAPTER III. + + +COFFEE. + +The most promising of all the Island products, outside of sugar, is +coffee. No finer coffee in the world is produced than that of the +Hawaiian Islands. It requires care and does not produce a crop until the +third year, but it remains till the fifth year to make a proper +realization upon the investment. It is evidently necessary to give a +very full description of the coffee plant and its method of culture to +assure intending immigrants of what is before them. + +Coffee is a shrub belonging to the family of the Rubiaceae. Botanists +divide it into many species, but it can be practically divided into two +sections, Arabian coffee and Liberian coffee, or in point of fact, +Asiatic and African. In the Hawaiian Islands coffee grows best between +500 and 2,000 feet above the sea level, though there are cases in which +it has done well close to the sea. It requires a loose porous soil and +does not thrive well in heavy clayey ground which holds much water. Of +such heavy land there is very little in the Hawaiian Islands. The soil +is generally very porous. + +It is very evident that coffee will thrive and give good results in +varying conditions of soil and degrees of heat. In these Islands it grows +and produces from very nearly at the sea level to the elevation of 2,600 +feet. The highest elevation of bearing coffee, known here, is twenty-five +miles from the town of Hilo and in the celebrated Olaa district. + +[Illustration: EWA MILL.] + +[Illustration: VALLEY SCENE, HAWAII.] + +With such a range it is evident that, in a tropical climate, the +cultivation of coffee presents greater opportunities for an investor +than other tropical products. + +For years it was thought that coffee would only grow to advantage in the +Kona district of Hawaii. Practical experiment has shown that it can be +grown with success in almost any part of the Islands. + +The opening up of the Olaa portion of the Puna district, by a well +macadamized road leading from Hilo to the Volcano, may be regarded as +the commencement of the coffee industry on a large scale on the Hawaiian +Islands. There are now over fifty plantations where six years ago there +was nothing but tangled and dense forest. The Olaa land is Government +property and can be acquired under the land law. There are still 10,000 +acres not taken up. The location is very desirable as there is direct +communication with Hilo by an excellent road and the crop can be readily +taken to the shipping point. Indeed it can not be long before a railroad +will be built; when this takes place a far larger extent of land will be +available for coffee growing in this section of the country. The soil in +the Olaa district is deep and wonderfully prolific. + +Other portions of Puna also present many fertile lands, and coffee +plantations in those parts are coming to the front showing excellent +results. A considerable number of investors have opened up coffee +plantations in them, all of which are doing excellently. These +plantations, to the knowledge of the writer are, many of them, carried +on out of the savings made by workers in Honolulu, who are thus +preparing for themselves a provision for their early middle age. On the +Island of Hawaii are the great coffee districts of Olaa, Puna, Kona and +Hamakua, in each of which thriving coffee plantations are established, +while tens of thousands of acres of the very finest lands are yet +undisturbed. Government lands in these districts are being opened up for +settlement as fast as circumstances will permit. + +On the Island of Maui there is a large area of splendid coffee lands. +The extensive land of Keanae belonging to the Government will be opened +for settlement as soon as the preliminary work of surveying is completed. + +On the Island of Molokai the industry is making progress and there are +several plantations along the leeward valleys. + +So also on the Island of Oahu there is much good coffee land, which is +being experimented upon, and considerable capital invested in the +undertaking. + +As the case now stands for the investor, land can be obtained for coffee +growing in:-- + + ISLAND OF HAWAII. + North and South Kona, + Hilo, + Puna, including Olaa, + Hamakua. + + ISLAND OF MAUI. + Keanae, + Nahiku, + Lahaina, + Kaupo. + + ISLAND OF MOLOKAI. + + ISLAND OF OAHU. + + ISLAND OF KAUAI. + +In addition to the large tracts of Government lands on Hawaii and Maui, +there are many fine tracts of first-class coffee lands owned or +controlled by private parties. It is the policy of the Government to +encourage the settlement of its lands by small farmers. Hence the amount +of land, granted to one party or that one party can take up, while amply +sufficient to enable one person or family, with honest endeavor, to +acquire an independence, is not large enough to offer inducements for +the employment of large amounts of capital. + +That areas of land, for the establishment of large coffee plantations, +can be acquired is reasonably certain as large owners are evincing a +disposition to sell and lease their lands. + +There is no agricultural investment that offers better opportunities for +the profitable employment of capital, than a well managed coffee estate. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + + +CULTIVATION OF THE COFFEE TREE IN THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. + +In order to obtain the best results the coffee tree requires to be +properly planted, and during its life time needs frequent and +intelligent cultivation. + +The various operations incidental to the opening and carrying on of a +coffee plantation will be taken up in their proper order and described +in as plain language as possible, and as briefly as is consistent with a +clear explanation of the subject. + +The very first thing the planter should do after obtaining possession of +his land is to plant a nursery, so that he may have, as soon as +possible, an abundant supply of strong healthy plants. Many planters +have planted their fields with wild stumps, these are young coffee +plants that are found under wild growths of coffee trees. The young +trees are cut off about six inches above the ground, they are then taken +up and the lateral roots trimmed close to the tap root. The thready end +of the tap root is cut off and the stump is ready to plant. In some +cases the young plants are taken up, from under the wild trees, and +planted just as they are. This method can be dismissed at once as the +worst possible method of planting the coffee tree. The very best plants +are strong healthy nursery plants, that is, plants that have been grown +from the best seed in a properly prepared nursery. The next best plants +to use are nursery stumps. These are nursery trees that have grown too +large to safely transplant. By cutting them down and trimming the roots +they can be safely transplanted to the field, where they will grow into +good healthy trees. Stumps soon after planting send up several shoots, +these, with the exception of the strongest one, are taken off. This +latter shoot is to grow and make the coffee trees. + + +MAKING THE NURSERY. + +The size of the nursery will depend on how large the plantation is to +be. For a 75-acre plantation, one acre of ground will more than supply +all the plants required. It is always desirable to have a greater number +of plants than is needed to just plant the acreage the plantation is to +be, for after the fields are planted some of the plants may get injured +from dry weather and require replacing with plants from the nursery. Any +surplus left, after the trees in the fields are well established, can be +sold to some later planter, who will find it to his advantage to +purchase good nursery plants for his first planting and thereby save one +year of time. It is advisable for all planters to buy plants for their +first planting, but for the second year's planting they should have a +nursery of their own from which they can select the strongest and most +forward plants. + +The land for the nursery should be selected as close as possible to +where the plantation is to be. It should be on a slight slope to insure +drainage, and free from rocks and stones. The soil should be ploughed or +dug over to the depth of one foot and made as fine as possible. Beds +should be thrown up six inches high and three feet wide. The surface of +the beds should be made quite smooth and level; the seeds should be +planted six inches apart and three quarters of an inch deep. A good way +to ensure even and regular planting is to make a frame three feet wide +each way. Pegs, three quarters of an inch long and five eighths of an +inch diameter, should be fastened to one side of the frame, placing +them exactly six inches apart. The frame, thus prepared, is placed, pegs +down, on the bed. A slight pressure will sink the pegs into the soil. +The frame is now lifted and you have the holes for the seeds all of one +depth and equi-distant from each other. The seeds can now be dropped one +in each hole. The seeds should be placed flat side down, and covered by +brushing over the surface of the bed. If the weather is at all dry it is +a good plan to mulch the surface of the bed with dry grass or fern +leaves. The soil should be kept moist, and if there is not sufficient +rain the beds must be watered. In six or seven weeks the seeds should +sprout and show above ground. The mulching should now be moved from over +the plants and arranged in the rows. It has been the practice of some +planters to plant the seed much closer than six inches apart, but it +will be found that plants at six inches apart can be more easily and +safely transplanted than from close planted beds. It will be advisable +in taking up plants from the beds, to take only every other one, this +will give the remaining plants more room to develop and grow more stocky +than would be the case if all the plants were taken up from each bed as +they were required. + + +CLEARING THE LAND. + +The next thing for the planter to do is to get his land cleared. This +can be done more satisfactorily and cheaply by contract than can be done +by days' work. Gangs of Chinese and Japanese undertake the clearing of +land and will make a contract to clear the land as per specification. In +the Olaa District land costs from $20 to $50 per acre to clear, +according to the kind of clearing done. The land is forest land and some +planters have the trees cut down and everything burned making the land +quite clear, while others just have the vines and ferns cut and the +trees felled, leaving everything on the land to rot. This method while +costing much less than burning up everything, makes it more expensive to +lay out and plant the land. The planter must decide for himself which of +the two methods he will pursue. However, it can be said in the case of +those who only cut and fell, in a few years everything, trees, vines and +ferns rot down and greatly increase the fertility of the soil. The next +thing is to lay out the land for the digging of the holes where it is +intended to set out the young trees. There is a wide diversity of +opinion as to the proper distance apart to plant coffee trees. From +10x12 feet down to 5x6 and all intermediate distances are practiced. It +is a significant fact that planters who formerly planted their trees at +the wider distances are now setting out trees as close as 6x5. Trees +planted 6x6 will probably yield better results per acre than trees +planted at a wider or closer distance. Having fixed upon the distance +apart the trees are to be planted, the planter proceeds to mark with +pegs the places where he wants the holes dug. This is usually done with +a line or rope that has pieces of red rag fastened in the strands, at +the distance apart at which it is intended to dig the holes. The line is +drawn tightly across one end of the clearing and a peg driven into the +soil at every place that is marked on the line. The men, holding the two +ends of the line, are each provided with a stick the exact length that +the rows are to be apart. After one row is pegged, the line is advanced +one length of the stick and the operation repeated until the whole +clearing is pegged. After the first line is pegged a line should be laid +at exactly right angles to the first line so that the rows will be +straight both ways. The pegging being completed, the holes should be dug +not less than 18 inches wide and 18 inches deep. The top soil should be +carefully placed on one side of the hole and the subsoil on the other, +the holes should remain open as long as possible and should only be +filled in a week or so before planting the trees. The bottoms of the +holes should be explored with a light crowbar and, if any rocks or +stones are found, they should be removed. In filling the holes the top +soil (that has been placed on one side) should be placed in the bottom +of the hole and other top soil should be taken from between the rows +until the hole is full, the subsoil can now be disposed of by scattering +it between the rows. The holes after filling should have the marking +pegs replaced in the center of the filling, this will serve as a guide +for planting the trees. + + +PLANTING. + +There is no operation in all the work of establishing a coffee +plantation that requires such careful supervision as that of planting +out the young trees. If the work is carelessly done and the slender tap +root is doubled up or, if it is shortened too much, the tree will never +thrive. It may grow fairly well for a time, perhaps until the time for +the first crop, then the foliage will turn yellow and the tree show +every sign of decay. The effort to produce a crop is too much for the +tree and the sooner it is pulled up and replaced by a properly planted +tree the better. + +The closest supervision is necessary in order that the planter may be +certain that the tap roots are placed perfectly straight in the ground; +and the lateral roots placed in a natural position. In order to effect +this, with the least amount of trouble, transplanters have been used. A +transplanter that has been used with success is made as follows: two +pieces of sheet iron (galvanized) are bent into two half circles, which, +when placed together, form a cylinder 3 inches in diameter and seven +inches long. A piece of hoop iron is bent to a ring, that will fit over +the cylinder, and riveted. The mode of using is as follows: The two +halves of the cylinder are pressed into the ground, one on each side of +the young coffee tree. They are pressed down until the upper ends are +level with the surface of the soil. The hoop iron ring is then +pressed over the ends of the two halves of the cylinder, binding them +firmly together. The cylinder can now be lifted from the ground bringing +with it the young tree with all its roots in the position in which they +grew. In this condition the young trees are carried to the field and, +the holes being opened, the cylinder, holding the tree, is placed in the +ground and the soil packed firmly around it. The hoop iron ring is then +removed and the two halves of the cylinder withdrawn. The soil is again +compacted around the roots and the tree is planted. There is another +transplanter, invented in America, that would probably be better and +more economical in working than the one described above. This +transplanter consists of a cylinder of thin sheet steel. These are made +in America of various sizes to suit different kinds of trees. For a +coffee tree a good size would be 7 inches long and 5 inches in diameter. +The cylinder has an opening, five-eighths of an inch wide, running the +whole length of the cylinder and exactly opposite this opening a handle +is riveted. This handle is of half inch round iron, 18 inches long with +a cross bar on top. The rod is bent outward in the form of a bow, so +that in working, the branches of the young tree may not be injured. The +mode of working the transplanter is as follows: the cylinder is placed +on the ground with the tree in the center of the cylinder. This can be +done by allowing the stem of the young tree to pass through the slot in +the cylinder. Then, by means of the cross handle, the cylinder is turned +and pressed into the soil until the upper end is level with the surface +of the ground. Then, by lifting on the stem of the tree and the handle +of the transplanter at the same time, the tree is taken from the ground +with its roots undisturbed. Should the end of the tap root project below +the end of the cylinder, the thready end should be pinched off with the +thumb nail. By placing the lower end of the cylinder on the bottom of a +box and inserting a wedge-shaped piece of wood in the slot, the cylinder +is sprung open and can be withdrawn, leaving the young tree, with a +cylinder of earth around its roots, standing on the bottom of the box. +This operation can be repeated until the box is full of the young trees, +when it is carried to the field and the trees placed one at each hole. +By using a duplicate transplanter a cylinder of earth is removed from +the spot where the tree is to be placed, and the tree with its cylinder +of earth is placed in the round hole, which it exactly fits, the earth +being slightly compacted around the roots. The tree is thus planted with +the absolute certainty that the roots are in their natural position. + +[Illustration: PAUOA VALLEY RICE FIELDS.] + +[Illustration: PINEAPPLE PLANTATION.] + + +WEEDING. + +The old adage, "a stitch in time saves nine," will bear its fullest +application in the care and weeding of a coffee estate. From the time +the land is first cleared, weeding should commence, and it is +astonishing how little it will cost if care is taken that no weed be +allowed to run to seed. The bulk of Hawaiian coffee lands is situated in +the forests where the land is covered with a dense undergrowth of ferns +and vines and there are no pernicious weeds to bother. But soon after +clearing, the seeds of weeds are dropped by the birds and are carried in +on the feet and clothing of the laborers and visitors. We have no weeds +that run to seed in less than thirty days, and if the fields are gone +over, once a month, and any weed that can be found pulled up and buried, +the work of weeding will be reduced to a minimum. But if the weeds, that +are bound to spring up, are allowed to run to seed, the work of weeding +will be greatly increased and will require the labor of a large gang to +keep the fields in order. If taken in time, the labor of one man will +keep from 15 to 25 acres quite clean. During the first year after +setting out the fields, all that is required is to keep the fields clear +of weeds and the replacing, with a healthy tree from the nursery, any +tree that from any cause looks sickly and does not come along well. + +It will be found that in parts of the field some trees, while looking +healthy, do not grow as fast as the average of the trees, this is often +due to the soil not being of as good a quality. Knolls and side hills +are not generally so rich as the hollows and valleys, and the coffee +trees, planted in the poorest parts of the field, should be fertilized +until they are as vigorous as the trees in the best parts. + + +HANDLING. + +During the second year the young trees will have begun to make a good +growth and will require handling. In order to make clear the description +of the operations of handling and pruning, it may be well to describe +here the component parts of the coffee tree. + +The underground portion consists of a tap root and numerous lateral or +side roots. The parts above ground consist of: + +1st. The stem or trunk. + +2d. The primaries or first branches; these grow from the trunk in pairs +at intervals of from two to four inches, the two primaries, making a +pair, grow one opposite to the other, the pair above radiating out at a +different angle and so on to the top of the tree. + +3rd. The secondaries; these are the branches that grow in pairs from the +primaries. + +4th. The tertiaries; these are the third branches that grow in pairs +from the secondaries in the same manner as the secondaries grow on the +primaries. + +5th. The leaves that grow on all the branches. + +During the whole of the second year, the field should be gone over at +least every two months and all the secondaries that make their +appearance should be rubbed off; this can be done by a touch of the +fingers, if the secondaries are not more than two or three inches long. +If allowed to grow longer, the knife must be used, or there is danger +of tearing out the eye or bud, which we depend upon for growing new +secondaries at the proper time. During the second year, the secondaries +will make their appearance only on the lower sets of primaries, the +upper sets as they grow being too young to grow secondaries. At the +beginning of the third year all the secondaries should be allowed to +grow till they attain a length of six inches; then the trees should be +carefully gone over and all but five of the secondaries on each primary +cut off with a sharp pruning knife. No pairs should be left, and only +the strongest and most vigorous should be retained. They should be +disposed on alternate sides of the primary and none left in a space of +six inches from the stem of the tree. The object of this is to allow the +light to penetrate to the center of the tree, for the coffee tree bears +fruit in greater profusion on branches that are exposed to the light +than on those that are shaded. + +During this third year the tree will blossom and bear the first or +maiden crop. In some cases the tree will blossom in the second year, but +it is a wise plan to rub all the blossoms off, as it only weakens the +tree to bear a crop at such an early age. It is of the utmost importance +that in the first crop, as well as in all future crops, the tree should +not be overburdened with a superabundance of growing wood. If left to +itself, the lower primaries will grow a mass of secondaries, so much so +that no blossom will set on them, and the first crop will come only on +the upper primaries, and be only a third or fourth of the crop that +would be produced if the trees were properly handled. By handling, as +described above, the tree is relieved of all superfluous wood and only +such secondaries are left as are needed to bear the fourth year's crop, +and the maiden crop will grow on the primaries. It may be well to +mention here, that coffee only grows on wood of the second year's +growth, and does not grow on the same wood twice. + +During the third year, the secondaries will come on the upper primaries. +When they are well set, they should be reduced in number and in no case +should more than five be left to grow. In some cases four or even three +will be sufficient. Whatever the number that may be left, it must be +understood that these are the branches that will bear the crop for the +fourth year. During the third year new secondaries will grow from the +places where the former secondaries grew. Sometimes two will grow from +one bud, they should all be removed, the trees being gone over two +months, but at the last handling before blossoming time, which varies +greatly with the elevation above sea level, enough of these new +secondaries should be left to make wood for the fifth year's crop. From +this time on the coffee planter should be able to point out the wood on +which the present and the next year's crop will be borne, and it is this +wood and that only, that should be allowed to grow. All other shoots, +suckers, etc., should be rubbed off each time the tree is handled, +provision being made each year for the wood for the crop two years hence. + +During the third year, the trees will require topping. As to the height +at which a coffee tree should be topped, there is a great diversity of +opinion. Some planters advocate topping as low as four and a half feet, +others at six or seven feet; as a matter of fact the coffee tree will +bear fruit if topped as low as one and one half feet or if not topped at +all. The only valid reason for topping as low as four and a half feet is +for the convenience of picking the crop. Five and a half or six feet is +a good height to top a coffee tree on the rich lands of the Hawaiian +Islands. In fact the planters should not be guided by the number of +feet, but by the number of primaries he desires the tree to carry. +Eighteen to twenty pairs are a reasonable number for a coffee tree to +carry in this country, and it will be found that by not counting those +primaries that grow on the stem within fifteen inches from the ground, +eighteen or twenty pairs of primaries will come on the stem within six +feet from the ground. Before topping the tree, it should be allowed to +grow somewhat higher that it is intended to top, so that the wood may be +hardened and not decay as it sometimes does if topped when the wood is +too young. Topping is performed by cutting off the top of the tree at a +point an inch above a pair of primaries. Both primaries should also be +cut off an inch from the stem. This will leave the top in the form of a +cross; a knot will form at this point from which the tree will +constantly send up shoots striving to make a new top. These should be +torn off every time the tree is handled. + +We have now arrived at the time when the tree is bearing the first or +maiden crop. Through careful handling the tree has been divested of all +superfluous shoots, branches, etc., and the crop is maturing on the +primaries. If the trees are situated on good rich soil, and the trees +are well grown, there should be at least thirteen pairs of primaries +bearing crop. At an average of fifty berries to each primary there will +be a yield of over one and a quarter pounds of clean coffee to the tree. +This yield for the first crop has been much exceeded in this country, +but it can only be assured by careful cultivation and handling as +described in this paper. + +We will now take a look at the condition of our three years old trees. +They have all been topped and are carrying from thirty-six to forty +primaries, of which all except the upper six or eight are carrying four +or five secondaries that are well advanced and which will bear the crop +for the fourth year. There will also be four or five secondaries, that +are one or two months old, which are intended to bear the fifth year's +crop. All other growth should be removed as before up to the time of +blossoming for the fourth year's crop. This may be estimated as follows: +There should be at least twenty-four primaries that have on each of them +say, four bearing secondaries. At thirty berries to each secondary, the +yield would be close to three pounds of clean coffee to each tree. This +again has been exceeded in this country for four year old trees, but it +must be borne in mind, that in order to obtain these results, proper +cultivation, handling and pruning must be done. Without proper care such +results would be impossible, the coffee cannot grow an abundance of wood +and coffee at the same time. As soon as the crop of the fourth year is +gathered the work of pruning must commence without delay. This consists +of cutting off with a sharp knife the secondaries that have borne the +crop. They must not be cut so close as to injure the eye or bud. About +three-sixteenths of an inch from the stem of the primary will be quite +safe, and the secondaries for the fifth year's crop will soon make their +appearance. Care should be taken to leave the stem of the tree clear of +shoots and foliage for a space of six inches from the stem; the tree +will want all the light it can get. The coffee tree can be said to be in +full bearing when all the primaries are carrying bearing secondaries. +During the life of the coffee tree, the planter must keep a close watch +on his trees and restrict their wood-bearing propensities to the wood +that is to bear his crops; nothing else should be allowed to grow. If +the work is commenced rightly and carried on systematically, the work +will not be difficult and no crops will be lost. But on the other hand, +if the work is neglected, the trees will become matted and all the lower +primaries die off. These, if once lost, will not grow again. The tree +under these conditions will only bear a tithe of the crop it would bear +with proper attention, and furthermore it is a most difficult matter to +bring a neglected tree into proper shape and it can only be done at a +loss of one and perhaps two years' time. There are many minor details +connected with the care of the coffee tree which would occupy too much +space to describe here, and which the coffee planter can easily learn as +he carries on the work of coffee planting. Without doubt coffee planting +in this country is destined to become a great industry. We have large +tracts of the finest coffee lands in the world, only waiting to be +cultivated to make prosperous and happy homes. One parting word to the +intending coffee planter, take Davie Crockett's motto, "Be sure you're +right and then go ahead." + + +ESTIMATE OF COST OF ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING A COFFEE PLANTATION OF +75 ACRES, FROM THE FIRST TO THE SEVENTH YEAR. + +FIRST YEAR. + + Purchase of 100 acres of Government land + at $10.00 per acre $1,000 00 + + Manager's house and water tank 600 00 + + Laborers' quarters and water tank 350 00 + + Clearing 50 acres of land, at $20 per acre 1,000 00 + + Fencing 300 00 + + Purchase of 65,000, 1-year old coffee + plants at $5.00 per M 325 00 + + Lining, holing and planting 50 acres 600 00 + + Manager's salary, 1 year 1,200 00 + + Labor of 6 Japanese, 1 year at $15 per + month 1,080 00 + + Purchase of tools and starting nursery 500 00 + --------- + $6,955 00 $6,955 00 + +SECOND YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 6 Japanese 1,080 00 + + Extra labor lining, holing and planting + 25 acres 300 00 + + Sundries 500 00 + --------- + $3,080 00 $10,035 00 + +THIRD YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Pulping shed and drying house 500 00 + + Pulper, with engine and boiler 500 00 + + Extra help for picking, pulping and drying + 20,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres + (at 4 cents per lb.) 800 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 20,000 lbs. + of coffee at 1 cent 200 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 250 00 + --------- + $5,070 00 5,070 00 + + $15,105 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 20,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 3,600 00 + --------- + $11,505 00 + +FOURTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Extra labor picking, pulping and drying + 50,000 lbs. of coffee from 50 acres + (at 4 cents per lb.) 2,000 00 + + 10,000 lbs. from 25 acres (3-year-old trees) 400 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 60,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 600 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 400 00 + --------- + $6,220 00 6,220 00 + --------- + $17,725 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 60,000 lbs. of coffee at 18c 10,800 00 + --------- + $ 6,925 00 + +FIFTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 60,000 lbs. + coffee from 50 acres and 25,000 lbs. + from 25 acres, at 4 cents 3,400 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 85,000 lbs. + at 1 cent per lb. 850 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 500 00 + --------- + $7,570 00 7,570 00 + --------- + $14,495 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 85,000 lbs. coffee at 18 cents 15,300 00 + --------- + Balance on hand $ 905 00 + +SIXTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 9 Japanese 1,620 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 75,000 lbs. of + coffee from 50 acres, and 25,000 lbs. from + 25 acres, 100,000 lbs. at 4 cents 4,000 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 100,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 1,000 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 1,000 00 + --------- + $8,820 00 $ 8,820 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 100,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 18,000 00 + --------- + Balance on hand $10,085 00 + +SEVENTH YEAR. + + Manager's salary $1,200 00 + + Labor, 12 Japanese 2,160 00 + + Picking, pulping and drying 125,000 lbs. + of coffee at 4 cents 5,500 00 + + Hulling, polishing and grading 125,000 lbs. + at 1 cent 1,250 00 + + Sundries: bags, freight, etc. 1,200 00 + --------- + $11,310 00 $11,310 00 + +CREDIT. + + By sale of 125,000 lbs. of coffee at 18 cents 22,500 00 + --------- + Balance to credit of Plantation at + end of seventh year $21,275 00 + +The yields as given in the above estimate are far below what may be +attained by thorough cultivation and fertilizing. The coffee tree +responds readily to good treatment, but will disappoint its owner if +neglected. + +[Illustration: COFFEE PLANTATION, HAMAKUA.] + +[Illustration: COFFEE PLANTATION, PUNA.] + + + + +CHAPTER V. + + +AGRICULTURAL POSSIBILITIES. + +While the coffee trees are growing and during the time that will elapse +before the planter receives returns from his investment, it would be a +wise thing for him to plant such things, as will not only provide the +greater part of the food for himself and family, but may also yield a +moderate return in money. The soil and climate of the Hawaiian Islands +will grow almost anything that grows in any other country. All Northern +fruits can be grown if one will only go high enough on the mountain +slopes of Maui and Hawaii. But the coffee planter must confine himself +to such things as will thrive in the vicinity in which his coffee trees +are planted, and it is for the information of intending planters that +this chapter is written. + +In the first place, almost all kinds of vegetables will grow in such +profusion as will astonish those who have lived only in Northern climes. +Green and sweet corn, potatoes, Irish and sweet, cabbages, tomatoes, +beans, lettuce, radishes and many other kinds of vegetables, all of the +finest quality and in the greatest profusion, can be had every day in +the year. Strawberries and raspberries can also be had all the year +round. In addition to oranges and limes, which grow to perfection in +this country, many fruits peculiar to tropical and semi-tropical +climates grow well and flourish in these Islands. Among the more +important is the Avocado Pear (Persea Gratissima), commonly called the +Alligator Pear. This tree grows well and bears fruit, of splendid +quality, in from 3 to 5 years from seed. The fruit is much esteemed by +all classes. A small quantity of the fruit is shipped to California; +what reaches there in good condition is quickly bought at high prices. +It can only be carried safely in cold storage, and this is very +expensive freight. A native peach does well, and will bear fruit in two +years from seed. The fruit is much smaller than the American peach, +which by the way does not do well on elevations below 4000 feet, but +very sweet and juicy and makes excellent preserves and pies. Without +doubt this peach could in a few years be improved so as to rival peaches +of any other country. The Mango (Mangifera Indica) is a tropical fruit +tree that grows in the greatest profusion and bears enormous crops of +delicious fruit. It comes into bearing in 5 or 6 years from seed and +does well from sea level to an elevation of 2000 feet. The fruit is much +liked by every one; the green fruit is made into a sauce resembling, but +much superior to, apple butter. + +The Guava (Psidium Guayava) grows wild in all parts of the Islands +below 3000 feet. The fruit, of which there is a great abundance, is +made into jam and the very finest jelly in the world. In the fruiting +season large quantities of the jelly can be made, and without doubt, +exported at a profit. + +The Poha (Physalis edulis) is a quick growing shrub bearing a berry that +makes excellent jelly and jam. The shrub grows wild on elevations +between 1000 and 4000 feet. A patch of pohas planted in a corner of a +garden, will grow and yield a bountiful supply of fruit almost without +cultivation. + +Pineapples are at home on these Islands; a small plot planted with the +best varieties of this king of fruits will keep the table supplied the +year round. + +Another valuable fruit indigenous to this country is the Papaia (Carica +papaya). This fine fruit can be raised in enormous quantities and is a +most fattening food for pigs and chickens. The tree fruits in eight or +nine months from the seed, and thence forward for years it yields ripe +fruit every month in the year. The fruit is of the size of a small +melon and is very rich in sugar. The unripe fruit contains a milky juice +that, even when diluted with water, renders any tough meat, that is +washed in it, quite tender. A small piece of the unripe fruit placed in +the water in which meat or tough chicken is boiled makes it tender and +easily digestible. + +A very valuable food plant, indigenous to these Islands, is the taro +(Colocasia esculenta). The variety known as dry land taro will grow on +land that is moist enough for the coffee trees. The taro is a grand food +plant, the tubers containing more nutriment for a given weight than any +other vegetable food. The young tops when cooked are hard to distinguish +from spinach. The tubers must be cooked before they can be used for +food, in order to dissipate a very acrid principle that exists in both +leaves and root. + +Another important food plant that has been introduced and yields +abundantly is the Cassava (Manihot utilissima). This plant furnishes the +staple food for the population of Brazil. It is easily propagated by the +planting pieces of the woody portions of the stems and branches. The +tubers are available in nine or ten months after planting. There are two +kinds, the sweet and the bitter; the latter being the more prolific. The +sweet kind can be fed to pigs without cooking. The bitter kind contains +a poisonous substance which is entirely destroyed by cooking. There is +no danger of animals eating the bitter kind in a raw state, for no stock +will touch it, while the sweet kind is eagerly eaten in the raw state by +pigs, horses, cows, etc. The tubers are prepared for human food by +grating them. The juice is then expelled by pressure, and the residue +pounded into a coarse meal, which is made into thin cakes. It is an +excellent food, and said to be much more digestible than bread and other +foods made from wheat. Pigs can be very cheaply raised on the sweet +variety of this plant. A field of the plant being ready to gather, a +portion is fenced off, and the pigs turned into it. They will continue +to feed until every vestige of the tubers is eaten, leaving the ground +in a fine condition for replanting. The tubers never spoil in the +ground, in fact the soil is the very best storehouse for them. However +if left for two or three years the tubers grow very large and tough. + +Bananas, in great variety, are grown in all parts of the Islands where +there is sufficient moisture. Any land that will grow coffee will grow +bananas. The yield of fruit from this remarkable plant is something +astonishing. It commences to bear fruit in a little over one year from +the time of planting. The stem decays after the formation of a bunch +of fruit; this will weigh from 50 to 100 pounds and upwards. Numerous +suckers spring up from around the decaying stem and bear fruit in +their turn. One-half an acre planted with bananas would not only +furnish a large family with an abundance of delicious and nutritious +fruit, but would also yield a large supply of feed for pigs, chickens +and other stock. + +The tea plant (Camellia Thea) grows well in this country and yields +a tea of good quality. It is hardly likely that it will become an +article of export from this country, as we cannot compete with the +very low prices paid for labor in the great tea countries, India, +Ceylon, and China. But it can be grown for home consumption, and +there is no reason why every coffee planter should not have a patch +of tea growing on his land. An eighth of an acre, planted out in tea +plants, would yield more tea than could be consumed by a large family; +the work of cultivation and preparation is light and easy and could be +done by women and children. + +The coffee lands are situated in forested tracts in which there is +little or no pasturage for animals. Every coffee planter should keep one +or more cows to obtain the milk and butter which will furnish a large +addition to the food supply for himself and family. In order to do this, +it will be necessary to plant such things as will furnish food for +the animals. We have several fodder plants that will yield a large +quantity of feed and which will only grow in tropical and semi-tropical +countries. + +[Illustration: OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA.] + +[Illustration: VOLCANO HOUSE.] + +First among these is the Teosinte Reana (Euchlacna luxurians). This +plant is a native of Guatamala, and grows splendidly in this country; +each plant requires sixteen feet of ground for its full development. It +is an annual if allowed to run to seed; but its growth can be continued +by cutting when four or five feet high, and green feed obtained all the +year round. + +Guinea grass (Panicum Maximum), one of the grandest of fodder plants, +has been introduced and finds a congenial home in this country. It is +purely a tropical grass, it grows to a height of eight feet forming +large bunches which, when cut young, furnish an abundance of sweet and +tender feed. In districts when there is sufficient moisture, it can be +cut every two months. Caffir corn, Egyptian millet and Sorghum grow +well, and should be planted in order to have a change of feed. + +Pumpkins and squash grow to an enormous size and yield an immense +quantity of feed, much relished by cows and pigs. + +A dry land rice is being tried in the coffee districts of Olaa and Kona, +on the Island of Hawaii, and there is every reason to believe that it +will be successful. Nearly all the laborers on the coffee plantations +use rice as their staple food and it has to be brought from the Island +of Oahu to the Islands of Hawaii and Maui. There is no doubt but that +the rice used by the labor on the coffee plantations, can be raised on +the spot, reducing the cost of living to the laborers, and making them +more contented. + +It will be seen from the foregoing that many things can be grown that +will enable the coffee planter to not only reduce the outlay for living +expenses for himself and family but will also allow them to enjoy many +of the comforts and luxuries of life. + +While our main industries, sugar, coffee and rice, are being vigorously +carried on, new products are not lost sight of. Experiments are in +progress that promise to greatly diversify our industries and increase +the number of our exports. + +Several fiber plants are receiving attention, particularly the Sisal +Hemp (Agave Sisalana) and Sansevieria or bow string Hemp. The Sisal +plant will grow and flourish on lands that are too dry for any other +cultivation. Many thousands of the plants have been introduced and at +least one plantation is being set out. + +The bow string Hemp requires a wet, rich land in order to do well. It +probably yields the best fiber of all the leaf fiber plants. + +Ramie (Boehmeria nivea) grows splendidly in this country and after being +well established will yield 4 to 6 crops per annum. Whenever a machine +is invented that will economically decorticate the Ramie fiber, its +cultivation will become an important industry in this country. Ramie +will grow and do well wherever the coffee tree will grow, and whenever +the machine is available, the coffee planter will have a profitable +industry, to go hand in hand with coffee and employ the slack time +between the coffee picking seasons. + +Cocoa (Theobroma Cacao) is the tree that produces the fruit from which +chocolate is made. It grows and bears well in moist humid districts, and +many of the coffee planters are setting out numbers of the trees. + +There are many other economic plants that are well suited for culture in +this country. The country is entering on a new era, and as the lands +become settled and population increases, many small cultures will become +possible, which will afford many persons the opportunity of making an +easy living in a land of eternal summer. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + + +DIGEST OF THE LAND ACT OF 1895. + +(With reference to unoccupied lands.) + +The Land Act of 1895, having for its special object the settlement and +cultivation of the Government agricultural and pastoral land, vested the +control and management of Public Lands in a Board of Three +Commissioners, composed of the Minister of the Interior and two persons +appointed and removable by the President, one of whom is designated the +Agent of Public Lands; but excepting from the control of the +Commissioners, town lots, landings, tracts reserved for Public purposes, +etc., which remain under the control of the Minister of the Interior. + +For the purposes of the Act, the Republic of Hawaii is divided into Six +Land Districts, as follows: + + 1st. Hilo and Puna on the Island of Hawaii. + 2d. Hamakua and Kohala on the Island of Hawaii. + 3rd. Kona and Kau on the Island of Hawaii. + 4th. The Islands of Maui, Molokai, Lanai and Kahoolawe. + 5th. The Island of Oahu. + 6th. The Island of Kauai. + +The Commissioners are represented by a Sub-Agent in each District. + +Public Lands for the purposes of this Act are classified as follows: + +I. Agricultural Lands. First Class: Land suitable for the cultivation of +Fruit, Coffee, Sugar or other perennial crops with or without irrigation. + +Second Class: Land suitable for the cultivation of annual crops only. + +Third Class: Wet lands such as kalo and rice lands. + +II. Pastoral Land. First Class: Land not in the description of +Agricultural land but capable of carrying livestock the year through. + +Second Class: Land capable of carrying livestock only part of the year, +or otherwise inferior to First Class Pastoral land. + +III. Pastoral Agricultural Land: Land adapted in part for pasturage and +in part for cultivation. + +IV. Forest Land: Land producing forest trees but unsuitable for +cultivation. + +V. Waste Land. Land not included in the other classes. + +The Act provides three principal methods for the acquirement of Public +Lands, under systems known as + +I. Homestead Lease. + +II. Right of Purchase Lease. + +III. Cash Freehold. + + +GENERAL QUALIFICATION OF APPLICANTS. + +Applicants for land under systems named above, must be over eighteen +years of age, must be citizens by birth or naturalization or have +received letters of denization or special rights of citizenship, be +under no civil disability for any offense, nor delinquent in the payment +of taxes. Special qualifications are named under the respective systems. + + +HOMESTEAD LEASE SYSTEM. + +The Homestead Lease system permits the acquirement of Public Land by +qualified persons without other payments than a fee of two dollars upon +application and a fee of five dollars upon issuance of Homestead Lease. + +The limit of area in the different classes of land which may be acquired +under Homestead Lease is: + + 8 acres first-class agricultural land; + 16 acres second-class agricultural land; + 1 acre wet (rice or taro) land; + 30 acres first-class pastoral land; + 60 acres second-class pastoral land; + 45 acres pastoral-agricultural land. + + +SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS FOR HOMESTEAD LEASE. + +Any person having the general qualifications (as to citizenship, etc.) +who is not the owner in his own right of any land in the Hawaiian +Islands, other than "wet land" (rice, taro, etc.) and who is not an +applicant for other land under the Act may apply under this part of +the Act, and such application may cover one lot of wet land in addition +to other land, if reasonably near. Husband and wife may not both be +applicants. + +Applications must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of the +District, accompanied by sworn declaration of qualifications, and a fee +of $2. + + +CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPATION. + +The successful applicant receives a certificate of occupation which +entitles him to occupy the described premises and to receive a homestead +lease for Nine Hundred and Ninety-Nine Years, if conditions of +certificate of occupation have been fulfilled, the conditions being: + +That the occupier shall, before the end of two years, build a dwelling +house and reside on the premises. He shall maintain his home on the +premises from and after the end of two years from date of certificate. +He shall before the end of six years from date of certificate have in +cultivation not less than 10 per cent. of the land, or have in +cultivation 5 per cent. of the land and, in good growing condition, not +less than ten timber, shade or fruit trees per acre on agricultural +land, or if pastoral land, fence the same within six years. + +He shall pay the taxes assessed upon the premises within sixty days +after the same are delinquent. + +He shall perform any conditions of the certificates for the planting or +protection of trees, or prevention or destruction of vegetable pests +that may be on the premises. + + +CONDITIONS OF HOMESTEAD LEASE. + +The Lessee or his successors must maintain his home on the leased +premises, must pay the taxes assessed upon the premises, within sixty +days after the same are delinquent, and perform any conditions of the +lease relating to protection or planting of trees, or destruction and +prevention of vegetable pests. + +Lands held under a certificate of occupation or homestead lease are +liable to taxation as estates in fee. + +In case of the death of an occupier or lessee his interests, +notwithstanding any devise or bequest shall vest in his relations, in +the order prescribed in the Act, the widow or widower being first in +order, then the children, etc. + +Certificates of occupation or homestead lease, or any interest +thereunder, is not assignable by way of mortgage nor is the same subject +to attachment, levy or sale on any process issuing from the Courts of +the country. Neither the whole nor any portion of the premises may be +sub-let. + +Surrender may be made to the Government by an occupier or lessee having +the whole interest if all conditions to date of surrender have been +fulfilled, and the person so surrendering is entitled to receive from +the Government the value of permanent improvement, whenever the same is +received by the Government from a new tenant. + + +RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASES. + +Right of Purchase Leases, for the term of twenty-one years, may be +issued to qualified applicants, with the privilege to the Lessee of +purchasing at the end of three years and upon fulfillment of special +conditions. + + +QUALIFICATIONS OF APPLICANTS. + +Any person who is over eighteen years of age, who is a citizen by birth +or naturalization of the Republic of Hawaii or who has received letters +of denization of special rights of citizenship, who is under no civil +disability for any offense, who is not delinquent in the payment of +taxes, and who does not own any agricultural or pastoral land in the +Hawaiian Islands, may apply for Right of Purchase Lease, the limit of +areas which may be acquired being: + + 100 acres first-class agricultural land; + 200 acres second-class agricultural land; + 2 acres wet (rice or taro) land; + 600 acres first-class pastoral land; + 1200 acres second-class pastoral land; + 400 acres mixed agricultural and pastoral land. + +Any qualified person, owning less than the respective amounts stated in +foregoing list, and which is not subject to residence condition, may +acquire additional land of the classes already held by him but so that +his aggregate holding shall not be in excess of the limit named; or if +desiring additional land of another class may acquire the same according +to ratio established between the various classes. + +Husband and wife may not both be applicants for Right of Purchase Leases. + +Application must be made in person at the office of Sub-Agent of the +District, and must be accompanied by a fee equal to six months rent of +premises, fee to be credited on account of rent, if application is +successful, and to be returned is application is unsuccessful. In case +of more than one application for same lot the first application takes +precedence. + + +CONDITIONS OF RIGHT OF PURCHASE LEASE. + +Term: twenty-one years. + +Rental: Eight per cent. on the appraised value given in lease, payable +semi-annually. + +The Lessee must from the end of the first to the end of the fifth year +continuously maintain his home on the leased premises. + +The Lessee must have in cultivation at the end of three years five per +cent. and at the end of five years ten per cent. of his holding, and +maintain on agricultural land an average of ten trees to the acre. + +Pastoral land must be fenced. + +Interest in Right of Purchase Lease is not assignable without written +consent of the Commissioners of Public Lands, but the lease may be +surrendered to the Government. + +In case of forfeiture or surrender of right of purchase lease, +reappraisement is made of the land and of permanent improvements +thereon, and if the land is again disposed of, the incoming tenant shall +pay for such permanent improvements and the amount when so received by +the Government shall be paid to the surrendering Lessee. + + +CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH PURCHASE MAY BE MADE. + +At any time after third year of leasehold term, the Lessee is entitled +to a Land Patent giving fee simple title, upon his payment of the +appraised value set forth in lease, if he has reduced to cultivation +twenty-five per cent. of his leased premises, and has substantially +performed all other conditions of his lease. + +[Illustration: KOHALA RAILROAD.] + +[Illustration: RICE FIELD, PEARL CITY.] + + +CASH FREEHOLDS. + +Cash Freehold Lots are sold at auction to the highest qualified bidder, +at appraised value as upset price. + +The qualification of applicants for Cash Freeholds and the areas of land +which may be acquired are the same as those under Right of Purchase +lease system. + + +APPLICATIONS. + +Applications must be made to Sub-Agent of District in writing with sworn +declaration as to qualifications, and a fee of ten per cent. of +appraised value of lot, which fee is forfeited if applicant declines to +take the premises at the appraised value, and is credited to him if he +becomes the purchaser of the lot. If such applicant, however, is outbid, +his fee is returned to him. + +If two or more applications are made and there is no bid above the upset +price, the first application takes precedence. + +The purchaser at auction sale must pay immediately thereafter one-fourth +of purchase price and thereupon receive a "Freehold Agreement." + + +CONDITIONS OF FREEHOLD AGREEMENT. + +The freeholder shall pay the balance of purchase price in equal +installments in one, two and three years, with interest at 6 per cent., +but may pay any installment before it is due and stop corresponding +interest. + +Twenty-five per cent. of agricultural land must be cultivated, and +pastoral land fenced before the end of third year. + +Freeholder must maintain his home on the premises, from end of first to +end of third year. + +He may not assign or sub-let without consent of Agent of Public Lands. + +He must allow Agents of the Government to enter and examine the premises. + +He must pay all taxes that may be due upon the premises. + +If all conditions are fulfilled he is entitled at end of three years to +Patent giving fee simple title. + +In case of forfeiture or surrender the land and permanent improvements +are reappraised separately, and the value of such improvements when +received by Government from new tenant or freeholder, will be paid to +surrendering freeholder. + + +SETTLEMENT ASSOCIATIONS. + +Six or more qualified persons may form a "Settlement Association" and +apply for holdings in one block. + +The provisions for cash freehold apply to the settlement of such blocks, +but first auction sale is confined to members of such Settlement +Association. + +Any lot in such block which may be forfeited or surrendered, or which is +not taken up by any member of the Settlement Association, within three +months, shall be open to any qualified applicants. + +Disputes, disagreements or misunderstandings, between the parties to +certificate of occupation, homestead lease, right of purchase lease, or +cash freehold and relating thereto, which can not be amicably settled, +shall be submitted to the Circuit Judge in whose jurisdiction the +premises are situated and his decision shall be final subject only to +appeal to Supreme Court. + + +CASH SALES AND SPECIAL AGREEMENTS. + +With consent of Executive Council, public lands not under lease may be +sold in parcels of not over one thousand acres, at public auction for +cash, and upon such sale and payment of full consideration, a land +patent will issue. + +Parcels of land of not over six hundred acres, may with consent of +Executive Council, be sold at public auction upon part credit and part +cash, and upon such terms and conditions of improvement, residence, +etc., as may be imposed. + +Upon fulfillment of all conditions a Land Patent will issue. + + +GENERAL LEASES. + +General leases of public lands may be made for a term not exceeding +twenty-one years. + +Such leases are sold at public auction, and require rent in advance +quarterly, semi-annually or annually. + +The conditions of general leases are made at discretion of the +Commissioners, and may be made for any class of public lands. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + + +MISCELLANEOUS. + + +POPULATION. + +The population of the Islands according to the census of 1890 was +89,991, or in round numbers 90,000. A census of the population has just +been taken, but the results cannot be exactly known for some months. An +estimate recently made based upon the knowledge of general increase from +various sources gives the population as follows: + + Hawaiians 35,000 + Part Hawaiians 10,000 + Chinese 15,000 + Japanese 24,000 + Portuguese 9,000 + American and European 14,000 + ------- + Total 107,000 + +Since the census returns began to come in, it is very evident that this +estimate will be exceeded by some 2,000, making the total population +109,000. The increase will probably be found among Japanese and +Portuguese. The population of Honolulu is 29,920, or practically 30,000. + + +SHIPPING. + +The vessels flying the Hawaiian flag number 52, aggregating 21,678 tons. +They are divided as follows: + + 23 steamers, aggregating 9,575 tons + 5 barks, " 4,198 " + 3 ships, " 6,272 " + 21 schooners and sloops, aggregating 1,623 " + +Of these vessels 13 are employed in foreign trade and 39 in trade +between the Islands. + + +FINANCES. + +Mention has been made of the taxes of this country. A few words will be +to the point upon the financial condition of the government. + +The direct taxes yielded, in 1895, $592,691.92. The Customs revenue was +$547,149.04 and licenses, &c., produced $600,224.23, in all +$1,740,065.19. + +The current expenditures are kept within the current income. Great +public improvements are provided for by loan. This is what every growing +country has to do. The public debt of the country on January 1, 1896, +was $3,764,335. With a population of 109,000, this gives about $34 per +head of the population. The Hawaiian Government finds no difficulty in +obtaining means for internal improvements, and a scheme is now on foot +to reduce the interest and consolidate the public debt. + +The exports in 1895 amounted to $8,474,138.15 and the imports to +$5,339,785.04. This certainly shows well for a country whose total +population is exceeded by dozens of cities. Of the exports $7,975,590.41 +were accredited to sugar, $22,823.68 to coffee, $102,599.25 to bananas +and $8,783.84 to pineapples. These three latter items are elastic and +the showing of 1896 will give a very large increase in their yields. + +Of the imports $4,121,920.22 came from the Pacific ports of the United +States and $394,399.16 from the Atlantic ports; a total of +$4,516,319.38, leaving but $1,197,698.16 for every other nation that the +country has commercial relations with. + +In point of fact, taking exports and imports, the business in 1895 done +by the Hawaiian Islands with all its commercial relations amounted to +$14,188,155.69; of this sum $12,908,508.92 was done with the United +States, which amounts to 91 per cent. of the whole business of the +Islands. From these figures it can be judged how prosperous a little +community that of the Hawaiian Islands is, and further how close are its +relations with the Great Republic. What country in the world has 91 per +cent. of its commercial relations with its neighbor? + +The financial condition of Hawaii is on a sound basis. The men in charge +of its government are frugal and careful of the public expenditure, the +whole tendency of the Republic is to foster industry and thrift. The +institutions are liberal and nothing is more desirable for such a +country than the immigration of colonists, with capital to develop the +industries and determination to work honestly and well. + + +FOR TOURISTS. + +It was not the intention when planning this pamphlet to speak of the +opportunities for tourists visiting the Islands, but a few words are +appended. The object of the pamphlet has been to show the agricultural +resources and general conditions. + +The great attraction of the Islands is undoubtedly the Volcano of +Kilauea, the greatest and most striking volcano in the world. Though +quiescent for a time during part of 1895 and 1896, it has now burst +forth with renewed splendor and promises to exceed many of its former +efforts. Moreover, from the rising of the lakes of fire, and the floor +of the crater generally, it has evidently come to stay. + +But it is not only this one great natural wonder that is attractive to +the tourist. The crater of Haleakala, the largest extinct crater in the +world, is almost, in its silent magnificence, equal to the wonder of the +boiling and seething Kilauea. Then the delightful climate, the balmy +breezes, the brilliant coloring of sky, sea and land, the luxuriant +tropical vegetation, and the peculiar "Dolce far niente" life, all lend +a charm to which no one who visits the place has ever failed to respond. +In fact a visit to the Hawaiian Islands is one of the pleasantest +experiences of a life-time. + +For people suffering from pulmonary troubles the climate is unrivalled +and there are now several sanitariums where such patients can be +attended to. + +San Francisco and Victoria are the two points of deportation for the +Hawaiian Islands. The Oceanic Steamship Line has vessels sailing twice a +month. One steamer sails for Honolulu, stays a few days, and returns to +San Francisco. The other steamers touch at Honolulu and go on to the +Australian colonies. Round trip tickets can be obtained and also lay +over tickets, at the Company's offices on Montgomery street, San +Francisco. The Pacific Mail and O. & O. S. S. lines, running from China +and Japan to San Francisco, also touch at Honolulu regularly. +Arrangements can be made to lay over in Honolulu, visit the Volcano and +proceed on the voyage by the next vessel. + +From Victoria the C. & A. S. S. sail once a month. They give the tourist +a chance of seeing the Canadian Pacific Railroad before coming here, but +a round trip ticket would have to be for a full month. By the O. S. S. +lines less time need be spent on the Islands. + +The cost of round trip passage is $125. + +The cost of trip to the Volcano, including all expenses is $50. + +Hotel expenses in Honolulu from $2 a day, according to accommodation. + +Particulars on these subjects can always be learned by writing to Wilder +S. S. Co., Fort street, Honolulu; or the Inter-Island Steamship Co., +Queen street, Honolulu. + + +PRICE LIST OF PROVISIONS ON THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. + +Fresh Hawaiian butter, from 25 to 50c. per lb. + +Hams, from 16-1/2 to 30c. per lb. + +Bacon, from 16-1/2 to 20c. per lb. + +Cheese, from 20 to 35c. per lb. + +Family pork, from 15 to 18c. per lb. + +Corned beef, 7c. per lb. + +Fresh meat, from 6 to 15c. per lb. + +Loin of Porterhouse steaks, from 6 to 15c. per lb. + +Tinned fruits per doz., from $1.75 to $2.25. + +Golden Gate Flour, per 100-lb., $2.50. + +Lower grades, $2.20. + +Hawaiian rice, $3.25 to $5.00 per 100 lbs. + +Hawaiian bananas, per bunch, 25 to 55c. + +Potatoes, from 1 to 2c. per lb. + +Eggs per dozen, 25 to 50c. + +Rolled oats per case, $5.50. + +Ice, in small quantities, 1-1/2c.; 50 lbs. and over, 1c. per lb. + + +WAGES. + +The following is an approximation of the wages paid to different classes +of labor on the Hawaiian Islands: + +Engineers on plantations, from $125 to $175 per month, house and +firewood furnished. + +Sugar boilers, $125 to $175 per month, house and firewood furnished. + +Blacksmiths, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house and firewood +furnished. + +Carpenters, plantation, $50 to $100 per month, house and firewood +furnished. + +Locomotive drivers, $40 to $75 per month, room and board furnished. + +Head overseers, or head lunas, $100 to $150. + +Under overseers, or lunas, $30 to $50 with room and board. + +Bookkeepers, plantation, $100 to $175, house and firewood furnished. + +Teamsters, white, $30 to $40 with room and board. + +Hawaiians, $25 to $30 with room; no board. + +Field labor, Portuguese and Hawaiian $16 to $18 per month; no board. + +Field labor, Chinese and Japanese, $12.50 to $15 per month; no board. + +In Honolulu bricklayers and masons receive from $5 to $6 per day; +carpenters, $2.50 to $5; machinists, $3 to $5; painters, $2 to $5, per +day of nine hours. + + +DOMESTIC LABOR. + +The domestic labor in Honolulu and in all parts of the Islands, has +for many years been performed by Chinese males, who undoubtedly make +excellent house servants. During the last four or five years the +Japanese have entered the field; the Japanese women are especially in +demand as nurses for children. + +The following are the prevailing rates of wages: + +Cooks, Chinese and Japanese, $3 to $6 per week, with board and room. + +Nurses and house servants, $8 to $12 per month, with board and room. + +Gardeners or yard men, $8 to $12 per month, with board and room. + +Sewing women, $1 per day and one meal. + +Good substantial meals can be obtained at respectable Chinese restaurants +and at the Sailors' Home for 25 cents or Board for $4.50 per week. + +The market for all kinds of labor is overstocked and it would be very +unwise for any one to come to these Islands with no capital on the mere +chance of obtaining employment. The many steamships arriving at this +port bring numbers of people seeking employment who are obliged to +return disappointed. + +[Illustration: NUUANU AVENUE, HONOLULU.] + +[Illustration: WAIKIKI BEACH.] + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + + +HISTORICAL SKETCH. + +Although the written history of the Hawaiian Islands begins with their +discovery by Captain Cook in 1778, yet the aboriginal inhabitants had at +that time an oral traditional history which extended back for several +centuries. + + +ORIGIN. + +As to their origin, these people formed but one branch of the Polynesian +race, which at a remote period settled all the groups of islands in the +central and Eastern Pacific, as far as New Zealand in the South and +Easter Island in the East. This is shown by the close physical and moral +resemblance between their inhabitants, as well as by the facts that they +all speak dialects of the same language, and have the same manners and +customs, the same general system of tabus, and similar traditions and +religious rites. + +The evidence of both language and physical traits tends to show that +their remote ancestors came from the East Indian Archipelago, and that +they were still more distantly related to the pre-Arian races of +Hindostan. + +It is also proved by concurrent traditions of the different groups that +there was a general movement of population throughout central Polynesia +during the twelfth and thirteenth centuries of the Christian Era, during +which the Harvey Islands and afterwards New Zealand were colonized, and +many voyages were made between the Hawaiian Islands and the Samoan and +Society groups. This intercourse, however, seems to have ceased for four +or five hundred years before the arrival of Captain Cook. + + +ARTS AND MANUFACTURES. + +The ancient Hawaiians were not savages, in the proper sense of the term, +but barbarians of a promising type. When we consider that they occupied +the most isolated position in the world, and that they were destitute of +metals and of beasts of burden, as well as of the cereal grains, cotton, +flax and wool, we must admit that they had made a creditable degree of +progress towards civilization. Like the other Polynesians, they had not +invented the art of making pottery, or the use of the loom for weaving. + +Their cutting tools were made of stone, sharks' teeth or bamboo. Their +axes were made of hard, fine grained lava, chiefly found on the mountain +summits. Their principal implement for cultivating the soil was simply a +stick of hard wood, either pointed or shaped into a flat blade at the +end. With these rude tools they cut and framed the timbers for their +houses, which were oblong with long sides and steep roofs, and were +thatched with _pili_ grass, ferns or _hala_ leaves. In the building as +well as in the management of canoes they were unsurpassed. For +containers they used a large gourd (_cucurbita maxima_, which was not +found elsewhere in the Pacific), and also cut out circular dishes of +wood as truly as if they had been turned in a lathe. + +For clothing they beat out the inner bark of the paper mulberry and of +some other trees, until it resembled thick flexible paper, when it was +called _kapa_ or _tapa_. For insignia of rank, they made splendid +feather cloaks, and feather helmets, which were worn only by chiefs. + +For lights they used the oily nuts of the _kukui_ or candle-nut tree. + +For food they chiefly depended upon the tuberous roots of the _taro_ +plant (_Colocasia antiquorum_), but sweet potatoes were cultivated in +the dry districts, and yams in Kauai and Niihau. They also cultivated +bananas and sugar cane and the _awa_ or _kava_ plant for its narcotic +properties. + +Fishing was carried on with great ingenuity and skill. Extensive fish +ponds were built along the coasts, which must have cost immense labor. + +Their food was cooked then, as now, by steaming it in an _imu_ or +underground oven with heated stones. Fire was produced by friction, +viz., by rubbing a hard, pointed stick in a groove made in a piece of +softer wood, until the little heap of fine powder collected at the end +of the groove took fire. + +There was no circulating medium which served the purpose of money, and +all trade was conducted by barter. + + +CIVIL POLITY. + +The civil polity of the ancient Hawaiians was far more despotic than +that of any other Polynesian tribe. The community was divided into three +classes, namely: + +1. The nobility or _Alii_ (N. Z. _Ariki_), comprising the kings and +chiefs of various grades of rank. + +2. The priests, _Kahuna_ (N. Z. _Tahunga_), including priests, sorcerers +and doctors. + +3. The common people, _Makaainana_, or laboring class. + +There was a wide and impassable gulch between the chiefs and common +people. In fact, the distinction between them was primarily of a sacred +and religious character. The chief was believed to be descended from the +gods, and to be allied to the invisible powers. + +The contrast in stature and appearance as well as in bearing between the +chiefs and common people was very striking. Only a chief had the right +to wear the feather cloak and helmet, or the ivory clasp, _Niho Palaoa_; +his canoe and his sails were painted red, and on state occasions he was +attended by men carrying _kahilis_ or plumed staffs of various colors. +When the highest chiefs appeared abroad, all the common people +prostrated themselves with their faces upon the ground. It was death for +a common man to remain standing at the mention of the king's name in +song, or when the king's food, water or clothing was carried past; to +put on any article of dress belonging to him, to enter his enclosure +without permission, or to cross his shadow or that of his house. If a +common man entered the dread presence of the sovereign, he must crawl +prone on the ground, _kolokolo_, and leave in the same manner. + +The head chief of an island was styled the _Moi_, and his dignity was +generally hereditary. There were usually at least four independent +kinglets in the group, and sometimes the single Island of Hawaii was +divided between several independent chiefs. + + +LAND TENURE. + +As a rule, the chiefs were the only proprietors of the soil. They were +supposed to own not only the soil and all that grew upon it, not only +the fish of the sea, but also the time and labor of their people. + +The accepted theory was that all the lands belonged to the king, of whom +they were held by the high chiefs in fief; _i. e._, on condition of +rendering him tribute and military service. Each of these district +chieftains divided up his territory among an inferior order of petty +chiefs, who owed to him the same service and obedience that he owed to +the king. + +In this way the land was subdivided again and again, while at the bottom +of the scale were the miserable serfs who tilled the soil. These last +were simply tenants at will, liable to be dispossessed of their little +holdings at any time, or to be stripped of their personal property at +the requisition of the chief. + + +WAR. + +Wars were frequent and cruel. There were numerous wars to settle the +succession to the sovereignty of an Island, as well as contests between +the head chiefs of the principal Islands. For example, the chiefs of +Oahu often contended with those of Maui for the possession of Molokai, +and there were frequent wars between the chiefs of Hawaii and those of +Maui for the district of Hana. + +Their weapons consisted of long spears, _pololu_; javelins, _ihe_; +daggers, _pahoa_, and clubs made of hard wood. They never used the bow +in war, but slings made of cocoanut fiber or human hair were extensively +employed. They used no shields, but became wonderfully expert in +catching or parrying spears thrown at them. + +Sometimes they engaged in sea fights, with large fleets of canoes +on each side. In general no quarter was given to the vanquished, but +there were certain sanctuaries called _puuhonuas_, which afforded an +inviolable refuge in time of war. Cannibalism was regarded by them with +horror and detestation. + + +RELIGION. + +The religious system of the ancient Hawaiians was very similar to that +of other Polynesians. It consisted in a great measure of nature worship. +To their minds all the powers of nature, especially those that are +mysterious and terrible, were conceived of as living and spiritual +beings. Thus the volcano, the thunder, the whirlwind, the meteor and the +shark were feared as being either the embodiment or the work of +malevolent spirits (_akuas_). + +The four great gods, Kane, Kanaloa, Ku and Lono, who were worshiped +throughout Polynesia, originally belonged to this class, as is shown by +the cosmogony of the New Zealand Maoris. Among these four Kane held the +primacy. The souls of great chiefs went to his abode after death. + +Pele, the dread goddess of volcanoes, and her numerous family, dwelt in +the crater of Kilauea, but also caused the eruptions of Mauna Loa and +Hualalai. In Hawaii she was feared more than any other deity. + +One large class of _akuas_ were supposed to be incarnated in certain +species of animals, which were feared or believed to have a supernatural +character, as the shark. + +Another class of deities, which included most of the professional gods, +consisted of deified spirits of the dead. The _Aumakuas_ were tutelar +deities, attached to particular families, who were often deified +ancestors. Sickness and disease were generally caused by their +displeasure. + + +CEREMONIAL SYSTEM. + +There were two hereditary orders of priests, endowed with lands, who +kept up the elaborate liturgy and ritual of the temples, and also +preserved whatever knowledge of astronomy, history, medicine, etc., had +been handed down to them. + +The tabu system covered the entire daily life of the people with a vast +network of minute regulations and penalties. Thus, it was tabu for men +and women to eat together, or even to have their food cooked in the same +oven. Women were forbidden to eat pork, bananas, cocoanuts, or turtle +and certain kinds of fish, on pain of death. There were certain tabu +days when no canoe could be launched, no fire lighted, and when no sound +could be made, on pain of death. Even dogs had to be muzzled and fowls +shut up in calabashes for twenty-four hours at a time. + +The human sacrifice was the crowning act of the ancient worship, offered +only on certain solemn occasions, and at the temples (_Heiaus_) of the +highest class. + +Whenever a temple was to be dedicated, a new house to be built for the +chief, or a new war canoe to be launched, many of the people fled to the +mountains and lay hidden till the danger was past. + +Besides the regular priesthood, there were many kinds of medicine men, +necromancers or mediums, sorcerers and diviners, who preyed upon the +superstition and credulity of their countrymen. The belief that all +forms of disease were caused by evil spirits, and their fear of being +"prayed to death" (_anaana_), kept the people in a state of abject fear. + +There is too much reason to believe that during several centuries +preceding the discovery of the Islands they had been deteriorating in +many respects. As the historian Fornander has stated: + +"It was an era of strife, dynastic ambitions, internal and external wars +on each Island, with all their deteriorating consequences of anarchy, +depopulation, social and intellectual degradation, loss of liberty, loss +of knowledge, loss of arts." + + +DISCOVERY OF THE ISLANDS. + +It seems to be almost certain that one Juan Gaetano, a Spanish +navigator, saw Hawaii in 1555 A. D. A group of islands, the largest of +which was called La Mesa, was laid down in the old Spanish charts in the +same latitude as the Hawaiian Islands, but 10 degrees too far east. + +On the eighteenth of January, 1778, Captain Cook, the great navigator, +while sailing due north from the Society Islands, discovered the Islands +of Oahu and Kauai. The next day he landed at Waimea, Kauai, where he +held friendly intercourse with the natives, and afterwards laid in +supplies at Niihau. He finally sailed for Alaska, Feb. 2d. The Hawaiians +looked upon him as an incarnation of the god Lono, and upon his crew as +supernatural beings. Returning from the Arctic the following winter, he +anchored in Kealakekua bay, January 17th, 1779. Here he received +divine honors and was loaded with munificent presents of the best that +the islands could produce. By his rash and arbitrary conduct, however, +he involved himself in an affray with the natives, in which he was +killed on February 14th, 1779. + +The spot where he fell is now marked by an appropriate monument. + +[Illustration: LUNALILO HOME, FOR AGED HAWAIIANS.] + +[Illustration: KAMEHAMEHA SCHOOL.] + + +EARLY TRADERS. + +For seven years after the death of Captain Cook no foreign vessel +ventured to touch at the Islands. After that time many of the vessels +engaged in the fur trade on the northwest coast of America called at the +Islands for supplies on their way to Canton or ran down here to spend +the winter. Waimea, Kauai, and Kealakekua bay were the two harbors most +frequented by them. Fire arms, powder and shot were the articles most in +demand among the natives. + + +THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA. + +At the death of Kalaniopuu, _Moi_, of Hawaii, in 1782, a civil war broke +out, which rent the Island into three petty sovereignties, which were +presently reduced to two. + +The districts of Kohala and Kona were held by Kamehameha, a nephew of +the late king, while the other districts were loyal to his son, Keoua. +After a sanguinary war lasting nine years (during which Kamehameha had +ravaged West Maui and conquered the district of Hamakua), he became +master of the whole of the Island of Hawaii by the assassination of his +rival, Keoua, at Kawaihae, in 1791. + + +VISITS OF VANCOUVER. + +The name of Capt. George Vancouver is still cherished as that of a wise +and generous benefactor to these Islands. During his survey of the +northwest coast of America in 1792-1794, he made three visits to the +Islands. He uniformly refused to sell fire arms or ammunition to the +chiefs, but gave them useful plants and seeds, and presented Kamehameha +with the first cattle and sheep ever landed in the Islands. On the 25th +of February, 1794, Kamehameha and his chiefs voluntarily placed Hawaii +under the protection of Great Britain, in token of which the British +flag was hoisted on shore at Kealakekua. + + +CONQUEST OF OAHU. + +After the death of Kahekili, the sovereign of the leeward Islands, in +1794, a civil war broke out between his brother Kaeo and his son +Kalanikupule, in which the former was killed. Soon after Kalanikupule +treacherously massacred Captains Brown and Gordon, who had assisted him +in the late war, and seized their vessels in the harbor of Honolulu. + +Having put his guns and ammunition on board, he proposed to sail +immediately for Hawaii, in company with a fleet of war canoes, to attack +Kamehameha. But the English sailors who had been reserved to navigate +the two vessels, suddenly rose at midnight, recaptured them, and sailed +for Hawaii, where they informed Kamehameha of all that had occurred. + +Kamehameha saw that his opportunity had now come, and lost no time in +mustering all the war canoes and fighting men of Hawaii. + +After overrunning West Maui and touching at Molokai, he landed in +Waialea bay, Oahu, in the latter part of April, 1795. There he spent a +few days in organizing his army before marching up the valley of Nuuanu, +where Kalanikupule had prepared to make his last stand. The Oahu +warriors were soon routed and pursued up the valley. Some of the +fugitives were hemmed in and driven over the "_Pali_," or precipice, at +the head of Nuuanu, a little north of the present road. + +This victory made Kamehameha master of all the Islands except Kauai and +Niihau. With the exception of a short insurrection in Hawaii, there was +peace during the rest of his reign. + + +DECREASE OF POPULATION. + +The decrease of the population during this period must have been very +rapid. Vancouver in 1792, Broughton in 1796, and Trumbull in 1801, were +strongly impressed with the misery of the common people and their rapid +decrease in numbers. This was partly the result of wars, but was still +more due to the diseases and vices introduced by foreigners. In the +summer of 1804 a pestilence, supposed to have been the cholera, carried +off half of the population of Oahu. Botany Bay convicts had introduced +the art of distilling liquor before the year 1800, and drunkenness had +become very prevalent. + + +THE SANDAL-WOOD TRADE. + +During the first quarter of the present century the sandal-wood trade +was at its height. This wood was in great request at Canton, where it +was sold for incense and the manufacture of fancy articles. It was +purchased by the picul of 133-1/2 pounds, the price varying from eight +to ten dollars for the picul. This wood, while it lasted, was a mine of +wealth for the chiefs, by means of which they were enabled to buy fire +arms, liquor, boats and schooners, as well as silks and other Chinese +goods, for which they paid exorbitant prices. + + +THE CESSION OF KAUAI. + +In March, 1810, Kaumualii, the last King of Kauai, visited Honolulu in +the ship Albatross, Capt. Nathan Winship, in order to have an interview +with Kamehameha. It was then arranged between the two chiefs that +Kaumualii should continue to hold his Island in fief of Kamehameha +during his life-time, on condition of paying tribute. + + +RUSSIAN AGGRESSIONS. + +During the year 1815 a Dr. Scheffer was sent to the Islands by Baranoff, +the Russian Governor of Alaska. He built a fort at Waimea, for +Kaumualii, on which the Russian colors were displayed, and urged him to +place himself under the protection of Russia. On hearing of this, +Kamehameha sent a large force to Honolulu, where a substantial fort was +built during the year 1816. He also sent orders to Kaumualii to expel +Dr. Scheffer, which was done. + + +DEATH OF KAMEHAMEHA. + +Kamehameha I. died on May 8th, 1819, at Kailua, Hawaii. His work was +done. He had consolidated the group under a strong government, put an +end to feudal anarchy and petty wars, and thus prepared the way for +civilization and Christianity. + + +ABOLITION OF IDOLATRY. + +In accordance with his will, his eldest son, Liholiho, was installed as +king, with the title of Kamehameha II., and Kaahumanu, his favorite +queen, as premier, to exercise equal powers with the young prince, whose +dissolute and reckless character is well known. + +Their first important act was the abolition of the tabu system, which +took place at a great feast held at Kailua in October, 1819, at which men +and women ate together in public for the first time. This was followed by +the general burning of idols and temples throughout the group. + +Kekuaokalani, a cousin of Liholiho, put himself at the head of the +adherents of the ancient faith, but was defeated and slain in the battle +of Kuamoo, fought about December 20th, 1819. + + +THE ARRIVAL OF THE AMERICAN MISSIONARIES. + +The pioneer company of American missionaries to these Islands arrived at +Kailua, April 4th, 1820. They soon reduced the language to writing and +commenced printing the first book in January, 1822. They found in the +Hawaiians an amiable and highly receptive race, eager for knowledge and +easily influenced for good or evil. The principal opposition to reform +was made by foreigners. + + +THE WHALING FLEET. + +The first whale ship called at Honolulu in 1820, and was soon followed +by many others. Their number soon increased to 100 every year, and the +furnishing of supplies for them became the chief resource of the +Islands, as the sandal-wood became exhausted. + + +DEATH OF LIHOLIHO. + +The young king, accompanied by his wife and six chiefs, embarked for +England, November 27, 1823, on an English whale ship. On their arrival +in London they received the utmost hospitality and courtesy, but in a +few weeks the whole party was attacked by the measles, of which the king +and queen both died. + + +REBELLION ON KAUAI. + +Meanwhile, on the death of Kaumualii, a rebellion broke out in Kauai, +led by his son, Humehume. A desperate assault was made on the fort at +Waimea, which was repulsed with loss. Over 1,000 warriors were sent down +from Oahu and Maui, and a battle was fought near Hanapepe, August 18th, +1824, in which the rebels were routed. + + +VISIT OF LORD BYRON. + +The frigate "Blonde," commanded by Lord Byron, cousin of the poet of +that name, was commissioned to convey the remains of the late king and +queen, together with their retinue, back to their native land. It +arrived at Honolulu, May 6th, 1825, when the royal remains were +deposited in a mausoleum with impressive funeral ceremonies. + +Kauikeaouli, the younger brother of Liholiho, was proclaimed king with +the title of Kamehameha III., and Kaahumanu as regent during his +minority. Her administration was signalized by a series of outrages at +Lahaina and Honolulu, committed by a depraved class of foreigners who +resented certain regulations made to restrict public prostitution. + +Com. Jones visited the Islands in the "Peacock" in 1826, and concluded +the first treaty between the Hawaiian Islands and the United States. The +next year the first written laws were published against murder, theft, +adultery and gambling. + + +THE ROMAN CATHOLIC MISSION. + +The first Roman Catholic missionaries arrived at Honolulu, July 7th, +1827, on the ship "Comet," from Bordeaux, and soon gathered a +congregation. They were members of the so-called "Picpusian Order," or +"Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary." Unfortunately, +misunderstandings arose, and from a mistaken belief that they were +fomenting discord and sedition, the chiefs caused them to be deported to +San Pedro, California, in January, 1832. + + +ACCESSION OF KAMEHAMEHA III. + +Kaahumanu died June 5th, 1832, and was succeeded by Kinau, half-sister +of the king. The king's minority was declared to be at an end in March, +1833. A tract of land was leased to Ladd & Co. in 1835, and about the +same time a silk plantation was commenced by Peck & Titcomb. Cotton was +raised and manufactured on a small scale at Kailua, Hawaii. + + +PERSECUTIONS. + +During the next few years the chiefs persisted in a harsh and +unjustifiable policy, which imperiled the independence of the country. + +On the return of the two banished priests from California, in April, +1837, they were ordered to return in the same vessel in which they had +come, and were obliged to go on board of it. Meanwhile the British sloop +of war "Sulphur," Captain Belcher, and the French frigate "Venus," +Captain Du Petit Thouars, arrived and interposed in behalf of the +priests. As a compromise, they were landed again on condition that they +should leave by the first favorable opportunity. Again on the 3d of +November, another priest, Rev. L. Maigret, and a lay brother arrived +from Valparaiso, but were not allowed to land. Finally Revs. Maigret and +Bachelot left in a schooner for Bonabe, Micronesia. From 1835 to 1839 +the persecution of native converts was resumed, but was at last put an +end to by the declaration of rights promulgated June 4th, 1839, and the +king's edict of toleration, issued June 17th. + + +VISIT OF THE "ARTEMISE." + +In consequence of these proceedings the French frigate "Artemise," +Captain Laplace, was ordered to Honolulu, where it arrived July 9th, 1839. + +Captain Laplace immediately sent the Government a peremptory letter +demanding that full religious liberty be proclaimed, and that the sum of +$20,000 be brought on board by noon of the 12th, or hostilities would +commence. The required treaty was signed and the money promptly paid, +and on the 16th, a commercial convention was also signed. + + +FIRST CONSTITUTION. + +The declaration of rights, mentioned above, which guaranteed religious +liberty, produced a feeling of security unknown before, and formed the +first step towards establishing individual property in land. The first +constitution was proclaimed October 8th, 1840. It constituted a +Legislature, consisting of a House of Hereditary Nobles, and +Representatives to be chosen by the people, who voted as a separate +house. It also defined the duties of the Governors and provided for a +Supreme Court. + + +THE FIRST EMBASSY. + +During the next two years the French and English consuls seemed to vie +with each other in the manufacture of petty grievances. Aware of the +dangers impending over it, the Hawaiian Government sent an embassy to +the United States, Great Britain and France, in July, 1842, which +consisted of Messrs. Haalilio, William Richards and Sir George Simpson, +one of the governors of the Hudson Bay Company. + + +VISIT OF CAPTAIN MALLET. + +On the 24th of August, 1842, the French corvette "Embuscade," Captain +Mallet, arrived at Honolulu, having been sent to investigate complaints +of the violation of the Laplace Convention, chiefly relating to local +school matters. Having received an able and courteous reply to his +demands, he informed the king that Admiral Du Petit Thouars might be +expected the next spring to settle these matters. + + +THE CESSION TO LORD PAULET. + +The dispatch of the embassy to Europe and the visit of Captain Mallet +both served to bring to a head the designs of Mr. Charlton, the British +consul. He suddenly left for London, leaving Alexander Simpson as +acting consul, in order to defeat the objects of the embassy. In +consequence of their representations, H. B. M. frigate "Carysford," +commanded by George Paulet, was ordered to Honolulu, arriving there +February 10, 1843. On the arrival of the king from Lahaina, Lord Paulet +sent him six demands, threatening war if they were not acceded to by 4 +p. m. of the next day. These demands chiefly related to a fraudulent +land claim of Charlton's, and to decisions of the courts in certain +civil suits between foreigners. Before the hour set for hostilities had +arrived, the king acceded to the demands under protest, and appealed to +the British Government for damages. But a fresh series of demands having +been made, and claims for damages having been trumped up amounting to +$80,000, the king decided, by Dr. Judd's advice, to forestall the +intended seizure of the Islands by a provisional cession, pending an +appeal to the justice of the home government. + +The act of cession was carried into effect February 25th, 1843. The +British flag took the place of the Hawaiian for five months, and a body +of native troops was organized and drilled by British officers. + +The country was meanwhile governed by a mixed commission consisting of +Lord Paulet, Lieutenant Frere, a Mr. Mackay and Dr. Judd. + +[Illustration: OAHU COLLEGE.] + +[Illustration: PAUAHI HALL, OAHU COLLEGE.] + + +THE RESTORATION. + +On being informed of these events, Admiral Thomas, Commander-in-Chief of +H. B. M.'s naval forces in the Pacific ocean, immediately sailed from +Valparaiso for the Islands, arriving at Honolulu July 25th, 1843. He +immediately issued a proclamation, declaring in the name of his +government that he did not accept of the provisional cession of the +Hawaiian Islands, and on the 31st restored the national flag with +impressive ceremonies. His course was fully approved of by the home +government, and certainly tended to exalt the reputation of his country +for justice and magnanimity in dealing with inferior races. + + +THE RECOGNITION OF HAWAIIAN INDEPENDENCE. + +Meanwhile the Hawaiian embassadors, who had been joined by Mr. Marshall, +the king's envoy, had done effective work in London and Paris. At their +request the matters in dispute had been referred to the law advisers of +the crown, who decided in favor of the Hawaiian Government on every +point except the Charlton land claim. At length, on the 28th of +November, 1843, the two governments of France and England issued a joint +declaration in which they recognized the independence of the Islands, +and reciprocally engaged "never to take possession, either directly or +under the title of a protectorate, or under any other form, of any part +of the territory of which they are composed." + + +ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT. + +Both the king and his advisers saw that in order to maintain a permanent +government it was necessary to combine both the native and foreign +elements together in one common organization, and to make the king the +sovereign not merely of one race or class, but of all. During the next +few years the executive departments of the Government and the judiciary +were organized by a group of men of remarkably high character and +ability. + + +LAND TITLES. + +During the period of 1846-1855 the ancient tenure of land was abolished, +and the foundation laid of individual property in land. In the first +place, the king as feudal suzerain divided the lands of the kingdom +between himself and each one of the chiefs, his feudatories, this +partition being recorded in a book called the _Mahele_ Book, or Book of +Division. After this first partition was closed, out of four million +acres there remained in the king's hands about two and a half millions. +The king then redivided the lands which had been surrendered to him, +setting apart about a million and a half acres for the Government, and +reserving for himself as his private domain, about a million acres, +including the best of the lands. The common people were granted fee +simple titles for their house lots and the lands which they actually +cultivated for themselves, called _Kuleanas_ or homesteads. + + +THE "REPRISALS" OF 1849. + +From 1843 till 1848 the most amicable relations continued to exist +between France and the Hawaiian Government. But this state of things was +then reversed by M. Dillon, the new French consul, who endeavored to +reopen all old disputes and to create new grievances in every possible +way. His principal grounds of complaint were the high duty on brandy and +the alleged partiality shown to the English language. On the 12th of +August, 1849, the French frigate "Poursuivante," Admiral De Tromelin, +arrived at Honolulu, and was joined the next day by the corvette +"Gassendi." + +On the 22d the admiral sent to the king ten demands, drawn up by M. +Dillon, allowing the Hawaiian Government three days in which to comply +with them. + +As these demands were firmly but courteously refused, an armed force was +landed on the 25th, which took possession of the deserted fort, the +custom house and other buildings, and the harbor was blockaded for ten +days. The fort was dismantled and the king's private yacht confiscated +by way of "reprisal," after which the "Poursuivante" sailed for San +Francisco, taking M. Dillon as a passenger. + + +THE SECOND EMBASSY TO FRANCE. + +The king immediately sent Dr. Judd as special commissioner to France, +accompanied by the two nephews of the king, Alexander, the +heir-apparent, and Lot Kamehameha. + +But on arriving in Paris they found that M. Dillon had preceded them, +and still retained the confidence of the Minister of Foreign Affairs. + +The embassy, however, agreed with Lord Palmerston upon the basis of a +new treaty with Great Britain. + + +THE U. S. PROTECTORATE. + +The French corvette "Serieuse" arrived at Honolulu, December 13, 1850, +bringing M. Perrin, Commissioner of France, and remained in port three +months. + +To the surprise of all, he presented again the identical ten demands of +his predecessor, and resumed his policy of petty annoyance and +interference with internal affairs of the kingdom. At length his +attitude became so menacing that the king and privy council passed a +proclamation placing the Islands provisionally under the protectorate of +the United States. This action was ratified by the next Legislature. +Although it was finally declined by the United States, it had the +desired effect, and the obnoxious demands were dropped. + + +THE CONSTITUTION OF 1852. + +Was a very liberal one for the times, and has formed the basis of all +succeeding constitutions. The nobles were to be appointed by the kings +for life. The representatives, who were to be not less than twenty-four +in number, were to be elected by universal suffrage. + + +INDUSTRIAL PROGRESS. + +Between the years 1850 and 1860 a large part of the government land was +sold to the common people in small tracts at nominal prices. + +The rapid settlement of California opened a new market for the +productions of the Islands, and gave a great stimulus to agriculture. +For a time large profits were made by raising potatoes for the +California market. Wheat was cultivated in the Makawao district, and a +steam flouring mill was erected in Honolulu in 1854. The next year 463 +barrels of Hawaiian flour were exported. A coffee plantation was started +at Hanalei, Kauai, in 1842, and promised well, but was attacked by +blight after the severe drought of 1851-2. The export of coffee rose to +208,000 pounds in 1850, but then fell off. The export of sugar only +reached 500 tons in 1853. The sugar mills were generally worked by oxen +or mules, and the molasses drained in the old fashioned way. + + +THE UNFINISHED ANNEXATION TREATY. + +The year 1853 was rendered memorable by a terrible epidemic of +small-pox, which carried off several thousand people on the Island of +Oahu. During that and the following year there was an active agitation +in Honolulu in favor of annexation to the United States. The king +favored it as a refuge from impending dangers. The missionaries +generally opposed it, fearing that its effects would be injurious to the +native race. The negotiations were carried on between Mr. Gregg, the +American Minister, and Mr. Wyllie, the Minister of Foreign Affairs, and +a draft of the treaty was completed in June, 1854. + +The representatives of France and Great Britain remonstrated with the +king against it, while the heir-apparent was also opposed to it. The +negotiation was still pending when the king suddenly died on the 15th of +December, 1854. + +His adopted son and heir, Alexander Liholiho, was immediately proclaimed +king, under the title of Kamehameha IV. + + +THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA IV. + +Was uneventful. He was married to Emma Rooke, a chiefess partly of English +descent, who both by her character and her talents was worthy of the +position. By their personal exertions the king and queen succeeded in +raising the funds with which to found the "Queen's Hospital" at +Honolulu. Their little son, the "Prince of Hawaii," died in 1862, at +four years of age, and with him expired the hope of the Kamehameha +dynasty. During the same year Bishop Staley, accompanied by a staff of +clergymen, arrived at Honolulu and commenced the Anglican Mission. + +During the following year the king was rapidly failing in health, and on +the 30th of November, 1863, he died, at the early age of twenty-nine, +and was succeeded by his elder brother, Prince Lot Kamehameha. + +The development of the country during his reign was nearly at a +stand-still. The cultivation of wheat as well as that of coffee was +given up, but the culture of rice was commenced in 1860, and proved to +be a great success. + + +THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA V. + +The reign of Kamehameha V. was memorable for the change of the +constitution which he made on his own authority, soon after coming to +the throne. The right of suffrage was made to depend on a small property +qualification and on ability to read and write. The Nobles and +representatives were henceforth to sit and vote in one chamber. During +his reign the Board of Education was constituted, the Bureau of +Immigration formed, and the Act passed in 1865 to segregate the lepers. + +A treaty of reciprocity with the United States was negotiated, but +failed of ratification by the Senate. + +A destructive eruption from Mauna Loa took place in 1868, in the +District of Kau. The almost total destruction of the whaling fleet in +the Arctic Sea in 1871 was a serious blow to the prosperity of the +Islands. + +The King died suddenly December 11th, 1872, and with him ended the line +of the Kamehamehas. + + +THE REIGN OF LUNALILO. + +As Kamehameha V. died without appointing any successor, the choice +devolved upon the Legislature, which met on the 8th of January, 1873, +and elected William Lunalilo, cousin of the late king, by a large +majority, amid general rejoicing. During that year, the proposal to cede +or lease Pearl Harbor to the United States in consideration of a treaty +of commercial reciprocity gave rise to an extensive agitation, which +intensified the suspicion and race prejudice that already existed. + +The execution of the law for the segregation of lepers helped to widen +the breach, and the effects were seen in the mutiny of the household +troops in September, 1873, which had the sympathy of the populace. + +The King's health was already failing, and on the 3d of February, 1874, +he died of pulmonary consumption. By his will he left the bulk of his +real estate to found a home for aged and indigent Hawaiians. + + +ACCESSION OF KALAKAUA. + +Again the Legislature was called together to elect his successor on the +12th of February, 1874. The two rival candidates were the Queen-Dowager +Emma and David Kalakaua, the latter of whom was elected by thirty-nine +votes to six. A large mob, composed of Queen Emma's partisans, +surrounded the court house during the election, after which they broke +into the building and assaulted the members of the Legislature. + +At the request of the Cabinet, a body of marines was landed from the U. +S. ships "Tuscarora" and "Portsmouth," and another from H. B. M.'s ship +"Tenedos," which dispersed the rioters and guarded the public buildings +for a week. Kalakaua was sworn in at noon the next day, and duly +proclaimed King. + + +THE RECIPROCITY TREATY. + +During the next year negotiations were opened with the United States for +a treaty of commercial reciprocity, which was ratified in June, 1875, +and finally went into operation in September, 1876, in spite of bitter +opposition in both countries. The development of the resources of the +Islands, which has resulted from this treaty, has surpassed all +expectation. In connection with it there has also been a large increase +of the foreign elements in the population. + + +THE KING'S TOUR AROUND THE WORLD. + +On the 20th of January, 1881, King Kalakaua set out on a tour around the +world, accompanied by the late Col. C. H. Judd, and Mr. W. N. Armstrong. +He was received with royal honors in Japan, and afterwards visited +China, Siam, Johore and British India. After visiting the Khedive of +Egypt, the party made the tour of Europe, and returned home by way of +the United States, arriving in Honolulu Oct. 29, 1881. + + +REACTIONARY POLICY OF KALAKAUA. + +Unlike his predecessors, Kalakaua seemed to regard himself as merely a +king of the native Hawaiians, and foreign residents as alien invaders. +It also seemed to be his chief aim to change the system of government +into a personal despotism, in which he should have unchecked control of +the Government Treasury. Thus he took it upon himself in July, 1878, and +again in August, 1880, to dismiss a Ministry, without assigning any +reason, immediately after it had been triumphantly sustained by a vote +of the Legislature. On the latter occasion, his appointment of Celso +Caesar Moreno as premier called forth the protest of the representatives +of three great Powers, and such an uprising of the people that he had to +give way. Adroit politicians were not wanting to flatter his vanity, +defend his follies, and show him how to violate the spirit and intent +of the Constitution, while keeping within the letter of the law. The +Legislatures were packed with subservient office-holders, while every +artifice was used to debauch the native electorate and to foment race +prejudice. The national debt grew up from $389,000 in 1880 to $1,936,000 +in 1887. At the same time, under the existing law, no foreigner could be +naturalized without the King's approval. + +[Illustration: MASONIC TEMPLE.] + +[Illustration: KAMEHAMEHA MUSEUM.] + + +THE REVOLUTION OF 1887. + +After the legislative session of 1886, the King was virtually his own +prime minister, and went from one folly to another, until his acceptance +of two bribes, one of $75,000 and another of $80,000 in connection with +the assignment of an opium license, precipitated the revolution of +1887. Overawed by the unanimity of the movement, and deserted by his +followers, the King yielded without a struggle. The Constitution +which he was pleased to sign on the 7th of July, 1887, was a revision +of that of 1864, intended to put an end to mere personal government, +and to make the executive responsible to the representatives of the +people. Office-holders were made ineligible to seats in the Legislature. +The Ministers were henceforth to be removable only upon a vote of want +of confidence passed by a majority of all the elective members of +the Legislature. The Nobles, instead of being appointed by the King, +were to be elected for terms of six years, by electors who should +be possessed of taxable property worth $3,000, or in receipt of an +annual income of $600. + + +THE INSURRECTION OF 1889. + +The opposition of the Court and of other adherents of the old regime, to +the reforms of 1887, led to an insurrection headed by R. W. Wilcox, on +the 30th of July, 1889 which was promptly put down, but not without +bloodshed. Seven of the rioters were killed and a large number wounded. + +There can be little doubt that the late King and his sister were +accessory to this ill-advised outbreak. + + +ACCESSION OF LILIUOKALANI. + +In order to recruit his health, the King visited California in November, +1890. In spite of the best medical attendance, he continued to fail, and +breathed his last on the 20th of January, 1891, in San Francisco. His +remains were brought to Honolulu in the U. S. S. "Charleston," arriving +there January 29th, 1891. On the same day, his sister took the oath to +maintain the Constitution, and was proclaimed Queen, under the title of +Liliuokalani. + + +THE REVOLUTION OF 1893. + +The ex-Queen in a published statement has since declared that she signed +the Constitution unwillingly. The history of her short reign shows that +it was her unaltered purpose to restore autocratic government. In short, +she was determined to govern as well as to reign. + +The decision of the Supreme Court that the term of the last Cabinet +expired with the King, gave her an opportunity (which she improved), to +dictate terms in advance to the incoming Cabinet, and to secure control +of all appointments. The legislative session of 1892 was protracted to +eight months chiefly by her determination to retain her control of the +Executive, as well as to carry through the opium and lottery bills. +Meanwhile she had caused a Constitution to be drawn up, which would +practically, have transformed the government from a limited to an +absolute monarchy, besides disfranchising a class of citizens who paid +two-thirds of the taxes. This Constitution she undertook to spring upon +the country by a _coup d'etat_, on the day of the prorogation of the +Legislature, January 14th, 1893. + +Fortunately, at the critical moment, when her preparations were +complete, her Ministers shrank from sharing the responsibility of +such a revolutionary act, and induced her to postpone it. In such +an undertaking to hesitate is fatal. + +Again there was a general uprising of the conservative part of the +community similar to that of 1887. But this time public opinion +condemned all half way measures, and declared the monarchy to be +forfeited by its own act. + +The Reform leaders reorganized their forces, and formed a Provisional +Government, which was proclaimed January 17th, 1893 from the Government +Building. The U. S. S. "Boston," which had unexpectedly arrived from +Hilo on the day of the prorogation, landed a force on the 16th, to +protect the lives and property of American citizens, in case of disorder +or incendiarism. The Queen's ministers availed themselves of the +presence of these troops on shore as an excuse for their inaction, and +persuaded the Queen to resign under protest, and to appeal to the +government of the United States. + +A treaty of annexation was soon after negotiated with the United States +during President Harrison's administration, which was withdrawn by +President Cleveland immediately after his accession. The failure of his +attempt to restore the monarchy by diplomacy is well known. + + +THE REPUBLIC OF HAWAII. + +During the next year a convention was elected, which sat in Honolulu +during the month of June, 1894, and framed a new Constitution for the +country, and the Republic of Hawaii was formally proclaimed July 4, 1894. + +Another royalist conspiracy was formed during the fall of that year, +which resulted in the insurrection of January 6th, 1895, which was +promptly crushed by the patriotic citizens of the Republic. + +A dangerous epidemic of Asiatic cholera in the following September, was +stamped out by the united efforts of the public spirited citizens of +Honolulu. + +For four years, in spite of hostile influences from without and enemies +at home, the Republic has maintained peace and order, administered +justice, carried on extensive internal improvements, advanced education, +and kept the financial credit of the nation above par in the markets of +the world. + + +OFFICIAL DIRECTORY, REPUBLIC OF HAWAII. + +EXECUTIVE COUNCIL. + +Sanford B. Dole, President of the Republic of Hawaii. + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Foreign Affairs. + +James A. King, Minister of the Interior. + +Samuel M. Damon, Minister of Finance. + +William O. Smith, Attorney-General. + + +COUNCIL OF STATE. + +William C. Wilder, + +Cecil Brown, + +P. C. Jones, + +J. A. Kennedy, + +C. Bolte, + +George W. Smith, + +John Phillips, + +D. L. Naone, + +A. G. M. Robertson, + +E. C. Winston, + +Mark P. Robinson, + +John Ena, + +Samuel M. Ka-ne, + +John Nott, + +J. P. Mendonca. + + +SUPREME COURT. + +Hon. A. F. Judd, Chief Justice. + +Hon. W. F. Frear, First Associate Justice. + +Hon. W. Austin Whiting, Second Associate Justice. + +Henry Smith, Chief Clerk. + +Geo. Lucas, Deputy Clerk. + +James Thompson, Second Deputy Clerk. + +J. Walter Jones, Stenographer. + + +CIRCUIT JUDGES. + +First Circuit--Alfred W. Carter, Antonio Perry, Oahu. + +Second Circuit--J. W. Kalua. + +Third and Fourth Circuits--S. L. Austin. + +Fifth Circuit--J. Hardy. + +Offices and Court-room in Court House, King street. Sitting in Honolulu: +First Monday in February, May, August and November. + + +DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister Foreign Affairs. + +George C. Potter, Secretary. + +Alexander St. M. Mackintosh, Clerk. + +Miss Kate Kelley, Stenographer. + +B. L. Marx, Clerk Executive Council. + +James W. Girvin, Secretary Chinese Bureau. + + +DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +James A. King, Minister of the Interior. + +Chief Clerk, John A. Hassinger. + +Assistant Clerks, James H. Boyd, H. C. Meyers, Stephen Mahaulu, + George C. Ross, Edward S. Boyd. + + +CHIEFS OF BUREAUS, INTERIOR DEPARTMENT. + +Surveyor-General, W. D. Alexander. + +Superintendent Public Works, W. E. Rowell. + +Superintendent Water Works, Andrew Brown. + +Inspector Electric Lights, John Cassidy. + +Registrar of Conveyances, T. G. Thrum. + +Road Supervisor, Honolulu, W. H. Cummings. + +Insane Asylum, Dr. Geo. H. Herbert. + + +BOARD OF FIRE COMMISSIONERS. + +Andrew Brown, Charles Crozier and J. H. Fisher. + +James H. Hunt, Chief Engineer, H. F. D. + +William R. Sims, Secretary. + + +BUREAU OF AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY. + +President, the Minister of the Interior. Allan Herbert, Thomas King, + Wray Taylor, E. W. Jordan. Joseph Marsden, Commissioner and Secretary. + + +DEPARTMENT OF FINANCE. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Minister of Finance, Samuel M. Damon. + +Auditor-General, H. Laws. + +Registrar of Accounts, W. G. Ashley. + +Clerk of Finance Office, E. R. Stackable. + +Collector-General of Customs, James B. Castle. + +Tax Assessor, Oahu, Jonathan Shaw. + +Postmaster-General, J. M. Oat. + + +CUSTOMS BUREAU. + +Office in Custom House, Esplanade, Fort street. + +Collector-General, James B. Castle. + +Deputy Collector, Frank B. McStocker. + +Harbor Master, Captain A. Fuller. + +Port Surveyor, George C. Stratemeyer. + +Storekeeper, ......... + + +DEPARTMENT OF ATTORNEY-GENERAL. + +Office in Executive Building, King street. + +Attorney-General, William O. Smith. + +Deputy Attorney-General, E. P. Dole. + +Clerk, J. M. Kea. + +Marshal, A. M. Brown. + +Deputy Marshal, H. R. Hitchcock. + +Jailor Oahu Prison, J. A. Low. + +Prison Physician, C. B. Cooper, M. D. + + +DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + + +Henry E. Cooper, Minister of Public Instruction. + +Commissioners, Professor William Dewitt Alexander, Mrs. Emma Louisa + Dillingham, Mr. William A. Bowen, Mrs. Alice Clark Jordan, + Mr. H. M. von Holt. + +H. S. Townsend, Inspector-General of Schools. + +J. F. Scott, Deputy Inspector-General of Schools. + +C. T. Rodgers, Secretary of Department. + + +BOARD OF IMMIGRATION. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + +President, James A. King. + +Members of Board of Immigration, J. B. Atherton, Joseph Marsden, + D. B. Smith, James G. Spencer, J. Carden. Secretary, Wray Taylor. + + +BOARD OF HEALTH. + +Office in Judiciary Building. + +President, William O. Smith. + +Secretary, Charles Wilcox. + +Members, D. Keliipio, C. A. Brown, N. B. Emerson, M. D.; + F. R. Day, M. D.; C. B. Wood, M. D., and T. F. Lansing. + +Port Physician, Dr. Francis Day. + +Dispensary, Dr. H. W. Howard. + +Leper Settlement, Dr. R. K. Oliver. + + +POLICE COURT. + +Police Station Building, Merchant street. + +George H. de la Vergne, Magistrate. + +William Cuelho, Clerk. + +[Illustration: KAWAIAHAO CHURCH (Hawaiian).] + +[Illustration: CENTRAL UNION CHURCH.] + + * * * * * + + +FOREIGN REPRESENTATIVES IN HONOLULU. + +_Diplomatic._ + +United States--Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary, + Albert S. Willis, Esq.; residence, King St. Ellis Mills, Esq., + Secretary of Legation. + +Portugal--Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General, Senhor A. de Souza + Canavarro; residence, Beretania St. + +Great Britain--Commissioner and Consul-General, Captain A. G. S. Hawes. + +Japan--Diplomatic Agent and Consul-General, Mr. H. Shimamura; + residence, Nuuanu Ave. H. I. J. M. Eleve Consul, Mr. K. Mimashi, + Secretary H. I. J. M. Consulate-General. + +France--Consul and Commissioner, Mons. Louis Voisson; Chancellor + of Legation, Mons. A. Vizzavona. + + +_Consular._ + +United States--Consul-General, Ellis Mills. W. Porter Boyd, United + States Vice and Deputy Consul-General. + +Italy--F. A. Schaefer, Consul. (Dean of the Consular Corps.) + +Netherlands--J. H. Paty, Consul. + +Denmark--H. R. Macfarlane, Consul. + +Mexico, H. Renjes, Consul. + +Peru--Bruce Cartwright, Consul. + +Chile--Julius Hoting, Consul. + +Austria-Hungary--J. F. Hackfeld, Consul. + +Germany--J. F. Hackfeld, Consul. + +Belgium--H. Focke, Consul. + +Great Britain--T. R. Walker, Vice-Consul. + +Spain--H. Renjes, Vice-Consul. + +Russia--J. F. Hackfeld, Acting Vice-Consul. + +Sweden and Norway--Charles Weight, Acting Consul. + +China--Goo Kim Fui, Commercial Agent; Wong Kwai, Assistant + Commercial Agent. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Kahului, A. J. Dickens, Acting. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Mahukona, C. J. Falk. + +U. S. Consular Agent, Hilo, Charles Furneaux. + + * * * * * + + +PRINCIPAL HAWAIIAN REPRESENTATIVES ABROAD. + + +_United States._ + +Washington, D. C.--Francis M. Hatch, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister + Plenipotentiary; Major Frank P. Hastings, Charge d'Affaires and + Secretary of Legation. + +New York--E. H. Allen, Consul-General. + +Chicago--Fred W. Job, Consul-General for the States of Illinois, + Michigan, Ohio, Indiana and Wisconsin. + +San Francisco--Charles T. Wilder, Consul-General for the Pacific + States, California, Oregon, Nevada and Washington; J. F. Soper, + Vice and Deputy Consul-General. + +Boston--Gorham D. Gilman, Consul-General. + +Portland, Oregon--J. McCracken, Consul. + +Port Townsend--James G. Swan, Consul. + +Seattle--John H. Carter, Consul. + +Tacoma--J. T. Steeb, Acting Consul. + +Philadelphia--Robert H. Davis, Consul. + +San Diego--H. P. Wood, Consul. + +Detroit--A. L. Bresler, Consul. + + +_Great Britain._ + +London--Manley Hopkins, Consul-General; Cyril Hopkins, Vice-Consul. + +Liverpool--Harold Janion, Consul. + +Bristol--Mark Whitwill, Consul. + +Hull--W. Moran, Consul. + +Newcastle-on-Tyne--E. Biesterfeld, Consul. + +Falmouth--Cecil Robert Broad, Consul. + +Dover (and the Cinque Ports)--Francis Wm. Prescott, Consul. + +Swansea--H. Goldberg, Consul. + +Cardiff--J. Bovey, Consul. + +Edinburgh and Leith--E. G. Buchanan, Consul. + +Glasgow--Peter Denniston, Consul. + +Dundee--J. G. Zoller, Consul. + +Dublin--R. Jas. Murphy, Consul. + +Queenstown--Geo. B. Dawson, Consul. + +Belfast--W. A. Ross, Consul. + +Middlesborough--B. C. Atkinson, Consul. + + +_British Colonies._ + +Toronto, Ontario--J. Enoch Thompson, Consul-General; Col. Geo. A. Shaw, + Vice-Consul. + +St. John's, N. B.--Allan O. Crookshank, Consul. + +Rimouski--J. N. Pouliot, Vice-Consul. + +Montreal--Dickson Anderson, Consul. + +Yarmouth, N. S.--Ed. F. Clements, Vice-Consul. + +Victoria, B. C.--R. P. Rithet, Consul-General for British Columbia. + +Vancouver, B. C.--J. W. McFarland, Vice-Consul. + +Sydney, N. S. W.--W. E. Dixon, Consul-General. + +Melbourne, Victoria--G. N. Oakley, Consul. + +Brisbane, Queensland--Alex. B. Webster, Consul. + +Hobart, Tasmania--Hon. Audley Coote, Consul. + +Launceston, Tasmania--Geo. Collins, Vice-Consul. + +Newcastle, N. S. W.--W. J. Gillam, Consul. + +Auckland, N. Z.--James Macfarlane, Consul. + +Dunedin, N. Z.--W. G. Neill, Consul. + +Gibraltar--H. Schott, Consul. + + +_France and Colonies._ + +Paris--Alfred Houle, Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General; + A. N. H. Teyssier, Consul. + +Marseilles--........, Consul. + +Bordeaux--Ernest de Boissac, Consul. + +Dijon--H. F. J. Vieilhomme, Consul. + +Liborne--C. Schaessler, Vice-Consul. + +Cette--Julius Chavasse, Vice-Consul. + +Grenoble--J. L. Garcin, Vice-Consul. + +Papeete, Tahiti--E. A. Bonet, Consul. + + +_Spain._ + +Barcelona--Enrique Minguez, Consul-General. + +Cadiz--J. Shaw, Consul. + +Valencia--Julio Soler, Consul. + +Malaga--F. T. de Navarra, Consul. + +Cartagena--J. Paris, Consul. + + +_Portugal and Colonies._ + +Lisbon--A. F. de Serpa, Consul-General. + +Oporto--Narciso T. M. Ferro, Consul. + +Madeira Island--L. D. F. Branco, Consul. + +Cape Vincent, Cape de Verde Islands--Clarimundo Martins, Vice-Consul. + +Lagos, Cape de Verde Islands--Manuel Jose Barbosa, Vice-Consul. + + +_Azores Islands._ + +Ponta Delgardo (St. Michaels)--Senhor Bernardo Machado de Faria Maia, + Consul-General; A. da Silva Moreira, Consul. + + +_Italy._ + +Rome--Dwight Benton, Consul-General; Hale P. Benton, Vice and Deputy + Consul-General. + +Palermo, Sicily--A. Tagliavia, Consul. + +Genoa--Raphael de Luchi, Consul. + + +_Holland._ + +Amsterdam--D. H. Schmull, Consul-General. + +Dordrecht--P. J. Bouwman, Consul. + + +_Japan._ + +Tokio--R. W. Irwin, Minister Resident. + +Kobe--C. P. Hall, Vice-Consul. + +Yokohama--B. C. Howard, Consul; Dr. Stuart Eldridge, M. D., + Sanitary Inspector. + + +_China._ + +Hong Kong--J. J. Bell Irving, Acting Consul-General; Dr. Gregory P. + Jordan, M. D., Sanitary Inspector. + +Amoy--Robert H. Bruce, Consul; Dr. Hugh MacDougald, M. D., + Sanitary Inspector. + + +_Belgium._ + +Antwerp--Victor Forge, Consul-General. + +Ghent--E. Coppieters, Consul. + +Liege--J. Blanpain, Consul. + +Bruges--E. Van Den Brande, Consul. + + +_Sweden and Norway._ + +Stockholm, Sweden--C. A. Engvalls, Consul-General. + +Christiana, Norway--L. Samson, Consul. + +Gothemburg, Sweden--Gustaf Kraak, Vice-Consul. + + +_Austria._ + +Vienna--Hugo Schonberger, Consul. + + +_Germany and Colonies._ + +Bremen--H. F. Glade, Charge d'Affaires and Consul-General; + J. F. Muller, Consul. + +Hamburg--E. F. Weber, Consul. + +Frankfort-on-Main--J. Kopp, Consul. + +Dresden--A. P. Russ, Consul. + + +_Canary Islands._ + +Las Palamas--L. Falcon y Quevedo, Consul; J. B. De Laguna, Vice-Consul. + +Santa Cruz de la Palma--Antonio C. de las Casas, Vice-Consul. + +Areciefe de Lanzarote--E. Murales, Vice-Consul. + + +_Mexico._ + +Mexico--Col. W. J. De Gress, Consul-General; R. H. Baker, Vice-Consul. + +Manzanillo--Robert James Barney, Consul. + +Ensenada--James Moorkens, Vice-Consul. + + +_Central and South America._ + +Valparaiso, South America--David Thomas, Charge d'Affaires and + Consul-General. + +Lima, South America--F. L. Crosby, Consul. + +Montevideo, South America--Conrad Hughes, Consul. + + +_Philippine Islands._ + +Iloilo--Geo. Shelmerdine, Consul. + +Manila--Jasper M. Wood, Consul. + +Cebu--Geo. A. Cadell, Consul. + + + + +Transcriber's Note + +With the exception of OCEANIC STEAMSHIP AUSTRALIA, the illustrations and +cover image come from a slightly different printing of the pamphlet than +the text. + +Minor typographical errors and irregularities have been corrected. + +The table of contents and list of illustrations have been added for the +reader's convenience. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Hawaiian Islands, by +The Department of Foreign Affairs + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS *** + +***** This file should be named 29383.txt or 29383.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/9/3/8/29383/ + +Produced by Steven Giacomelli, Andrew D. Hwang and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net +(This file was produced from images generously made +available by Case Western Reserve University Preservation +Department Digital Library) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/29383.zip b/29383.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb15850 --- /dev/null +++ b/29383.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a84c69b --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #29383 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/29383) |
